faculty of science and mathematics faculty handbook 1993 › 2011 › 02 › faculty_of... ·...
TRANSCRIPT
FACULTY OF
SCIENCE
AND MATHEMATICS
Volume 14 1993
ONNItRSITY OF NEWCASTLE
ARCHIVES SERIAL
The University of Newcastle
Faculty of Science and Mathematics
Handbook
THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE New South Wales
LocaUon Address: University Drive, Callaghan
Postal Address: The University of Newcastle NSW 2308
Telephone: (049) 215000
Telex: AA28194 - Library
AA28618 - Bursar
AA28784 - lUNRA (The University of Newcastle Research Associates Limited)
Facsimile: (049) 21.5669
Hours of Business: Mondays to Fridays excepting public holidays 9 am to 5 pm
The University of NewcasUe Calendar consists of the following volumes:
Volume I
Volume 2
Volume 3
Volume 4
Volume 5
Volume 6
Volume 7
Volume 8
Volume 9
Volume 10
Volume II
Volume 12
Volume 13
Volume 14
Volume 15
Legislation
University Bodies and Staff
Faculty of Architecture Handbook
Faculty of Art, Design and Communication Handbook
Faculty of Arts Handbook
Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook
Faculty of Education Handbook
Faculty of Engineering Handbook
Faculty of Health Sciences Handbook
Faculty of Law Handbook
Faculty of Medicine Handbook
Faculty of Music Handbook
Faculty of Nusing Handbook
Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook
Faculty of Social Science Handbook
Also available are the Undergraduate Guides
This volume is intended as a reference handbook for students enrolling in courses conducted by the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
The colour band, Topaz BCC4, on the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelors of Science of this University. The colour band, Amethyst BCC 28, in the center of the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelor of Mathematics of this University.
The information in this Handbook is correct as at 9th October 1992.
ISSN 1034 - 4489
Recommended Price: Five dollars and fifty cents plus postage.
Designed by: Marie-T Wisniowski
Typeset. by: Ian Spurr, The Secretariat Division, The University of Newcastle
by: NewcasUe Camera Print
CONTENTS
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS
SECfION ONE FACULTY STAFF
SECTION TWO FACULTY INFORM A nON
SECfIONTHREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREEIDIPLOMA RULES
Undergraduate DlplornalDegrees offered in the Faculty General Rules
SECfION FOUR
SECfION FIVE
Combined Degree Course Rules Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management Bachelor of Environmental Science Bachelor of Science Bachelor of Science (A viation) Bachelor of Mathematics
Combined Degree Courses Bachelor of Science (Psychology) Diploma in Aviation Science Diploma In A vlalion Science Rules
APPROVED SUBJECT LISTS
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRII'TIONS Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries Applied Science and Technology Aviation Biological Sciences Chemistry Environmental Science Geography Geology Mathematics Physics Psychology Computer Science Information Science Philosophy: Scientific Method Statistics
SECfION SIX RECOMME:\'DED PROGRAMS
SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES
Bachelor of Science (Honours) Bachelor of Science Aviation (Honours) Bachelor of Applied Science (Environmental Assessment and Management) Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours) Graduate Diploma in Environmental Studies Graduate Diploma in Mathematical Studies
1
9
14 14 14 IS 16 18 22 28 31 31 3S 37 37
39
54 54 54 60 68 72 77 78 81 84 9S 97
101 103 103 104
107
114 114 116 118 120 122 124
CONTENTS
Masters Degrees Master of Environmental Studies Master of Mathematics Master of Psychology (Clinical)/Master of Psychology (Educational)
Master of Science Master of Scientific Studies
SECTION EIGHT POSTGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
SECTION NINE SUBJECT COMPUTER NUMBERS
126 126 128 128 130 130
133
147
SECTION TEN GENERAL INFORMATION Iocaled in centre section
PRINCIPAL DATES 1993
ADVICE AND INFORMATION
ENROLMENT AND RE-ENROLMENT
LEAVE OF ABSENCE
ATTENDANCE AT CLASSES
GENERAL CONDUCT
EXAMINATIONS
STATEMENTS OF ACADEMIC RECORD
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS - Rules
CHARGES
HIGHER EDUCATION CONTRIBUTION SCHEME (HECS)
LOANS
REFUND OF CHARGES
CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING
MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES Banking
Cashier
Chaplaincy Service
Community Programmes
Convocation
Co-op Bookshop
Lost Property
Noticcboards
Post Office
Public Transport
Student Insurance Cover
University Computing Services
University Libraries
II
III
V
V
V
v
viii
viii
x
x
xi
xi
xi
xii
xii
xii
xii
xii
xii
xii
xii
xii xii
xiii
xiii
xiv
I il
THE DEAN'S FOREWORD
The Faculty of Science and Mathematics comprises the Departments of Aviation. Applied Science and Technology. Biological Sciences, Chemistry. Geography, Geology. Mathematics, Physics and Psychology.
Undergraduate Degrees handled by the Faculty include the Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science ( Aviation), Bachelorof Science (Psychology), Bachelor of Mathematics, Bachelor of Applied Science (Environmental Assessment and Management), Bachelor of Environmental Science and a number of combined degrees with other Faculties.
This Handbook provides details relating to these degrees.
Students enrolled in a Science or Mathematics degree should be aware that they can apply to take subjects in Computer Science (offered within the Faculty of Fngineering) but because of strict quota restrictions on entry to Computer Science 101, may not be successful in gaining a place. Subjects from Stali sties, Inf onnation Science and a number of other disciplines can be pursued within the various degree programs. In the Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Mathematics degrees, students may take a sequence of subjects from outside the Faculty ,thus combining expertise in basic science and/or mathematics with a wide range of elective areas such as languages and other humanities, accountancy, management, computing and engineering.
Those students entering university for the first time will find the system of instruction vastly different from that in secondary schools. Theresponsibility is placed on the student to extract the maximum benefit from the course. University staff will lecture to you and during that time you are expected to make notes about the materia1 being presented. Some students respond by lTying to take down the lecture verbatim but without understanding, others listen and make notes in outline form, copying down quotations or blackboard materia1, while a minority, overwhelmed by the volume and complexity of the subject matter, sim pi y contempl ate their next social engagement, to their own disadvantage. Two issues will beimportant for your ultimate success. The first is the
development of an efficient note taking system and in Uris you should seek the assistance of the Student Counselling Unit which provides relevant short courses. The second is that, apart from regular tutorials, tests, and final examinations, no one will follow up your com prehension of the lecture material other than yourself. The Faculty expects you to spend at least one hour of your time on private study for every contact hour that you have with University staff. You need toallocate Uris from the very beginning of your course and if you delay the process you will probably never make up the lost time. A well planned, uniform program of work to support your lectures, tutorials and laboratory classes will allow you to develop your understanding of the subjects and enjoy the many other facets of university life.
The quality of your tertiary education depends upon your ability to make efficient use of the University Library. Ensure that you take part in the orientation programs which the Library staff offer at the beginning of every year. Throughout your course the teaching and administrative staff of the University are !"tere to guide you and if you need assistance it is available at a number of levels. DUficulties with particular subjects should bediscussed with the lecturer or tutor concerned or the Year Supervisor in each Department. Problems with your degree structure and progression are the province of the Assistant Deans and the Dean who will give guidance when required. Day to day changes in your current enrolment are handled by the Assistant Registrar who can be found in the School Office which is located in the Science Building adjoining Chemistry.
In a climate where government charges for tertiary education have risen steeply, you must make the most of your time at University by using its resources to the full. Learn to organise your thoughts, expand your mind, and develop your critical faculties to the utmost in order to provide yourself with qUalifications which will lead to asuccessful carccrand satisfying life.
D_C. FINLAY, Dean
,I"",
";'-'. -'------.... '
"--<"<;..:--
SECTION ONE
PRINCIPAL OFFICERS
Vice-Chancellor and Principal Professor K.J. Morgan, BSc, MA, DPhil(Oxf)
Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Academic) Professor M.P. Carter, BA(Nott), PhD(Edin)
Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Administration) L.F. Hennessy, BA(Syd)
Deputy Vice-Chancellor (planning) n.R. Huxley, BA. LittB(NE}, MA. PhD
Pro Vice-Chancellor and Dean of Students Professor K.R. Dutton, MA(Syd), DU(Paris), Officier des Palmes acaMmiques, FACE
Pro Vice-Chancellor (Development) L.R. EaslCQtt, MEd(Syd), PhD(Alberta), BA, DipEd
Deputy President of Academic Senate Professor P.L. Clarke, BEe, PhD(Syd), FCPA, ACIS, ACIM
Dean for Research Professor R.I. MacDonald, BSc, PhD(NSW). FAIP
SCHOOL/FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF Director B.A. Engel, MSc(NE), PhD
Accountant M. Janissen. BCom, MNIA Senior Computer Programmer RJ.Dea:r
Computer Programmers
C.Mason, MA(Camb), MSc(ply)
1. Symon, BSc
T. Wiklendt, BCompSci
nean D.C. Finlay, MSc, PhD(Mclb), MAPsS
Assistant Deans
J.G. Couper, BSc, PhD(NE)
C.E. Lee, BA, PhD(Adel), MAPsS
Assistant Registrar H.R. Hotchkiss, BA, DipEd(NE)
Administrative Assistant K.A. Hodyl, BCom(NSW)
Office Staff N.H. Adams
SECfIONONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
DEPARTMENT OF APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
R. Clark, Teach Cert, BSc, MSc(NSW), FRACI, CChem, MACE (Head of Department)
Senior Lecturers
R.w. Hosken, BSc(WA), MSc(Monash), MBA, PhD
K. McDonald, OAM, MLilt, MA(NE), MEdSlud, FACE, FAAEE,MEIA
Lecturers
L.R. Carlin, BEd. DipAdultEdn, DipFDesign. DipDesign, ACFI
R.G. Fairall, BSc, MEugSc(NSW), GradDip (Malhs) C.S.U Milchell
P.M. Geary, BSc, MSc, DipEd, MEIA,MAWWA
S.A. Grenquist, BA, BS. MSc{Notre Dame)
R.w. Kidd, BSc(NSW), PhD(Macq), MEIA
M.A. Linich, DipTeach (NTC), BSc, MScSlud
J. Ma, BSc(NSW), MSc, PhD(HK), CEug, MIEE, MIE(AuSl)
M.J. Mahony, BA, DipEd, PhD(Macq)
KJ. Sutton, BEdSlud, GradOipEdStud(Special Edue), MEdStud, DipTeach(IndArts)
A. Williams, DipTeaeh(AppArts)(Avondale), BEd(IA)NCAE)
P.I. Williams, BA, DipTeach, MA, PhD
R.M. Williamson-Haydon, BSe(NSW), ATI
Associate Lecturers
H. Farrah, BSc(Qld), DipEd
J. Hayden, BEd, DipTeach (NCAE)
Technical Officers
A. Lieb
J. Wold
Laboratory Craftspcrsons
G. Jenkins
M. Chandler
Laboratory Assistant C. Walker
Laboratory Attendants
R. Davis
J. Elliott
M. Guest
K. Strong
Departmental Office Staff
K Allan
L. Linkla1er
DEPARTMENT OF AVIATION
Professor R.A. Telfer, BA(NSW), MEdAdminHons(NE), PhD, DipEdAdmin(NE) (Head of Department)
Lecturers
D. Christley, BA(Macq) FAIN
N. Crawford, BA DipEd eras)
I. Henley, BEd(Alberta), Adult Edue Cert. (Nova Scotia) MA(Alberta), MEd(Manitoba)
M.J. Ross, BA(Melb), GradDipAppPsych(Chisholm)
A. Ulmer, BSc(Phys), BE(Aero)(Syd) ;2 i
j
SECfIONONE
Technical Officer I. Stephens
Departmental Office Staff L. Gamer
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
Professor B. Boettcher, BSc, PhD(Adel)
Associate Professors
R.C. Jones, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)
J.W. Palrick, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq)
T.K. Roberts, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin)
RJ. Rose, BScAgr(Syd), PhD(Macq) (Head or Department)
Senior Lecturers
B.A. Conroy, BSc, PhD(Syd)
R.N. Murdoch, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)
C.E. Offler, BSc, PhD(Adel)
J.C. Rodger, BSc(NSW), PhD(Syd)
Lecturer R.H. Dunstan, BScAgr(Adel), D.PhiI(Oxf)
Honorary Associates
D. McNair
K. Myers, BSc, DSc(Syd)
J.D.stanger, BSc (James Cook), PhD
Associate Lecturers
M. Conroy, BSc, Dip Ed(Syd), PGDip Planl & Wildlife Illus(NCAE)
P. Lake, BSc, MSc(Tor)
M. Lin, MSAgric(Jiangxi), PhD
C.M.R. Pelers, BA, BSc(Syd)
Professional Officers
D.J. Kay, BSc(Adel), PhD
1. Clulow, BSc, BA, PhD
Technical Officers
E. Blajet
R. Campbell
E. Stark
R.J. Tayler
Laboratory Craftsperson J.P. NohUl
Laboratory Assistants
D.L. Brennan
T.D. Frost
B. Hayes
J.J. Nairn
L.D. Pezely
K.H. Stokes
Departmental Office Staff
D.J. Snushall
A.N. Bulloch
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
3
SECfIONONE
DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY
Professors
KJ. Morgan, BSc, MA, DPhiI(OXf)(personal Chair)
W.FJ. Pickering, MSc, PhD(NSW), DSc, ASTC, FRACI, CChem
Associate Professors
K.H. Bell, BSc, PhD(NSW), FRACI, CChem
L.K. Dyall, MSc, PhD(Melb), FRACI, CChem
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
G.A. Lawnutce, BSc, PhD, DSc(Qld), DipEd(Melb), FRAO, CChem (Head of Department)
Senior Lecturers
RA. Fredlein, BSc, PhD(Qld), MRACI, CChem
M. Maeder, PhD, Habilitation (Basel), MRACI, CChem
E.!. von Nagy-Felsobuki, BSc, PhD, DipEd(LaT), MRACI, CChem
Ledurers
RC. Bums, BSc, PhD(Melb), MRACI, CChem
G.L. Orr, BSc(Qld), PhD(NSW), MRACI, CChem
I.A. van Altena, BSc(Iames Cook), PhD(Alberta)
Associate Lecturers
S.J. Angus-Dunne, BSc
I.A Ferguson, BSc(Syd)
K.A. Grice, BSc
Honorary Research Associate D.AJ. Swinkels, BSc(NSW), PhD(penn), ASTC, FRACI
Senior Technical Officer A.I. Beveridge
Technical Officers
R.F. Godfrey
F. McKenzie
J. Slavek
W.J. Thompson
Laboratory Assistants
B. Watson
T. Williams
Departmental Office Staff
E. Slabbert
M.Munns
DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY
Professor E.A. Colhoun, BA(Bclf), MS(Wis), PhD(Belf), MA(Dub)
Associate Professors
H.A. Bridgman, BA(Beloit), MA(Hawaii), PhD(Wis)
J.C.R Camm, MSc(Hull), PhD
R.I. Loughran, BSc(Dunelm), MSe, PhDCNE) (Head of Department)
Senior Lecturers
G.N. McIntyre, BA(Tas), MA(ANU), PhD
J.C. Torner, BScAgr(Syd), MS, PhD(Wis)
H.P.M. Winchester, MA (Oxon), DPhiI(Oxon)
4
SECfIONONE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
Lecturers
K.w. Lee, BA(Liv), MA(NE)
P.M. O'Neill, MA(Macq), DipEd(Macq)
Post Doctoral Fellow M.K. Macphail, BSc(Syd), PhD(Tas)
Honorary Associate B.L.Campbell, MSe Honoris causa
Cartographer O. Rey-Leseure
Technical Officer CG. Dever
Departmental Office Staff M.B.Lane
DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY
Professor C.F.K. Diessel, DiplGeol, DrRerNa1(Berlin), AAusIMM, FAlE (Personal Chair)
Associate Professors
B.A. Engel, MSc(NE), PhD
R. Offier, BSc, PhD(Adel) (Head of Department)
Senior Lecturers
R.L. Boyd, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd)
P.K. Seccombe, MSc(Melb), PhD(Manit)
W. Collins, BSc(ANU), PhD (LaT)
Lecturer C.V. Murray-Wallace, BA, PhD(Adel)
Honorary Associates
K.H.R. Moelle, ABS, DPhiI(lnnsbruck)
S.SU.Wame, BSc(WA), PhD(NSW)
Professional Officer G.L. Dean-Jones, BA, MSe(Macq)
Senior Technical Officer R. Bale, BSe
Technical Officers
R. Bale, BSe
E. Krupie
I.A. Crawford
Laboratory Assistant H. Ruming, BSe
Departmental Office Staff G.A. MacKenzie
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS
Professors
C.A. Croxton, BSc(Leicester), MA, PhDCCamb), FAIP, FInstP(Lond)
I. Raeburn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Utah)
Associate Professors
W, Brisley, BSc(Syd), MSc (NSW), PhD, DipEd(NE)
1.R Giles, BA(Syd), PhD, DipEd(Syd), ThL
P.K. Smrz, PromPhys, CSe, RNDr(Charles(Prague)
Senior Lecturers
!.M. Benn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Lancaster)
R.F. Berghout, MSc(Syd)
J.G. Ceuper, BSc, PhD(NE)
W.T.F. Lao, ME(NSW), PhD(Syd)
D.L.S. McElwain, BSc(Qld), PhD(York(Can)) 5
SECfIONONE
A.G. Robertson, BSc(Edin), PhD(Newcastle, UK)
B. Sims, BSc, PhD
W.P. Wood, BSc, PbD(NSW), FRAS (Head of Department)
Lecturers
D.A. Pask, BSc, MSc, Phd(Warwick)
W. Summerfield, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin)
E. Vlachynsky, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd)
G.A. Willis, BSc(Adel), PhD(Newcaslle, UK)
Associate Lecturers
S. Boswell, BMath, MTICA
N.B. Hannah, BMath, DipMathStud
G. Pettet, BSc, DipEd, BMath
J. Ryan, BMath(Woll)
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
Research Associate M.E. Laca, BSEE(Uruguay), MA(Santa Barbara), PhD(Berkely)
Professor Emeritus R.G. Keats, BSc, PhD(Adel), DMath(Waterloo), PIMA, FASA, MACS
Departmental Office Staff
J. Garnsey, BA(Syd)
L. Steel
R Pease, BEd(Math)(MCAE)
Division of Quantitative Methods
Principal Lecturer W.P. Galvin, BA(Syd), MMath, MEd, MEngSc, PIMA
Senior Lecturer M.J. Williams, BA, MEngSc, DipEd
Lecturers
T. Dalby, MSc(Canl), BMath
J.MacDougall, BSc, MA(Dalhousie), MPhil(Waterloo)
M.J. Roberts, BMath, PhD
S. Seiffer, BChemEng, BMath
Division Office Staff
L. Locker
J. Trayhum
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS
Professor R.J. MacDonald, BSe, PhD(NSW), FAIP
Associate Professors
B.J. Fraser, MSc(NZ), PhD(Canl), FAJP, FRAS
C.S.L. Keay, MSc(NZ), PhD(Canl), MA(Tor), CPhy" FIP(UK), FAJP, FAAAS, FRNZAS, FRAS, MACS
D.J. O'Connor, BSe, PhD(ANU), FAIP (Head of Department)
P.V. Smith, BSc, PhD(Monash), MAIP
Senior Lecturers
F.T. Bagnall, BSc(NSW), MSc(NE), PhD, MAIP
J.E.R. Cleary, MSc(NSW)
B.V. King, BSc, BE, PhD(NSW)
P.A. McGovern, BE, BSc(Qld), MS, PhD(CalTech), M1EEE, SMlREAust
RH. Roberts, BE(NSW), MSc, ASTC 6
SECTION ONE
Lecturer P.W. Menk, BSc, PhD(LaT), MAIP
Research Associates
H.J. Hansen, MSc, PhD(Nata!)
Y.D. Hu, MSc(USTC), PhD, MAlP
M. Radny, MSc(Wroclaw), PhD(Wroc1aw), PPS(poland), IUVISTA
Y.Shen,PhD
Honorary Research Associates
D. Webster, BSc, PhD J.A. Ramsay, MSc(Melb), PhD, FAIP
Senior Technical Officers
B. Mason
M.K. O'Neill
J.F. Pearson
J.S. Ratcliffe
Technical Officers
T.W.Burns
M.M. Cvetanovski
J.e. Foster
G. Piszczuk
Senior Laboratory Craftsperson B. Stevens
Laboratory Craftspersons
1. Qarke
P. Greig
Departmental Office Staff
J.Oyston
N. Smith
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY
Professors
D.C. Finlay, MSc, PhD(Melb), MAPsS (Head of Department)
M.G. King, BA, PhD(Qld), FAP,S
Associate Professor R.A. Heath, BSc, PhD(McM)
Senior Lecturers
M.M. Colton, MA, PhD(NE), MPsych(Clin), MAPsS
M. Hunler, BSc, PhD(Lond), CertEd, MBPsS, MAPsS
N.F. Kafer, BA, PhD(ANU), MAPsS
C.E. Lee, BA, PhD(Adel), MAPsS
S.A. McFadden, BSc, PhD(ANU)
D. Munro, MA(Manc), PhD(Lond), Cert Soc SI(Glas), Dip Data(SA)
H.P. Pfister, BA(Macq), PhD, MAPsS
J.L. Seggie, BA, PhD
J.D.C. Shea, MA(Canl), PhD(Qld) MASH, MACPCP, MASA, M1SNlM
Lecturers
R Brown, BA, PhD, MASA, MlSNlM
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF
7
SECTION ONE
B. Hayes, BSc, BPsyc(CLIN), PhD(NSW)
A. Hea1hcote, BSe, PhD(Queens)
J. Kenanly, BSc, PhD(Qld», MAPsS
S. Provost, BSc(psyc), PhD(NSW)
Associate Lecturer J Spinks, BA. MA(Syd). Dip Sc
Emeritus Professor lA. Keats, BSc(Adel). BA(Melb), AM, PhD(Prin), FASSA, FEPsS, FAPsS
Honorary Associates
M. Arthur, BA, DipP,ych(Syd), MHP(NSW), MAP,S
D.B. Dunlop, ME, BS(Syd), DO, FRSM, MACa
B. Fenelon, BA(Qld), MA, PhD, MAPsS, AAAN, MSPR
J. Miles, BA, PhD
F.V. Smith, MA(Syd), PhD(Lond), FEPsS, FAPsS, CP,ychol
Professional Officer D.F. Bull, BSe
Senior Technical Officers
L. Cooke
R.Gleghom
A.O. Harcombe
J. Lee·Chin, BSc
Technical Officers
D. Golvers, BA
E.M. Huber
P.W.Smith
Laboratory Craftsperson M. Newton
Departmental Office Staff
W.N. Mead
S. Harris
L. Davies
8
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF SECTION TWO
FACULTY INFORMATION
The Faculty of Science and Mathematics comprises the Departments of Applied Science and Technology, Aviation, Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography. Geology. Mathematics, Physics and Psychology. The Departments of Computer Science, Physics and Statistics also offer major sequences of qualifying subjects for the degrees of Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Mathematics in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
Tramition Arrangemenls Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular transition cases, the Dean may detennine the transition program to be followed.
General Information for New Undergraduates Students embarking on a university course for the first time may find some difficulty in adapting to the new environment. Tertiary education makes a number of demands on students it requires them to be self-disciplined, organized, self-motivated and moreover, responsible for their own course of study. Hence it is important that students become familiar with the University structure, degree courses offered and service organizations (such as the University Counselling Service & Accommodation Service etc.) which offer assistance with study, personal and housing problems.
Often students on first entering University are not certain of their finalfleldofinterest. Infact, it is usually only after the completion of the first year of study that many students finally choose to major in a particular subject. In order to maintain flexibility first year semester subjects (100 level subjects) should be chosen from areas where the student has some previous expertise or special interest. At the same time, they should take note of the degree
requirements. particularly with regard to prescribed subjects, prerequisites and corequisites as set out in the appropriatedegree/ diploma Rules in this handbook.
Students should note that degrees must be structured to include a specified number of 300 level subjects. For exam pie, aBachelor of Science degree must include forty credit points at 300 levels in one Department, and at least forty more credit points a1300 level chosen from subjects approved by Faculty Board. Subject to the Dean's permission, a candidate may be pennitted toeOTol in some subjects from amongst those offered by another Faculty.
Time limits are set on the duration of an undergraduate course as indicated in the appropriate Rules. Maximum workloads are also preset, since limits are placed on the number of subjects students are permitted to undertake in anyone year. For information on these restrictions consult the appropriate degree Rules.
Undergraduate Admission Requiremenls In order to be considered for admission for any qualification other than a postgraduate qualification an applicant shall be required to either
(i) attain such aggregate of marks in approved subjects at the New South Wales Higher School Certificate examination as may be prescribed by the Senate from time to time; or
(ii) otherwise satisfy the Admissions & Progression Committee thal the applicant has reached a standard of education sufficient to enable the approved course to be pursued.
Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty There are no prescribed prerequisites for entry to the Faculty of Science and Mathematics; students are advised that lectures will commence on the assumption that all students will haveachieved the level indicated.
9
SECfIONlWO
Subject
A vialion 109-\15
Biology 101
Chemistry lOJ
Assumed Knowledge
2~unit, 3~unit or 4~unit Mathematics. Also, 2~unit Physics or 4~unit Science (including the Physics 'make~up' eleccives)with alevel of perfonnance placing them in the top 50% of the candidature for these subjects.
Higher School Certificate Chemistry or 4-unit Science is appropriate and students are advised to include CHEMIOI and CHEMI02 in their University program. However, some lectures in background chemistry will be offered by the Department of Community Programmes prior to the start of the first semester. Attendance at this Preparatory Course is optional.
At least Mathematics (2~unit course), Chemistry (2~unit course), and Physics (2~ unit course), with ranking in the top 50% in
each case.
Geography HSC Geography would be an advantage, but the course is a foundation course that does not require having undertaken Geography at school.
Geology 101 2-units of Science (preferably Chemistry) and at least 2-units of Mathematics.
Mathematics 111 Mathematics (2-unit course), or higher.
Mathematics 102 Mathematics at 3-unit level with a score of at least 120/150 in 3 -unit, or have passed Mathematics 111
Physics 101 HSC2-unit Mathematics withapeIfonnance level in the top 30% of the candidature for
this subject.
Physics 102 HSC 3~unit Mathematics mark of at least 110/150. Physics 2-unit or Science 4-unit with a perfonnance level in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects.
Mature Age Entry
Entry into the University is available to persons who will be at least 21 years of age by 1st March of the year in which enrolment is sought and who have completed a limited New South Wales Higher School Certificate Program. Subjects which will enable entry into the Faculty of Science and Mathematics include four units selected from Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics (3~unit course preferred), and 4-unit Science. For entry into the Bachelor of Mathematics degree, include 3~unit mathematics (attaining a result of at least 120/150) and one other subject recognised for admission purposes. For other degrees, the subjects should be presented as 2~unit courses with a result in the top 50%.
Limit on Admission
Where the Council is of the opinion that a limit should be placed upon the number of persons who may in any year be admitted to a course or part of a course or to the University, it may impose such a limit and determine the manner of selection of those persons to be so admitted.
10
FACULTY INFORMATION
Enrolment Requirements
(a) In order to be admitted an applicant shall
(i) satisfy appropriate Oiploma/Degree Rules as set out in
Section Three;
(ii) receive approval to enrol;
(iii) complete the prescribed enrolment procedures; and
(iv) pay any fees and charges prescribed by the Council.
(b) An applicant may be admined under such conditions as the Admissions & Progression Committee may detennine after considering any advice offered by the Dean of the Faculty.
(c) Except with the approval of the Faculty Board a candidate for a qualification shall not enrol in a subject which does not count towards that qualification.
(d) A candidate for a qualification shall not enrol in a course or part of acourse for another qualification unless the candidate has first obtained the consent of the Dean of the Faculty and, if another Faculty is responsible for the course leading to that other qualification, the Dean of that Faculty provided that a student may enrol in a combined degree course approved by the Senate leading to two qualifications.
(e) A candidate for any qualification other than a postgraduate qualification who is enrolled in three quarters or more of a normal full-time program shall be deemed to be a full-time student whereas a candidate enrolled in either a part-time course or less than three-quarters of a full-time program shall be deemed to be a part-time student.
Enrolment Status
A candidate for a qualification shall enrol as either a full-time student or a part-time student.
Combined Degree Courses
The decision to take a combined degree course is usually taken at the end of a student's first year in his or her original degree course, in consultation with the Deans of the Faculties responsible for the two degrees. Pennission to embark on a combined degree course will normally require an average of credit levels in first
year subjects.
Non-Degree Students
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in these Rules, the Admissions & Progression Committee may on the recommendation of the Head of a Department offering any part of acomse pennit a person, not being a candidate for aqualifical.ion of the University, to enrol in any year in that part of the course on payment of such fees and charges as may be prescribed by the Council. A person so enrolling shall be designated a 'non-degree'
student.
Faculty Policy in Regard to Credit for Courses Completed Elsewhere The Faculty Board may grant Credit in specified and unspecified semester subjects, aggregating to a maximum of 120 credit points, to a candidate in recognition of work completed in this university or another approved tertiary institution, on conditions determined by the Faculty Board. Such Credit to be granted may
SECfIONlWO
include no more than 100 credit points at 100 level, 40 credit points at 200 level or 20 credit points at 300 level.
Additional Information Advisory Services
Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subjects in the course should seek help fro~ members of the Faculty. In particular. advice should be sought from first, second and third year subject co-ordinators in each Department, Heads of Departments, the Assistant Deans or Dean.
Enquiries regarding enrolment, variation to program and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary in the School of Science and Mathematics in the Science Building.
For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested that students should consu1t the University Counselling Service.
Student Participation in University Affairs
Provision is made for students to be elected as members on Departmental and Faculty Boards as well as to other University bodies. Election of student members usually takes place in Semester One and students should watch Departmental notice boards for details of election of student members.
The Faculty Board of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics has provision for the election of four student members.
Subject Timetable Clashes
Students are strongly advised to check on possible timetable clashes before enrolling. Clashes may force students to take those subjects in different years. Although academic staff are always willing to advise students, it is the student's responsibility to ensure that chosen subjects may be studied concurrently. Science and Mathematics students taking subjects from other Faculties must examine the timetable to ensure that clashes do not exist in their proposed courses.
Although the timetable for one particular subject may clash with that of another, this may not necessarily mean that this combination cannot bedone. Often an arrangement can be made by one or both Departmental representatives to overcome this problem. Therefore, see the Departmental representatives before deciding upon your final subject combinations.
Workload
The expected maximum workload for students devoting most of their time to degree studies is 40 credit points per semester. In the case of a 20 credit point subject offeredoverafull year, the work load will be rated as 10 credit points per semester. Enrolment in excess of 40 credit points per semester can only be exceeded in exceptional circumstances by students with a good academic record and requires the pennission of the Dean.
Students with external commitments, such as part-time employment, should enrol in fewer subjects. Such commitments cannot be taken into consideration for an extension of time for written work, or failure to attend examinations some of which may be scheduled on Saturday mornings.
Student Academic Progress All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory progress and, in particular, attention is drawn to the Rules
FACULTY INFORMATION
Governing Unsatisfactory Progress. The following should be borne in mind
1. The Facu1ty Board requires that students shall pass at least two semester subjects in Uteir first yearoffull~time attendance orin their first two years of part-time attendance.
2. The Faculty Board requires that students shall have passed al least eight semester subjects by the end of the first two years of full~time altendance or four years of part-time attendance.
3. The Faculty Board has detennined that a student who fails a semester subject twice shall not be permitted to include that subject in the candidate's future program, and that a student who fails four semester subjects twice shall be excluded from further enrolment in the Faculty, unless the candidate shows cause to the satisfaction ofthe Faculty Board why the candidate should be penniued to do so.
4. Students should note that a terminating pass can be awarded only at the 100 level or 200 level and that no more than four tenninating passes, may count ina student's program (with no more than two at the 200 level.)
Note: Where there is a change in attendance status, two part· time years will be taken as theequivalent of one full-time year for the purposes of this policy.
Examination Rules
These Rules are printed in the centre grey pages of this Handbook.
Unsatisfactory Progress
Additional Rules are printed in the centre grey pages of this Handbook.
Record of Failure
An applicant who has a record of failure at another tertiary institution shall not be admitted unless thalapplicant first satisfies
(a) the Faculty Board or the Graduate Studies CommiUeefor the Faculty as appropriate, in the case of a postgraduate qualification; or
(b) the Admissions & Progression Committee, in the case of any other qualification that there is a reasonable prospect that the applicant will make satisfactory progress.
Re-enrolment
A candidate for a qualification shall be required to re~eruol annually during the period of this candidature. Upon receiving approval to re-enrol the candidate shall complete the prescribed procedures and pay the fees and charges determined by the Council not later than the date prescribed for payment.
Teacher Training Courses Prerequisites for Diploma in Education Units
Students who intend to proceed to a Diplomain Education should familiarise themselves with the prerequisites for units offered in the course.
These prerequisites arc stated in terms of subjects of the University of Newcastle. Applicants whose courses of study have inclllded subjects which are deemed f orthis purpose to provide an equivalent foundation may be admitted to the Diploma course as special cases.
11
SECfIONlWO
In the Diploma course the Problems in Teaching and Learning units are grouped as follows:
<a) Secondary English History Social Science (Geography, Commerce, Social Science) Mathematics Science Modern Languages (French, German, Japanese)
(b) Primary
Prerequisites
For information about prerequisites, students are invited to contact the Faculty Secretary, Faculty of Education. This contact should be made in the early stages of a degree course.
All secondary methods
Normally at least 50 credit points (20-100;30-200 level) of a degree in the main teaching area and 20 credit points (20-100 level) of a degree in any subsidiary area. Modem Languages, Drama, Science and Social Sciences have additional specific requirements.
Primary method
At least 50 credit points (20-100;30-200 level) of a degree in a specified area and 20-100 level credit points of a degree in each of two others. The specified area is usually a secondary teaching area.
Further details may be obtained from the Faculty Secretary, Faculty of Education.
Role of Faculty Board, Faculty of Science and Mathematics The role of the Faculty Board, Faculty of Science and Mathematics is defined by Faculty Board Rule 7 which stales:
Subject to any resolution of the Councilor the Academic Senate, and any provisions of any Rules, a Faculty Board shall:
(a) encourage and supervise the teaching, assessment and research activities of the Faculty;
(b) make recommendations to the Academic Senate on any matter affecting the Faculty;
(c) determine the grades of pass to be used for subjects offered in the courses for which the Faculty is responsible;
(d) consider the examination results recommended in respect of each of the candidates for which the Faculty is responsible and takeaction in accordance with the prescribed procedures;
(e) make recommendations on matters concerning admissions. enrolment and progression in the courses for which the Faculty is responsible to the Admissions and Progression Committee; and
(f) deal with any matter referred to it by the Academic Senate.
Professional Recognition Graduates of the University of Newcastle enrolled in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics are recognized by a number of different professional societies depending on their degree majors.
12
FACULTY INFORMATION
Applied Science and Technology
Graduates from the Bachelorof AppliedScience (Environmental Assessment and Management) program may apply for membership of the Environment Institute of Australia. The demand for graduates in areas of environmental monitoring. assessment and management is steadily growing throughout Australia. as the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) process has penneated the requirements for development approvals connected with almost all new developments for mining, industry, agriculture,andUIbanexpansion. Surveysofnaturalanddisturbed ecosystems are on the agenda for government at local, state and naliona11evels.
Biological Sciences
The Australian Institute of Biology Incorporated was inaugurated in 1986. Its objectives are to represent the Biology profession in Australia., to promote education and research in Biology and to improve communication between biologists of different disciplines. The Institute confers on its members a status similar to that for other Australian professional institutes. Membership grades are Fellow, Member. Associate and Student. Members and Fellows are able to indicate this by the appropriate letters after their qualifications. Fellowship requires distinction in Biology and nomination from the existing membership. Membership requires a first or second class Honours degree in Biology and three years relevant experience. or a pass degree with five years experience, or a Masters degree with two years relevantex perience, or aPhD. An Associaterequires anappropriate pass degree or contribution to the advancement of Biology.
Chemistry
Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majoring in Chemistry, may join the Royal Australian Chemical Institute which has several categories of membership according to qualification and experience.
Geology
Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science (Honours) majoring in Geology may join the Geological Society of Australia Inc., the Australian Instituteof Geoscientists and The Australasian Institute of Mining & Metallurgy which has several categories of membership according to qualification and experience.
Mathematics
For employment as a Mathematician. graduates should have at least one majorin Mathematics. An Honours degree is preferred by many employers. The profession is represented by the Australian Mathematical Society.
Physics
For employment as a physicist. students must have a minimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. An Honours degree in Physics or combined Physics/Mathemalics would be preferred.
Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum j of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a ~
number of grades of membership which are related to experience ,I! as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors
SECfIONTWO
courses in Physics at tertiary institutions and judges them in terms of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There are no formal conditions for registration as a physicist.
Psychology
Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majorlt1g in Psychology or a Bachelor of Science (Psychology) may join the Australian Psychological Society. Membership normally requires a four year degree in Psychology. Provision is also made for Student Subscribers and Affiliates.
FACULTY INFORMATION
13
SECTION THREE
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
Undergraduate Diploma & Degrees offered in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management
Bachelor of Science (Aviation)
Bachelor of Environmental Science
Bachelor of Science
Bachelor of Science (psychology)
Bachelor of Mathematics
Diploma in Aviation Science
Rules Governing Academic Awards
1 Application of Rules
These rules shall apply to all the academic awards of the University other than the degrees of Doctor and Master.
2 Interpretation
14
(1) In these rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:
"award" means the degree, diploma (including graduate diploma and associate diploma) or graduate certificate for which a candidate is emolled;
"course" means thetotal requirements of the program of study approved by the Academic Senate to qualify a candidate for the award as set out in the schedule;
"Dean" means the Dean of a Faculty;
"department" means the departmentoffering a particular subject and includes any other body so doing;
"Faculty" means the Faculty responsible f orthe course;
"Faculty Board" means the Faculty BoardoftheFaculty;
"schedule" means the schedule to these rules relevant to the award listed under the name of the Faculty;
"subject" means any part of acourse for which a result may be recorded.
(2) A reference in these rules to a Head of Department shall be read not only as a reference to the person appointed to that office but also, where a subject is not offered by a department as such. to the person approved by the Academic Senate to undertake the responsibilities of a Head of Department for the pUIpOse of these rules.
3 Admission
An applicant for admission to candidature for an award shall satisfy therequirements of the University governing admission to and enrolment in a course and any other additional requirements as may be prescribed in the schedule for that award.
4 Subject
(1) For the purpose of a course, a subject may be classified at a level detennined by the Faculty Board.
(2) Each subjcct shall be allotted a credit point value by the Academic Senate after considering the advice of the Faculty Board of the Faculty in which the department is
located.
(3) The Academic Senate, after considering a request from a Faculty Board. may detennine that a subject be not offered during a particular academic year.
(4) The Faculty Board shall approve the subjects for the award. Any change in the list of approved subjects which will have effect in the following year shall be i approved by a date detennined by the Academic Senate. ~
(5) Where there is any change in the list of approved
SECfION THREE
Faculty Board shall make all reasonable provision to permit students already enrolled in the course to progress normally.
5 Enrolment
(1) A candidate may not enrol in any year in a combination of subjects which is incompatible with the requirements of the timetable for that year.
(2) Except with the pennission of the Dean and subject to any contrary provision in the schedule
(a) acandidate may not enrol in subjects totalling more than the equivalent of 40 credit points in any semester;
(b) a candidate sha1l not enrol in a subject which does not count towards the award; and
(c) a candidate shall not be penniued to enrol in any subject which is substantially equivalent to one which that candidate has previously counted towards a degree or diploma.
(3) A candidate for an award shall not enrol in a course or part of a course for another award in this University unless consent has first been obtained from the Dean and, if another Faculty is responsible for the course leading to that other award, the Dean of that Faculty, provided that a student may enrol in a combined course approved by the Academic Senate leading to two awards.
6 Prerequisites and Corequisites
(1) The Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department may prescribe prerequisites and/or corequisites for any subject offered by that Department.
(2) Except with the pennission of the Dean granted afLer considering any recommendation made by the I lead of the Department, no candidate may enrol in a subject unless that candidate has passed any subjects prescribed as its prerequisites at any grade which may be specified and has already passed or concurrently enrols in or is already enrolled in any subjects prescribed as its corequisites.
(3) Except with the pennission of the Dean, a candidate will not have satisfied a prerequisite if the prerequisite subject has not been completed in the preceding eight ca1endar years.
,(4) A candidate attaining a Terminating Pass in a subject shall be deemed not to have passed that subject for prerequisite purposes.
7 Credit
(1) A Faculty Board may grant credit to a candidate in specified and unspecified subjects, on such conditions as it may determine, in recognition of work completed in the University or another institution approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose.
(2) Except as may be otherwise provided in the schedule, a candidate shall not be given credit for more than sixty five percent of the (olal number of credit points required to complete the course.
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
8 Subject Requirements
(1) The subjects which may be completed in the course for the award shall be those approved by the Faculty Board and published annually as the Approved Subjects section of the schedule.
(2) A candidate enrolled in a subject shall comply with such academic and practica1 requirements and submit such written or other work as the Department shall specify.
(3) ExceptasotherwisepermittedbytheHeadofDepartment. any material presented by a candidate for assessment must be the work of the candidate and not have been previously submitted for assessment.
(4) To complete a subject acandidate shall satisfy published departmental requirements and gain a satisfactory result in such assessments and examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.
9 Withdrawal
(1) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or the course only by infonning the Academic Registrarin writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.
(2) A student shall be deemed not to have enrolled in a subject if that student withdraws from the subject
(a) in the case of a semester length subject. before the Higher Education Contribution Schemecensusdate for that semester. or
(b) in the case of a full year subject, before the first HigherEducationContributionSchemecensusdate for that academic year.
(3) Except with the permission of the Dean
(a) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject after the relevant date which shall be:
(i) in the case of a semesterlengtb subject, the last day of that semester, or
(ii) in the case of a full year subject, the last day of second semester, and
(b) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject on more than two occasions.
10 Absence
Subject to any provision in the schedule, a candidate in good academic standing in the course
(a) may take an absence of one year from the course, or
(b) with the permission of the Dean , may take an absence of two consecutive years from the course without prejudice to any right of the candidate to re-enrol in the course following such absence.
11 Qualification for the Award
To qualify forthe award acandidale shall satisfactorily complete the requirements governing the course prescribed in the schedule.
12 Combined Dcgrce Programs
(1) Where so prescribed for a particular course, a candidate may complete the requirements for one Bachelordegree
15
SECTION TIIREE
in conjunction with another Bachelor degree by completingacombined degree program approved by the Academic Senate on the advice of the Faculty Board and, where the other Bachelor degree is offered in another Faculty. the Faculty Board of that Faculty.
(2) Admission to a combined degree program shall be restricted to candidates who have achieved a standard of perfonnance deemed satisfactory for the purposes of admission to the specific combined degree course by the Faculty Board(s).
(3) The work undertaken by a candidate in a combined degree program shall be no less in quantity and quality than if the two courses were taken separately.
(4) To qualify for admission to the two degrees a candidate shall satisfy the requirements for both degrees, except as may be otherwise provided.
13 Relaxing Provision
In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Academic Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any provision of these rules.
SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT
1 Qualification for the Degree
(I) To qualify for admission to the degree, candidates shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects, including the prescribed subjects unless the Faculty Board approves otherwise in a particular case.
(2) The subjects passed shall include:
(a) allcast 80 credit points from 100 level subjects;
(b) allcast 60 credit points from 200 level subjects;
(c) allcast 80 credit points from 300 level subjects; and
(d) 20 credit points from approved electives.
2 Credit
(1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qualified the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another institution up to a total of 120 credit points including not more than:
(a) 100 credit points at the 100 level;
(b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and
(c) 20 credit points at the 300 level.
(2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted towards a completed award.
3 Time Requirements
16
(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course within nine years of study.
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
(2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean al the time al which credit is granted.
SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: Code Name Credll Points Prerequisile Corequisile
100 Level Prescribed
EAMSIOI Concepts of Ecology 10 EAMSl11 Systems Approach in Ecology 10 EAMS101 EAMS102 Monitoring and Statistics i 10 EAMS112 Monitoring and Statistics II 10 EAMSI02 EAMC103 Contemporary Environmental Philosophy 10 EAMCI13 Environment and Human Values 1 10 EAMC103 EAMSI04 Environmental Planning and Pollution
Control Legislation 10 EAMS114 Local and Regional Environmental Issues 10
200 Level Prescribed
EAMS201 Agricultural Systems 10 EAMS101/111 EAMS211 Industrial and Urban Systems 10 EAMSI01/111 EAMS201 EAMS202 System Dynamics and Data Analysis I 10 EAMS I 02/112 EAMS212 System Dynamics and Data Analysis II 10 EAMS 102/112 EAMS202 EAMC203 Environment and Human Values II 10 EAMC103/113 EAMC213 Development and Social Impact Assessment 10 EAMC103/113 EAMC203 20 cp from
EAMS290 Hydrology and Soils Analysis 10 EAMSI02/112 EAMS291 Water Resources Management 10 EAMSI02/112 EAMS290 EAMS292 Plant Systematics and Plant Ecology 10 EAMSIOI/111 EAMS293 Anima1 Systematics and Animal Ecology 10 EAMSIOI/11I EAMS292 or
other approved subjects at 200 level offered within the University. if approved by the Dean.
300 Level Prescribed
EAMS301 Environmental Management I 10 EAMS201, EAMS21I EAMS311 Environmental Management II 10 EAMS201, EAMS21I EAMS301 EAMS302 Specialist Study 20 All Prescribed 200 level
subjects EAMS304 Regiona1 and National Environmental Issues 10 EAMSI04/114 EAMS314 Environmental Impact Assessment 10 EAMS104/114
20 cp from
EAMS390 Soil Consetvation and Management 10 EAMS290, EAMS291 EAMS391 Water and Soils: Applications and Modelling 10 EAMS290, EAMS291 EAMS390 EAMS392 Aorn Component of Environmental Impact
Assessment 10 EAMS292, EAMS293 EAMS393 Fauna Component of Environmental Impact
Assessment 10 EAMS292, EAMS293 EAMC303 Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology 10 EAMC203, EAMC213 EAMC313 Social Aspects of Environmental Health 10 EAMC203, EAMC213 EAMC303 or
other approved subjects at 300 level offered within the University. if approved by the Dean.
Footnotes
The normal patternfor the Bachelor of Applied Science Enyiromnental Assessmenl and Managemenl degree is 80 credit poinlsat 100 leyel, 80 credit poinls at 200 leyel and 80 credit points at 300 level.
Leave of Absence - For the purposes of Rule LO of the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re·enrol without restrictions.
17
I ;
SECfION THREE
SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
1 Qualification for the Degree
(I) To qualify for admission to the degree. candidates shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects including the prescribed subjects unless the Faculty Board approves otherwise in a particular case.
(2) the subjects passed shall include:
(a) at least 80 credit points from 100 level subjects;
(b) atleast 60 credit points from ZOO level subjects; and
(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects.
2 Credit
(1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qualified the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another institution up to a total of 120 credit points including not more than:
(a) 100 credit points at the 100 level;
(b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and
(c) 20 credit points at the 300 level.
(2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted towards a completed award.
3 Time Requirements
18
(1) Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course within nine years of study.
(2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date detennined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECfION THREE
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are: Code Name Credit Points
100 Level Prescribed BIOL101 Plant & Animal Biology
B10Ll02 CHEM101 CHEM102 GEOG101 GEOLIOI SCEN101 STATIo! or GEOLl02
Cell Biology. Genetics & Evolution Chemistry 101 Chemistry 102 Introduction to Physical Geography The Environment Environmental Investigations I
Introductory Statistics
Earth Materials
200 Level Prescribed SCEN201 Environmental Investigations II SCEN202 Environmental Planning & Pollution Control SCEN203 Water Resources Management
300 Level Prescribed SCEN301 Environmental Project
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10
10 10 10
10 SCEN302 GEOG311
Environmental Impact Assessment Techniques 10 Hydrology 10
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULFS
PrerequisiJe
GEOLIOI
SCENIOI
SCEN201 SCEN202 GEOG20I, GEOG203
Corequisile
At the 200 and 300 Level the prescribed subjects are taken from one of the three strands of Bioloeical Sciences, Chemistry or Earth Science as follows:
Prescribed subjects for Biological Sciences strand
200 Level B10L207 Ecology 10 B10LlOI, BIOLl02 CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM1OI,CHEMI02 10 cp from GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 GEOL101 PHYSI02 Physics 102 10 See ' GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOGlo!
GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10 GEOG101 20 cp from
B10L201 Biochemistry IO B10LlO!, B10Ll02 BIOL202 Animal Physiology 10 BIOLIOI, B10Ll02 BIOL206 Plant Physiology 10 B10LlOI, BIOLI02
300 Level B10L311 Environmental Biology IO B10L203 or B10L207 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 10 cp from
PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles, Processes and Applications IO PHYS102
GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation IO GEOG203
GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203
GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary Environments 10 GEOL2130rGEOO204
20 cpfrom B10L302 Reproductive Physiology 10 TwoBIOL2oo
BIOL303 Environmental Plant Physiology IO TwoBIOL200
BIOL304 Whole Plant Development 10 TwoBIOL200
BIOL31O Microbiology 10 BIOLZOI & one other BIOL200
19
~' ,
•
SECfION THREE
Cod. Name Credit Points
BIOL312 Animal Development 10
Prescribed subjects for Chemistry strand
200 Level
CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry 10 CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10
BIOL207 Ecology 10
10 cp from CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEM231 Organic Chemistry 10 CHEM241 Physical Olemistry 10
10 cp from GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 PHYSI02 Physics 102 10 GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10
300 Level BIOL311 Environmental Biology 10 CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry 10 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10
10 cp from CHEM313 Industrial Olemical Analysis 5 CHEM314 Trace Analysis in Environmental
Systems Not in 1993 CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEM33I Organic Olemistry 10 CHEM341 Physical Olemistry 10 CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 5 CHEM343 Molecular Spectroscopy
10 cp from PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles,
Processes and Applications GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation
GEOG305 Climatic Problems
GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary Environments
Prescribed subjects for Earth Science strand
200 Level GEOLl02 Earth Materials or STATIO! GEOG203 GEOG204
20 cp from PHYS102 B10L207 CHEM261 GEOL213
20
Introductory Statistics Biogeography & Climatology Geomorphology of Australia
Physics 102 Ecology Environmental Chemistry Ancient Environments & Organisms
5
10 10
10 10
10
10 10 10
10
10 10 10
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RlIT..ES
Prerequisite CorequisiU
TwoBIOL200
CHEMIOI.CHEMI02 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 BIOLIOI. BIOLl02
CHEMIOI. CHEM102 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 CHEMIOI. CHEM102
GEOLlO!
See ' GEOGIOI GEOG101
BIOL203 or B10L207 CHEM211 CHEM261
CIIEM211
CHEM211 CHEM221
CHEM23 I CHEM241. MATH102 orMATH112 CHEM241. MATHI02 orMATHI12 CHEM241
PHYS102 GEOG203
GEOG203 GEOL213 or GEOG204
GEOLIOI
GEOGIO! GEOGIOI
See' BIOLIOI. BIOL102 CHEMIOI. CHEM102 GEOLl02
I
SECTION THREE
Cod.
300 Level GEOG304
GEOL320 GEOG305
20 cp from PHYS205
BI0L311 CHEM361
Footnotes
Name
The Biosphere & Conservation Geology of Quaternary Environments Climatic Problems
Scientific Measurement Principles, Processes and Applications Environmental Biology Environmental Chemistry Elective
Credit Points
10 10 10
10 10 10 10
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
Prerequisite
GEOG203 GEOL213 or GEOG204 GEOG203
PHYSI02 BIOL203 0 BIOL207 CHEM261
CorequislU
See Course Director for approval
Tm normal pattern for tm Bachelor ofEnvironmenJal Science degree is 80 credit poinJsallOO level, 80 credit poin/sat 200 level and 80 credit points at 300 level.
Leave of Absence -For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic A wards, a candidate shaJJ be deemed to be in good standing if, at tm conclusion of the year of las/ enrolment in tm course, that candidate was eligible to re·enrol without restrictions.
I Advisory entry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/150 and 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science with a perfonnance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects.
21
SECfION THREE
SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Interpretation
1. In this schedule, "discipline" means a branch of learning recognised as such by the Faculty Board.
Qualification for the Degree
2. (1) To qualify for admission to the degree, candidates shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising -
(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level subjects;
(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects;
(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects.
(2) The subjects shall be chosen in accordance with the following conditions -
(a) the 60 credit points at the 100 level shall be comprised of at least 20 credit points chosen from each of three disciplines;
(b) a sequence of at least 20 credit points at the 100 level, 30 credit points at the 200 level and 40 credit points at the 300 level shall be chosen from a single discipline;
(c) not more than 160creditpointsmaYbechosenfrom a single discipline; and
(d) subjects at the 300 level may not be chosen from more than three disciplines.
Credit
3. (1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qUalified the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another institution up to a total of 120 credit points including not more than -
(a) 100 credit points at the 100 level;
(b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and
(c) 20 credit points at the 300 level.
(2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted towards a completed award.
Time Requirements
4. (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course within nine years of study.
(2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.
Combined Degrees
5. A candidate may undertake one of the foUowing combined degree programs in accordance with Rule 12 of the Rules Governing Academic awards, namely -
22
Science/Arts
Science/Computer Science
Science!Mathematics
Science/Engineering.
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
;: , , ,
SECTION TIIREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are in the discipline areas of
Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography, Geology, Mathematics, Physics and Psychology and are listed in Group A Subjects.
Code Name
GROUP A SUBJECTS
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES BIOLIOI Plant & Animal Biology B10LI02 Cell Biology, Genetics & Evolution BIOL201 Biochemistry BIOL202 Animal Physiology BIOL204 Cell & Molecular Biology
BIOL205 Molecular Genetics BIOL206 Plant Physiology
BIOL207 Ecology
BIOLJOI Cell Processes
BIOLJ02 Reproductive Physiology
BIOLJ03 Environmental Plant Physiology BIOL304 Whole Plant Development BIOL305 Immunology
BIOL307 Molecular Biology of Plant Development
BIOLJ09 Molecular Biology BIOL31O Microbiology
B10LJll Environmental Biology
B10LJ12 Animal Development
CHEMISTRY CHEM101 Chemistry 101 CHEM102 Chemistry 102 CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry CHEM23 I Organic Chemistry CHEM241 Physical Chemistry CHEM251 Applied Chemistry CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry
CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry CHEM312 Chemometrics
CHEM313 Industria] Chemical Analysis CHEM314 Trace Analysis in Environmental
Systems CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry
Credit Points
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Not in 1993 10 10 10 10
Notin 1993
10 10
10
10
10 10 10 10 10 10
Not in 1993 10 10 5
5 Not in 1993
10
Prerequisite
BIOLI01,BIOLI02 BIOLIOI, BIOLI02 BIOLI01, BIOLI02 BIOLI01, B10LI02 BIOLIOI, B10LI02 BIOLI01, BIOLI02 Students who have completed BIOL203 are not eligible to do this subject BIOL201 & one BIOL200 TwoBIOL200 TwoBlOL200 TwoBIOL200 TwoBIOL200 Two BIOL200 incl. one of BIOL201 or B10L204 orBIOL205 BIOL201 and B10L205 BIOL201 & one other BIOL200 (BIOL204 advisable)
BIOL207 or BIOl203 Students who have completed BI0L.306 are not eligible to do this subject Two BIOL200. Students who have completed BI0L308
CorequuiJe
are not eligible to do this subject
CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEMlOl, CHEMI02 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEM211 CHEM211, MATHI020r MATH112 CHEM211 CHEM211
CHEM221
23
SECf!ON THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION TIIREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
Cod. Name Credit Poinls Prerequisile CorequisiU Cod. Name Credit Polnls Prerequisite Conqllisile CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding & Cluster GOOL315 Sedimentology 10 GEOL2!2 & GOOL2I3
Chemistry 5 CHEM221 GOOL316 Geology of Fuels 10 GOOL213 CHEM323 Bioinorganic Coordination Chemistry 5 CHEM221 GOOL317 Resource & Exploration Geology 10 GOOL212 & GOOL214 CHEM331 Organic Chemistry 10 CHEM23 I GOOL318 Geology Field Course 318 5 GOOL2I3 CHEM332 Heterocyclic Chemistry 5 CHEM23 I GOOL319 Geology Field Course 319 5 GEOL216 & GOOL3 I3 CHEM333 Organic Reaction Mechanism Nolin 1993 CHEM23 I GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary En"vuonments 10 GEOL2I3 or GEOG204 CHEM334 Identification of Natural Compounds 5 CHEM23 I GEOL321 Groundwater & Soils Not in 1993 CHEM335 Organic Spectroscopy 5 CHEM23 I CHEM341 Physical Otemistry 10 CHEM24I, MATHI02 MATHEMATICS
orMATHII2 MATHIII Mathematics 111 10 2 unit HSC Mathematics CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar Energy 5 CHEM241, MATHI02 MATHII2 Mathematics 112# 10 MATHIII
Conversion 5 or MATH112 MATHI02 Mathematics 102# 10 See 2 or MATH)) 1 CHEM343 Molecular Spectroscopy 5 CHEM241 MATHI03 Mathematics 103 10 See 2 or MATHl02 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM261 or (MATHIII & GEOGRAPHY MATHII2) GEOGIOI Introduction to Physical Geography 10 See' MATH201 Multivariable Calculus 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GEOGI02 Introduction to Human Geography 10 See' or (MATH I II &MATHII2) GEOG201 Methods in Physical Geography 10 GEOGIOI or (MATHI02 & Permission GEOG202 Methods in Human Geography 10 GEOGI02 of the H.O.D.J). GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOGIOI MATH202 Partial Differential Equations 1 5 MATH201 MATH203 GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10 GEOGIOI MATH203 Ordinary Differential Equations 1 5 (MATHl02 & MATHI03) GEOG207 Population, Culture & Resources 10 GEOGI02 or (MATH I II &MATHII2)
GEOG208 Cities & Regions 10 GEOGI02 or (MATH 1 02 & Permission
GEOG301 Advanced Methods in Physical Geography 10 GEOG201 plus either of the H.O.D.J).
GEOG203 or GEOG204 MATH204 Real Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03)
GEOG302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography 10 GEOG202 plus either or (MATHI II &MATHII2 & MATHI03) GEOG205 or GEOG206
MATH205 Analysis of Metric Spaces 5 MATH204' GEOG304 The Biosphere & Conservation 10 GEOG203 MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) or MATH201 GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG203
(MATH III & MA THII2) GEOG306 Geography of Australia: An 10 GEOG202 plus either or (MATHI02 & Permission
Historical Perspective GEOG205 or GEOG206 of H.O.D.J) GEOG309 Society & Space 10 GEOG202 plus either MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 MA TH206 & MA THI03
GEOG205 or GEOG206 MATH209 Algebra 5 MATH2184
GEOG31O Directed Studies in Human Geography 10 GEOG202 plus either MATH210 Geometry 1 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GEOG205 or GEOG206 or (MATH II I &MATHII2
GEOG311 Hydrology 10 GEOG201 GEOG203 &MATHI03) GEOG315 Production, Work & Territory 10 GECXJ202 plus either MATH211 Group Theory 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03)
GEOG205 or GEOG206 or (MATHII 1 &MATHII2
GEOG316 Directed Studies in Physical Geography Not in 1993 GECXJ201 plus either & MATHI03) GE0G203 or GEOG204 MATH212 Discrete Mathematics 5 MATHI02or MATHl03
GEOLOGY or (MATHII 1 & MATHII2)
GOOLlOI The Environment 10 MATH213 Mathematical Modelling 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03)or GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10 GEOLIOI (MATH III & MA THII2) GOOL211 Optical Mineralogy 5 GEOLl02 MATH214 Mechanics 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GOOL212 Introductory Petrology 10 GEOL211 or (MATHIII & MATHI12 GOOL213 Ancient Environments & Organisms 10 GEOLl02 & MATHI03) GOOL214 Geological Structures & Resources 10 GEOLl02 MATH215 Operations Research 5 MATHI02or MATHI03 GOOL215 Geology Field Course 215 10 GEOLl02 or (MATH II I & MATHII2) GEOL216 Geology Field Course 216 5 GEOL215 MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) GOOL311 Igneous Petrology & Crustal Evolution 10 GEOL312 or (MATHIII & MATH! 12 GOOL312 Metamorphic Petrology 10 GEOL212 & COMPIOI) or (MATHIII GEOL313 Structural Geology & Geophysics 10 GEOL214 & MATHlI2 & MATHI03) GEOL314 Stratigraphic Methods 10 GEOL213
24 25
SECTION THREE
Cod.
tMATHZI7
tMATHZIS
MATH301
MATH302 MATH303
MATH304
MATH305
MATH306
MATH307
MATH30S
MATH309 MATH310 MATH311 MATH312
MATH313
MATH314 MATH315
MATH316
MATH317 MATH31S
PHYSICS PHYS101 PHYSIOZ PHYS103 PHYS201 PHYS20Z PHYS203 PHYS205
PHYS301
PHYS30Z
26
Name
Linear Algebra 1
Linear Algebra 2
Logic & Set Theory
General Tensors & Relativity Variational Methods and Integral Equations Ordinary Differential Equations 2
Partial Differential Equations 2
Fluid Mechanics
Quantum & Statistical Mechanics
Geometry 2
Combinatorics Functional Analysis Measure Theory & Integration Algebra
Numerical Analysis (Theory)
Optimization Mathematical Biology
Industrial Modelling
Number Theory
Topology
Physics 101 Physics 102 Physics 103
Credit Points
5
5
Nolin 1993
Not in 1993 Not in 1993
10
10
10
10
\0
Not in 1993 10
Not in 1993 10
10
10 10
Not in 1993
Not in 1993 10
10 10 10
Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism 10 Mechanics & Thermal Physics 10 Solid Slate & Atomic Physics 10 Scientific Measurements Principles, Processes & Applications 10 Mathemalical Methods & Quantum Mechanics 10
Electromagnetism & Electronics 10
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
Prerequisile
MATHIOZ or (MATH11 I &MATHllZ) (MATHI02 & MATHl03) or (MATH111 & MATH11Z &MATHI03)
20 c.p. from 200 level MATH incl. one of MATH204, 209, Zl1, ZIZ, ZIS' MATH201 MATHZIS' MATH201 MATHZ03 MATH204' MATH201 MA TH203 MATH204' MATHZIS' MATH201 MATH202 MA TH203 MA TH204' MATH201 MATHZ03 MA TH204' MA TH206 MATH201 MATHZ03 MATH206 20 c.p. from 200 level MATH incl. one of MATH209, MATHZII, MATHZIS' MATHZIS' MATHZ05 MATH205 MATH2184 & one of MATH209 MATHZ\o MATHZll MATH201 MATHZ03 MATH204' MATHZIS' MATH201 MATHZIS' MA TlU01 MA TH203 MATHZ13 MATH201 MATH20Z MATHZ03 MATHZI3 MATH216 & Permission ofH.O.D.
30 c.p. from 200 level MATH MA TH2045 or MA TH205
Sec' See 10r PHYS101
PHYS\oZ MATH \03 PHYS \03' MATHIOZ PHYSI03' PIIYS201
PHYS\oZ PHYSZOI MATHZOI, MATH203 PHYS201 MATH201
Corequisile
(Advisory) MATH207
SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
Code Name Credil Points Prerequisile
PHYS203 PHYS301 PHYS20Z MATH201 PHYS302
Corequisile
PHYS303 PHYS304 PHYS305
PSYCHOLOGY
PSYCI01 PSYCI02 PSYC201
PSYC202 PSYC203 PSYC204 PSYC205 PSYC206 PSYC301
PSYC302 PSYC303 PSY004 PSY005 PSY006 PSY007 PSYOOS
PSY009
Atomic, Molecular & Solid Stale Physics 10 Statistical Physics & Relativity 10 Nuclear Physics & Advanced Electromagnetism 10
Psychology Introduction 1 . Psychology Introduction 2 Foundations for Psychology
Basic Processes DevelopmentaJ & Social Processes Individual Processes Applied Topics in Psychology 1 Applied Topics in Psychology 2 Advanced Foundations for Psychology
Independent Project Basic Processes 1
Basic Processes 2 Individual Processes Advanced Social Processes
\0
\0 \0 \0 \0 10
Not in 1993 Not in 1993
\0
Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2
Topics in Neural Science
\0 \0 10 \0 \0 10
\0 10
GROUP B SUBJECTS
PSYCI01 PSYCI02 PSYC102 PSYCI02 PSYC102 PSYCI02 PSYCI02 PSYC201, PSYC202 & PSYC203 PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201
PSYC201 PSYC201
PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201
PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201 PSYC201
PSYOO1 PSYOO1
PSYOO1 PSYOO1 PSYOOI PSYOO1 PSYOO1 PSYOO1
Group B Subjects may be chosen from subjects offered in courses leading to other degrees of the University, and must be approved by the Dean. Footnotes The normal pattern/or the Bachelor 0/ Science degree is 80 credit points at 100 level, 80 credit points at 200 level and 80 credit points at 300 level. Leave 0/ Absence-For the purposes a/Rule 10 a/the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion 0/ th£ year of 1o.st enrolment in the courSt!, that candidate was eJigiblt! to re-enrol withoUl restrictions.
I Students should notc that GEOGI01 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for a major study in Geography, and for admission to Geography Honours GEOG401.
1 Fntry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150. 3 This option is for students who take MATH103 in second semester. ~ MA TH208 in 1990.
5 Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do not need MA TH204. 6 Advisory entry requirement HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a performance in the top 30% of candidature. 7 Advisory entry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/150 and 2 unit
Physics or 4 unit Science with a performance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects. • Students achieving a credit level or better in PIIYSI01 and PHYSI02 may be admitted with the approval of the llead of Department. # Credit cannot be obtained for both MATH112 and MATHI02 t Credit cannot be obtained for both MATH217 and MATH218
27
SECfION TIIREE
SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (AVIATION)
1 Qualification for the Degree
(1) To qualify for admission to the degree, candidates shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising:
(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level Group A subjects;
(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects of which 50 credit points shall be from Group A; and
(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of which 40 credit points shall be from Group A.
2 Credit
(1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qualified the candidate for an award ofthe University or for studies completed at anolherinstitution up to a total of 120 credit points.
(2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted towards a completed award.
3 Time Requirements
28
(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidale shall complete the course within nine years of study.
(2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date detennined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION THREE
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved* by the Faculty Board for the award are:
GROUP A SUBJECTS
Code Name Credit Points
100 Level AVIAI09 Introductory Meteorology 5
AVIAIIO Introductory Navigation 5
AVIAl11 Introductory Aerodynamics 5
AVIAI13 Aircraft Performance & Systems 5
AVIA114 Right Rules & Procedures 5
AVIA115 Reciprocating Engines 5
AVIA116 Commercial Meteorology 5
AVIA117 Navigation 5
AVIA118 Aerodynamics 5
AVIAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Right Rules & Procedures 10
AVIA121 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion 5
200 Level AVIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 AVIA208 Instrument Navigation 5
AVIA209 Long Range Navigation 5
AVIA210 Compressible Aerodynamics 5
AVIA211 Jet Engines 5
AVIA213 Aircraft Structures & Materials 5 AVIA214 Jet Aircraft Right Planning 10 AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft Performance 5
AVIA219 High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting 5 AVIA222 Management of Aviation 5 AVIA223 Aviation Computing and Electronics 5 300 Level AVIA306 Advanced Aircraft Operations 10
AVIA310 Advanced Navigation 10
AVIA312 Applied Aerodynamics 5 AVIA315 Advanced Aviation Management 5 AVIA317 Aviation Climatology 5 AVIA318 Aircraft Stability and Control 5 AVIA320 Aviation Instruction Practicum I 5 AVIA321 Aviation Instruction Practicum II 5
GROUP B SUBJECTS
100 Level AVIA112 Introduclory Human Factors 10 AVIA119 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5 AVIA123 Aircraft Performance & Loading 5
200 Level
AVIA212 Human Factors 10 AVIA220 Aircraft Fatigue Management 5 AVIA221 Human Perrormance in Multi-Crew Operations 5
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
Prerequlsile
AVIAI09 AVIAll0
AVIAlll
AVIA114
AVIA116 AVIAI17 AVIA117 AVIA118 60 cp A VIA 1 00 level 60 cp A VIAl 00 level AVIA117 AVIA123 AVIA207 AVIA120 AVIA121
AVIA214 AVIA209 A VIA318 A VIA223 AVIA222 AVIA207
AVIA118
AVIA308
AVIA112 AVIA113
AVIA119 AVIA213 AVIA212
Coreq"lslU
AVIA308 AVIA311 AVIA320
29
SECfION THREE
Code
300 Level AVIA305
AVIA30S
AVIA3II
AVIA314
AVIA316
Footnotes
Name
Aircraft Design Aviation Instruction
Advanced Aviation Instruction
Directed Study
Right Deck PerfolDlance
Credit Points
5 10 10
10
5
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
Prerequisile
AVIA2I3
60 cp A VIA 200 level
AVIA30S
At least two of the following: A VIA306 AVIA30S AVIA310
AVIA31S
AVIA221
Coreq"lslU
AVIA3IS
The normal pal/ern/or the Bachelor of Science (Aviation) degree is SO crediJ points at }OO level, 80 credit points at 200 level and 80 credit points at 300 level.
Lea'le of Absence - For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion of the year 0/ last elU'o/ment in 1M cOUl'se. that candidate was eligible 10 re·enrol without restrictions.
* Refers to the list of approved subjects in the Schedule - Bachelor of Science, Group A Subjects.
30
SECf10N THREE
SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS
1 Qualincation for the Degree
(1) To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising:
(aJ not more than SO credit points from 100 level subjects of which 20 credit pointS shall be from Group A;
(b) at least 70 credit points from 200 level subjects of which:
(i) at least 25 credit points shall be from Group A;
(ii) at least 5 credit points shall be from Group B subjects; and
(iii) at least a further 30 credit points shall be from Group B and/or Group C~
(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of which:
2 Credit
(i) at least 40 credit points shall be from Group A; and
(ii) at least a further 40 credit points shall be from Group A and/or Group C.
(1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qUalified the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another institution up to a total of 120 credit points including not more than:
(a) 100 credit points at the 100 level;
(b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and
(c) 20 credit points at the 300 level.
(2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted toward s a completed award.
3 Time Requirements
(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course within nine years of study. from its commencement.
(2) A candidate who has been granted credit shall bedeemed to have commenced the course from a date detennined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.
4 Combined Degrees
A candidate may undertake one of the following combined degree programs in accordance with Rule 12 of the Rules Governing Academic awards, namely:
Mathematics/Arts;
Mathematics/Commerce;
Mathematics/Engineering;
Mathematics!Economics;
Mathematics/Computer Science;
Mathematics!Surveying;
Mathematics/Science.
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
31
SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES SECTION TIlREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
APPROVED SUBJECTS Code Name Credil Points Prerequisite Corequisile
The subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are: MATH314 Optimization 10 MATH201 MATH21S'
GROUP A SUBJECTS MATH315 Mathematical Biology 10 MATH201 MATH203 MATH213
Code Name MATH316 Industrial Modelling Not in 1993 MA TH20! MA TH202
CrediJ Points Prerequisite Corequisilt MATH203 MATH213 MATHl02 Mathematics 1021 10 See20rMATHIli MATH216 & Pennission MATHI03 Mathematics 103 10 See2 or MATHI02 ofH.Q.D.
or (MATH 11 I & MATH311 Number Theory Not in 1993 30 c. p. from 200 level MATH
MATHI12) MATH31S Topology 10 MA TH204' or MA TH205 MATH112 Mathematics 1121 10 MATHI1 I STATIO! Statistical Inference 10 STAT201 STAT202 MATH201 Multivariable Calculus 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MATH201
or (MATHII1 &MATHI12) STATI02 Study Design 10 STAT2O! STAT202
or (MATHI02 & Permission STATI03 Generalized Linear Models 10 STAT201 & STAT202 ofH.O.D.') Advisory ST A T301
MATH203 Ordinary Differential Equations 1 5 (MATHl02 & MATHI03) STATI04 Time Series Analysis 10 STA 1'201 & STA T202 or (MATH111 &MATHI12) Advisory ST A T301 or (MATHI02 & Permission ofH.O.D') GROUP B SUBJECTS
MATH204 Real Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MATH213 Mathematical Modelling 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) or (MATH111 &MATHI12 or (MATHI1I & & MATHI03) MATHlI2)
MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) MATH201 Mechanics 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) MATH214 or (MATHI11 &MATHI12) or (MATH 11 I &MATHI12 or (MATHI02 & Permission & MATHl03)
ofH.O.D.') MATH215 Operations Research 5 MA THI 02 or MA THI03 MATH21S Linear Algebra 2 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) or (MATHI11 &MATHI12)
or (MATH 11 I &MATHlI2 GROUP C SUBJECTS
&MATHI03) MATH301 Logic & Set Theory Not in 1993 20 credit points from MATHII1 Mathematics 111 10 2 unit HSC Mathematics
200 level MATH incl. one MATH202 Partial Differential Equations 1 5 MATH20! MATH203
of MATH204, MATH209, MATH205 Analysis of Metric Spaces 5 MATH204'
MATH211, MATH212, MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 MATH206 & MATHl03
MATH21S' MATH209 Algebra 5 MATH2IS' MATH302 General Tensors & Relativity Not in 1993 MATH201 MATH21S' MATH210 Geometry 1 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03) MATH303 Variational Methods and Not in 1993 MATH201 MATH203 or (MATHI 11 &MATHI12
Integral Equations MATH204s & MATHI03)
MATH304 Ordinary Differential Equations 2 10 MATH201 MATH203 MATH211 Group Theory 5 (MATH 102 & MATHI03)
MATH204' MATH21S' or (MATHI1 1 &MATHI12
MATH305 Partial Differential Equations 2 10 MA TH201 MA TH202 & MATHI03)
MA TH203 MA TH204' MATH212 Discrete Mathematics 5 MATHI020rMATH103
MATH306 Fluid Mechanics 10 MATH201 MATH203 Advisory or (MATHI1 1 &MATHlI2)
MA TH204' MA TH206 MATH207 MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 (MATHI02 & MATHI03)
MATH307 Quantum & Statistical Mechanics 10 MA TH201 MA TH203 or (MATHI1 1 &MATHII2
MATH206 & COMPlOl) or (MATHII 1
MATH30S Geometry 2 10 2Oc. p. from 200 level MATH & MATHlI2 & MATHI03)
incl.one of MATH209 PHYSICS
MATH21I MATH21S' PHYS201 Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism 10 MATHI03 PHYS103'
MATH309 Combinatorics Nolin 1993 MATH21S' PHYS202 Mechanics & Thennal Physics 10 MATHI02 PHYSI03'
MATH310 Functional Analysis 10 MATH205 PHYS203 Solid Stale & Atomic Physics 10 PHYS20!
MATH311 Measure Theory & Integration Not in 1993 MATH205 PHYS205 Scientific Measurement Principles,
MATH312 Algebra 10 MATH2184 & one of MATH209 Processes and Applications 10 PHYSI02
MATH210 MATH211 PHYS301 Mathematical Methods & Quantum Mechanics 10 PHYS201 MATH2O! MATH203
MATH313 Numerical Analysis (Theory) 10 MATH201 MATH203 PHYS302 Electromagnetism & Flectronics 10 PHYS201 MATH201
MATH204'MATH21S' PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular & Solid Stale Physics 10 PHYS203 PHYS301 PHYS304 Statistical Physics & Relativity 10 PHYS202 MAT1I201
32 33
"
SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DlPLOMA RULES
Code Na",~ endil POUt" Prer~quisil~
PHYS305 Nuclear Physics &: Advanced Electromagnetism 10 PHYS302
STATISTICS
STATIO! Mathematical Statistics9 10 MATHl030rSTATl01 IL MATH 1 12 (or equivalent level of Mathematics)
STATIOZ Re&ression Analysis 10 STATIO! orSTATlO! & MATH1l2lMATHI02 or equivalent level of Mathematics
STATI03 Queues & Simulation 5 MATH1l2lMATHI02 STAT204for or eqUivalent BSe deere-
STATI04 Non-parametric Statistics 5 STATIOl orSTATlOl STAT203 for & MATHll21 MATH10Z BSe deere-or equivalent STAT203 for
STATI05 Engineerine Slalisticst 5 MATH1l20r MATH10Z COMPUTER SCIENCE COMPZ01 Advanced Data Structures 5 COMPZ05 & MATH212 COMP202 Computer Architecture 5 COMPZ03 COMPZ03 Assembly Language 5 COMPI01 or COMP212 COMP204 Proerammine Language Semantics 5 COMPZ05 COMPZ05 System Proeramming 5 COMPI010rCOMP212 COMP206 Theory of Computation 5 COMPI01 COMP212 MATH212 COMP212 Introduction to Programmine 5 COMP241 Cognitive Science 10 COMP3O! Compiler Desiifi 10 COMP201 COMP3OZ Artificial Intellieence 10 COMPI01 or COMP212 COMP303 Computer Networks 10 COMPZ01 COMP304 Database Design 10 COMP201 COMP305 Algorithm Desien & Analysis 10 COMPZ01, COMP206 COMP306 Computer Graphics 10 COMP201 MATH216 &
either MATH217 or MATH218 COMP307 Software Engineering PrincipleslO 10 COMP2Ol COMP308 Operating Systems 10 COMPZ01 COMP202 Footnotes The normal paltern/or tM Bachelor 0/ Matlwmatics Degree is 80 cruiit points at}OO level, 80 credit poin/s at 200 l~vel and 80 credit pointsal 300 i~vel.
Leave of Absence -For lIu! purposes of Rule }O o/t~ Ruks Governing Academic Awards, a candidiJt~ shall be deefMd to be in good standing if, at IN conciwsion O/IN year of last enrolnwnl in the COlUse, that candidate was eligible to r~-enrol wilhoUl restrictions.
I Credit cannot be obtained forbolh MATHI12and MATHI02
2 Entry requirement HSC 3 Wlit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150.
3 This option is for students who take MATH103 in second semester.
• MATH208 in 1990. !i Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do oot need MA TH204.
6 Advisory entry requirement: HSC 2 unit Mathematics with peIfonnance in the top 30% of candidature.
7 Advisory entry requirement: HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of alleast 110/150 and 2 Unit Physics or 4 Unit Science with a peIfonnance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects.
• Students achievine a Credit level or better in PHYSI0t and PHYSI02 may be admitted with approval of the Head of Department. 9 Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT201 and STAT205.
10 COMP307 requires attendance at lectures in Semester 1 and completion of a Project report in Semester 2.
• Other approved subjects may be chosen from the schedules for the degrees offered elsewhere in the University, if approved by the Dean.
34
SECTION THREE
SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (pSYCHOLOGy)
1 Interpretation
In this schedule, "discipline" means a branch of leamina reco&nised as such by the FaQllty Board.
2 QualiOcation for the Degree
(1) To qualify for admission to the dearee. a candidate shall pass subjects totalling 320 credit points from the Hst of Approved Subjects and comprising:
(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level subjects of which:
(i) 20 credit points shall befrom GroupA subjects; and
(ii) 40 credit points shall be comprised of 20 credit points from each of two disciplines,
(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects of which 40 credit points shall be from Group A subjects;
(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of which 60 credit points shall be from Group A subjects; and
(d) 80 credit points from 400 level subjects taken from Group A subjects.
3 Grading of the Degree
(1) The degree shall be conferred as an ordinary de&ree except that, where the peIformance of a candidate has reached a standard determined by the Faculty Board to be of sufficient merit, the degree shall be conferred with Honours.
(2) There shall be three classes of Honours, namely Class I, Class II and Class III. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.
4 Credit
(1) Credit may be granted for studies completed which qualified the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another institution up to a total of 120 credit points including not more than:
(a) 100 credit points at the 100 level;
(b) 40 credit points at the 200 level; and
(c) 20 credit points at the 300 level.
(2) Credit may be granted for 311 subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted towards a completed award.
S Time Requirements
(I) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course within eleven years of study, from its commencement.
(2) A candidate who has been granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
35
SECfION THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award consist of the following prescribed Group A and Group B subjects:
GROUP A SUBJECTS
Cod. Name Credil Points
100 Level PSYCIOI Psychology Introduction 1 10 PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10
200 Level
PSYC20l Foundations for Psychology 10 PSYC202 Basic Processes 10 PSYCZ03 Developmental & Social Processes 10 PSYC204 Individual Processes 10 PSYC205 Applied Topics in Psychology 1 Not in 1993
PSYC206 Applied Topics in Psychology 2 Not in 1993
300 Level
PSYOOl Advanced Foundations for Psychology \0
PSY002 Independent Project 10
and 40 cp from
PSY003 Basic Processes 1 10 PSY004 Basic Processes 2 10 PSY005 Individual Processes \0 PSY006 Advanced Social Processes \0 PSY007 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 10 PSY008 Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2 10 PSY009 Topics in Neura] Science \0
400 Level
PSYC40l Psychology Honours 401 40 PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402 40 or PSYC403 Psychology 403 30 PSYC404 Psychology 404 50 Footnotes
Prerequisile
PSYCIOI
PSYCI02
PSYCI02
PSYCI02 PSYCI02 PSYCI02
PSYCI02
PSYC201, PSYC202
PSYC203
PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYC20l
PSYC20l PSYC20l
PSYC201 PSYC201
PSYC201
see ' PSYC401
Consult Dept.
PSYC403
CorequisiU
PSYC201 PSYC201
PSYC201 PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYOOI
PSYOOI PSYOOI
PSYOOI PSYOOl
PSYOOl
PSYOOI
PSYOO1
The normal pattern/or the Bachelor 0/ Science (Psychology) degree is 80 credit points at 100 level, 80 credit points at 200 level, 80 credit points aJ 300 level and 80 credit points at 400 level.
uave 0/ Absence-For the purposes o/Rule 10 o/the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shalJ be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion 0/ the year 0/ last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.
I Entry to PSYC401 and PSYC402 in the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) degree requires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade or better in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302: consult the Department for details.
GROUP B SUBJECTS Group B Subjects are in the following discipline areas: Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography, Geology, Mathematics and Physics: they are referred to in the Bachelor of Science Schedule of Approved Group A Subjects (excepting the discipline of Psychology).
36
SECfION THREE
SCHEDULE - DIPLOMA IN A VIA TION SCIENCE
1 Qualification for the Diploma
(1) To qualify for admission to the diplomaacandidate shall pass subjects totalling 160 credit points from the list of Approved Subjects and comprising:
(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level Group A subjects; and
(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects including at least 50 credit points from Group A subjects.
2 Grading
3
In cases where a candidate's performance in the course has reached a level determined by Ute Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Board of Studies in Aviation, the Diploma may be conferred with Merit.
Time Requirements
(1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course within six years of study.
(2) A candidate who has beengranted credit shall bedeemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RlIT..BS
37
SECf!ON THREE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE AND DIPLOMA RULES
APPROVED SUBJECTS
1be subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are:
GROUP A SUBJECTS
Cotk Name CTHil Points Prerequisile Corequism
100 Level
AVIA!09 Introductory Meteorology S AVIAI\o Introductory Navigation S AVIAll! Introductory Aerodynamics S AVIA113 Aircraft Performance & Systems S AVIA114 Flight Rules & Procedures S AVIA115 Reciprocating Engines 5 AVIA116 Commercial Meteorology 5 AVIAI09 AVIA117 Navigation 5 AVIAI10 AVIA118 Aerodynamics 5 AVIA111 AVIAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Flight
Rules & Procedures \0 AVIA114
AVIAI21 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion 5
200 Leve!
AVIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 AVIA116
AVIA208 Instrument Navigation 5 AVIA117 AVIA209 Long Range Navigation 5 AVIA117 AVIA2\o Compressible Aerodynamics 5 AVIA118 AVIA211 Jet Engines 5 60 cp A VIA 1 00 level AVIA213 Aircraft Structures & Materials 5 60 cp A VIAl 00 level AVIA214 Jet Aircraft FJiaht Planning \0 AVIAI17 AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft Perfonnance 5 AVIAI23 AVIA219 High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting 5 AVIA207
AVIA222 Management of Aviation 5 AVIAI20 AVIA223 Aviation Computing and FJeclronics 5 AVIAI21
GROUP B SUBJECTS
100 Level AVIA112 Introductory Human Factors \0 AVIA119 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5 AVIA112
AVIAI23 Aircraft Petformance & Loading 5 AVIAI13
200 Level
AVIA212 Human Factors \0 AVIA119 AVIA220 Aircraft Fatigue Management 5 AVIA213 AVIA221 Human Performance in Multi-Crew Operations 5 AVIA212
Footnotes
The normal pattern/or the Diploma in Aviation Science course is 80 credit points al100 level and 80 credit points at 200 level.
Leave of Absence-For the purposes of Rule 10 o/the Rules Governing Academic A wards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion oflhe year 0/ last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.
• Refers to the list of approved subjects in the Schedule - Bachelor of Science Group A SUbjects.
38
SEcnONFOUR
APPROVED SUBJECTS FOR TIlE BACHELOR DEGREES
List of Approved Subjects Referred to in Bachelor Degree Schedules F::: Full Year; S1 :: Semester 1 ~ S2 = Semester 2
Number Subject Points When HIW Prerequisites Corequisites
1993 1994 1993
APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Environmental Assessment and Management suhjects
Available only to Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management candidates
EAMCI03 Contemporary Environmental 10 SI 3
Philosophy
EAMC113 Environment and Human 10 S2 3 EAMCI03
Values I
EAMC203 Environment and Human 10 Sl 3 EAMCI03
Values II EAMC1l3
EAMC213 Development and Social 10 S2 3 EAMCI03 EAMC203
Impact Assessment EAMC1l3
EAMC303 Occupational Hygiene & 10 FY 3 EAMC203
Toxicology EAMC213
EAMC313 Social Aspects of 10 52 3 EAMC203 EAMC303
Environmental Health EAMC213
EAM5101 Concepts of Ecology 10 SI 4
EAM5111 Systems Approach in Ecology 10 S2 4 EAM5101
EAMSI02 Monitoring and Statistics I 10 51 5
llAMSI12 Monitoring and Statistics II 10 52 5 EAM5102
llAM5104 Environmental Planning and 10 SI 4
Pollution Control Legislation
llAMSl14 Local and Regional 10 S2 4
Environmental Issues
llAMS201 Agricultural Systems 10 51 4 EAM5101
EAMS1l1
39
SECfION FOUR
Number Subject Points When
EAMS211 Industrial and Urban Systems 10
EAMS202 System Dynamics and Data
Analysis!
10
EAMS212 System Dynamics and Data 10 Analysis II
EAMS290 Hydrology and Soils Analysis 10
EAMS291 Water Resources Management 10
EAMS292 Plant Systematics and Plant 10
Ecology EAMS293 Animal Systematics and 10
Animal Ecology
EAMS301 Environmental Management I 10
EAMS311 Environmental Management II 10
EAMS302 Specialist Study
EAMS304 Regional and National Environmental Issues
EAMS314 Environmental Impact
Assessment
EAMS390 Soil ConselVation and Management
20
10
10
10
EAMS391 Water and Soils Applications 10 and Modelling
EAMS392 Flora Component of
Environmental Impact
Assessment
EAMS393 Fauna Component of
Environmental Impact Assessment
AVIATION
10
10
52
51
52
51
52
51
52
51
52
F
51
52
51
52
51
52
Availahle to Bachelor of Science (Aviation) candidates
A VIAl 09 Introductory Meteorology 5 SI A VIAl 10 Introductory Navigation 5 SI
A VIAl I I Introductory Aerodynamics 5 Sl
A VIAl12 Introductory Human Factors 10 SI
A VIAl 13 Aircraft Performance 5 SI
& Systems
A VIAl 14 Flight Rules & Procedures
A VIAl 15 Reciprocating Engines
A VIAl16 Commercial Meteorology
A VIAl 17 Navigation A VIAl18 Aerodynamics
40
5
5 5
5 5
51
51
52
52
52
ww
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
4
3
2 2 3
3 3
Prerequisites
1993 1994
EAM5101
EAM5111
EAM5102 EAM5112
EAM51 02
EAM5112 EAMSlO2
EAM5112
EAM5102
EAM5112
EAM5101
EAM5111
EAM5101
EAM5111
EAM5201
EAM5211
EAM5201 EAM5211
All Prescribed 200 level subjects
EAM5104 EAM5114
EAM5104
EAM5114
EAM5290 EAM5291
EAM5290
EAM5291 EAM5292
EAM5293
EAM5292
EAM5293
AVIA109
AVIAIIO
A VIA111
APPROVED SUBJEcrS
Corequisites
1993 EAM5201
EAM5202
EAM5290
EAM5292
EAM5301
EAM5390
SECfION FOUR
Number Subject Points When
AVIAt19 Aviation Psychology
& Medicine 5
AVIAl20 Aviation Law, Commercial 10 Flight Rules and Procedures
A VIAl 21 Aircraft Systems
& Propulsion
AVIAl23 Aircraft Performance &
Loading
5
5
A VIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 A VIA208 Instrument Navigation 5 A VIA209 Long Range Navigation 5 AVIA210 Compressible Aerodynamics 5
A VIA211 Jet Fngines 5
AVIA212 Human Factors 10 A VIA213 Aircraft Structures 5
& Materials A VIA214 Jet Aircraft Flight Planning 10
AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft 5
Performance
A VIA219 High Altitude
Meteorology and
Forecasting
A VIA220 Aircraft Fatigue
Management A VIA221 Human Performance
in Multi-Crew
Operations
AVIA222 Management in Aviation
AVIA223 Aviation Computing
and Electronics
AVIA305 Aircraft Design
A VIA306 Advanced Aircraft
Operations
A VIA308 Aviation Instruction
AVIA310 Advanced NaVigation
A VIA311 Advanced Aviation
Instruction
AVIA312 Applied Aerodynamics
A VIA314 Directed Study
Advanced Aviation
Management
5
5
5
5 5
5 10
10
10
10
5
10
5
52
52
52
52
51
51
51
51
52
51
51
52
51
52
52
52
52
52
51
51
51
51
52
52
52
52
ww
3
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
3
4
3
Prerequisites
1993 1994 AVIA112
AVIA114
AVIA113
AVIA116
AVIA117 AVIAI17
AVIA118
60cp AVIAIOO level
AVIA119 60cp A VIAlOO level AVIA117
AVIAI23
AVIA207
AVIA213
AVIA212
AVIA120
AVIA121
AVIA213 AVIA214
60 cp 200 level
AVIA209
AVIA308
AVIA318
AVIA223
At least two
of the following:
AVIA306
AVIA308
AVIA310 AVIA318 AVIA222
AVIA318
APPROVED SUBfficrs
Corequisites
1993
41
SECfION FOUR
Number Subject
A VIA316 Right Deck Performance
A VIA317 Aviation Climatology AVIA318 AircraftSlability
and Control A VIA320 Aviation Instruction
Practicum I AVIA321 Aviation Instruction
Practicum II
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
B10LlOI Plant & Animal Biology
BIOLI02 Cell Biology. C'.renetics
& Evolution
B10L201 Biochemistry
BIOL202 Animal Physiology
BIOL204 Cell & Molecular
Biology BIOL205 Molecular Genetics
BIOL206 Plant Physiology
B10L207 Ecology
BIOLJ01 Cell Processes
BIOL302 Reproductive
Physiology BI0L303 Environmental Plant
Physiology
BIOL304 Whole Plant
Development
BI0L305 Immunology
BI0L307 Molecular Biology of
Plant Development
BI0L309 Molecular Biology
BI0L310 Microbiology
42
Points When
5 5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
52
52
51
51
51
51
52
51
51
52
51
52
52
Not in 1993
52
51
52
52
Not in
1993
52
51
ww
3 3
3
2
2
6 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6 6
6
6
Prerequisites
1993 AYIA221
AYIA207
AYIA118
AYIAJ08
B10LlOI
BIOLl02
B10LlOI
B10LlO2
B10LlO1
BIOLl02
B10LlO1
B10L102
B10LlOI
B10Ll02
B10LlO1
BIOLl02
Students who
have completed
BIOL203 are
not eligible to
do this subject B10L201 & one BIOL200 Two BIOL200
TwoBIOL200
TWoBIOL200
TWoBIOL200
Two BIOL200
incI.one of
1994
BIOL201 or
B10L204 or mOL205
B10L201 and
BIOL205
BIOL201 &
one other BIOL200
(BIOL204 advisable)
APPROVED SUBJECTS
Corequisites
1993
AYIA308
AYIA311
AYIA320
SECTION FOUR
Number Subject Points When
BI0L311 Environmenta1 Biology
BI0L312 Animal Development
CHEMISTRY
CHEM10l Chemistry 101 CHEMI02 Chemistry 102
CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry
CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry
CHEM23 I Organic Chemistry
CHEM241 Physical Chemistry
CHEM251 Applied Chemistry
CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry
10
10
10 10 10
10
10
10
10
10
CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry 10
CHEM312 Chemometrics 5
CHEM313 Industrial Chemical Analysis 5
CHEM314 Trace Analysis in
Environmental Systems
CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry
CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding
& Cluster Chemistry
CHEM323 Bioinorganic Co-
ordination Chemistry
CHEM331 Organic Chemistry
CHEM332 Heterocyclic Chemistry
CHEM333 Organic Reaction
Mechanism Identification of Natural Compounds
Organic Spectroscopy
5
10
5
5
10
5
5
5
5
51
51
51
52
52
51
51
52
Not in
1993
51
51
52
52
Not in
1993
51
52
52
51
52
Not in
1993
52
52
ww
6
6
6 6 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
3
3
3
6
3
3
6
3
3
3
Prerequisites
1993 BIOL203 or
BIOL207
Students who have completed
BIOLJ06are
not eligible to
do this subject
TwoBIOL200
Students who
have completed
BIOL308 are
not eligible to
do this subject
CHEM101
CHEM102
CHEM101
CHEMI02
CHEMIOI
CHEMI02
CHEM101
CHEM102
CHEM101
CHEMI02
CHEMIOI
CHEM102
CHEM211
CHEM211
MATHI02 (or
MATH112)
CHEM211
CHEM211
CHEM221
CHEM221
CHEM221
CHEM231
CHEM231
CHEM231
CHEM231
CHEM231
1994
APPROVED SUBJECTS
Corequisites
1993
43
SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECfS
Number Subject
CHEM341 Physical Chemistry
CHEM342 Electrochemical Solar
Energy Conversion
CHEM343 Molecular 5pectroscopy
Points When
to SI
5 52
5 52
ww
6
3
3
Prerequisites
1993 1994 CHEM241
MATHl02 (or
MATHIl2)
CHEM241
MATHI02(or
MATHIl2)
CHEM241 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10 S2 6 CHEM261
Corequisites
1993
NOTE Prior to 1991 CHEM211, CHEM221, CHEM231 and CHEM241 were numbered CHEM201 CHEM202 CHEM203 and CHEM204 respectively. ' ,
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE SUBJECTS
Consult other Departmental lists for other prescribed subjeds required: See Award Rules Available only to Bachelor of Environmental Stience Degree candidates SCENI01 Environmental Investigations I 10 F 3
SCEN201 Environmental Investigations 1110 F 3 SCEN101 SCEN202 Environmental Planning & 10 SI 4
Pollution Control
SCEN203 Water Resources Management 10
SCEN301 Environmental Project
SCEN302 Environmental Impact
Assessment Techniques GEOGRAPHY
GEOOI01 Introduction to
Physical Geography GEOGI02 Introduction to
Human Geography GEOG201 Methods in Physical
Geography
GEOO202 Methods in Human
Geography
GEOO203 Biogeography & Climatology
GEOG204 Geomorphology of
Australia
GEOG207 PopUlation, Culture
& Resources
GEOO208 Cities & Regions
GEOO301 Advanced Methods in
Physical Geography
GEOG302 Advanced Methods in Human Geography
GEOG304 The Biosphere &
Conservation
44
to
to
10
to
to
to
10
10
to
to
to
to
10
52
3 days
F 52
51
52
51
52
52
51
51
52
52
51
51
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5CEN201
5CEN202
see'
see'
GEooto1
GEOGto2
GEooto1
GEooto1
GEooto2
GEOG102
GEOG201 plus either GEOG203 or
GEOO204
GEOO202 plus either GEOG205 orGE0G206
GEOO203
GEOO202 plus either GEOO207
orGEOG208
SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs
Number Subject
GEOG305 Climatic Problems
GEOG306 Geography of Australia
An Historical Perspective
GEOG309 50ciety & 5pace
GEOO310 Directed Studies in Human Geography
GEOG311 Hydrology
GEOO315 Production, Work &
Territory
GEOG316 Directed Studies in Physical Geography
Footnote
Points When
to
10
10
10
to
10
10
52
51
52
To be
advised
51
52
Not in 1993
ww
4 4
4
4
4
4
4
Prerequisites
1993 1994 GEOG203
GEOG202 plus
either GEOG205
orGEOG206
GEOO202 plus
either GEOO205
orGEOG206
GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 orGEOO206
GEOG201
GEOO203
GEOO202 plus
either GEOG205
orGEOG206
GEOG201
plus either GEOO203 or
GEOG204
GEOG202
plus
GEOG207 orGEOG208
GEOG202
plus either
GEOG207 orGEOG208
GEOG202
plus either GEOG207
orGEOG208
GEOG202
plus either
GEOG207 or
GEOG208
Corequisites
1993
1 Students should note that GEOOI01 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for a major study in Geography, and for admission to Geography Honours GEOG401
GEOLOGY
GEOL101 The Environment
GEOLl02 Earth Materials
GEOL211 Optical Mineralogy
GEOL212 Introductory Petrology
GEOL213 Ancient Environments &
Organisms GEOL214 Geological Structures &
Resources GEOL215 Geology Field Course 215
GEOL216 Geology Field Course 216
GE0L311 Igneous Petrology &
Crustal Evolution
GEOL312 Metamorphic Petrology
GE0L313 Structural Geology & Geophysics
GE0L314 Stratigraphic Methods
GE0L315 Sedimentology
10
10
5
10
10
10
10
5
10
10
10
10
10
51
52
51
52
52
51
51
52
52
51
51
52
52
6
6
3
6
6
6
14
days
7
days
6
6
6
6
6
GEOLlOI
GEOL102
GEOL211
GEOLl02
GEOLl02
GEOLl02
GEOL215
GEOL312
GEOL212
GEOL214
GEOL213
GEOL212&
GEOL213
45
SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJECTS
Number Subject Points When HIW Prerequisites Corequisites Number Subject Points When HIW Prerequisites Corequisites 1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993
GEOLJI6 Geology of Fuels 10 SI 6 GEOL213 (MATHI02& GEOLJI7 Resource & Exploration 10 SI 6 GEOL212& Permission of
Geology GEOL214 H.O.D.') GEOLJIS Geology Field Course 318 5 SI 7 GEOUI3 MATH207 Complex Analysis 2 5 S2 2 MATH206&
days MATH103 GEOLJ19 Geology Field Course 319 5 S2 10 GEOL216& MATH209 Algebra 5 S2 2 MATH21S'
days GEOLJ13 MATH2IO Geometry 1 5 S2 2 (MATHI02& GEOLJ20 Geology of Quaternary 10 S2 6 GEOU13 or MATHI03) or
Environments GEOG204 (MATHIII & GEOLJ21 Groundwater & Soils 10 Nolin 6 MATHII2&
1993 MATHI03) MATH211 Group Theory 5 SI 2 (MATHI02&
MATHEMATICS MATHI03)or MATHlll Mathematics 111 10 S1,S2 6 2 unit HSC Mathematics (MATH1II & #MATH112Mathematics 112 10 S1,S2 6 MATHIIl MATH112& #MATHI02Mathematics 102 10 SI 6 see20r MATHI03)
MATHlII MATH212 Discrete 5 SI 2 MATHI020r MATH103 Mathematics 103 10 S2 6 see2 or Mathematics MATHI03 or
MATHI020r (MATIlIll & (MATHlll & MATH112) MATH112) MATH2I3 Mathematical 5 S2 2 (MATHI02&
MATH201 Multivariable 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& Modelling MATHI03)or Calculus MATH103) or (MATHl11 &
(MATHlll & MATH112) MATH112) or MATH214 Mechanics 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& (MATHI02& MATHI03)or Permission of (MATHIll & H.O.D.') MATHlI2&
MATH202 Partial Differential 5 S2 2 MATH201 MATH203 MAnu 03) Equations 1 MATH21 5 Operalions 5 S2 2 MATH 102 or
MATH203 Ordinary Differential 5 S2 2 (MATHI02& Research MATHI03 or Equations 1 MATHI03) or (MATHlll &
(MATHl11 & MATH112) MATH112) or MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5 SZ 2 (MATHIOZ& (MATHIOZ& MATHI03)or Permission of (MATHl11 & H.D.D') MATH 112 &
MATH204 Real Analysis 5 SI 2 (MATHIOZ& CDMPI0l) or MATHI03) or (MATHlll & (MATHlII & MATH112& MATH II 2 & MATHI03) MATH103) tMATH217 Linear Algebra 1 5 SI 2 MATHI020r
MATH20S Analysis of 5 S2 2 MATH204' (MATH 1 11& Metric Spaces
MATH112) MATH206 Complex Analysis 1 5 SI 2 (MATHI02& MATH201 tMATH21S Linear Algebra 2 5 SI 2 (MATHl02 &
MATHI03) or MATH 103) or (MATH111 & (MATH111 & MATH112) or
MATH112&
46 MATH103)
47
SECTION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs SECfION FOUR APPROVED sUBmcrs
Number Subject Points When HfW Prerequisites Corequlsites Number Subject Points When HfW Prerequisites Corequisites
1993 1994 1993 1993 1994 1993
MATH301 Logic & Set JO Nolin 3 20cp from 200 level MATH316 Industrial JO NOlin 3 MATH2DI
Theory 1993 MATH inel. one of Modelling 1993 MATH2D2
MATH2D4, 209, 211, MATH2D3
212, 21S' MATH213
MATH302 General Tensors JO Nolin 3 MATH2DI MATH216&
& Relativity 1993 MATH21S' Permission of
MATH303 Variational Methods 10 NOlin 3 MATH2DI H.O.D.
and Integral Equations 1993 MATH2D3 MATH317 Number Theory 10 Not in 3 30cp from MA TH200
MATH2D4' 1993
MATH304 Ordinary Differential JO SI 3 MATH2DI MATH31S Topology JO S2 3 MATH2045 or
Equations 2 MATH2D3 MATII205
MATH2D4' Footnotes
MATH21S' 2 Entry requirement - HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150
MATH305 Partial Differential JO S2 3 MATH2DI 3 This option is for certain students who take MATHI03 in second semester
Equations 2 MATH202 4 MATH2DS in 1990
MATHZ03 5 Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do not need MATH2D4
MATH2D4' #Credit cannot be obtained for both MA THIl2 and MA THI 02
MA TH306 Fluid Mechanics 10 S2 3 MATH2DI (Advisory) tCredit cannot be obtained for both MA TH217- and MA TH218.
MATH203 MATH207
MATH204' DIVISION OF QUANTITATIVE METHODS
MATH206 MAQM214t Quantitative Methods 10 S2 4 INF0101 &
MATH307 Quantum & 10 S2 3 MATH2DI STATIOJ
Statistical MATH2D3 Subjects provided by the Division of Quantitative Methods to Bachelor of Education courses in the Faculty of Education in
Mechanics MATH206 1993
MATH30S Geometry 2 10 S2 3 20cp from 200 level These subjects are available only to Bachelor of Education students.
MATH inel. one of H.Ed (Mathematics Education)
MATH209, 211, 21S' MAQM135 Mathematics lA 2D F 4
MATH309 Combinatorics 10 Nolin 3 MATH21S' MAQM136 Mathematics 1 B 20 F 4
1993 MAQM235 Mathematics ITA 20 F 4 MAQM135
MATH3JO Functional 10 FY 1 l/Z MATHZ05 MAQM236 Mathematics lIB JO F 2
Analysis MAQM237 Mathematics lIe 10 F 2
MATH311 Measure Theory 10 Not in 3 MATHZ05 MAQM335_ Mathematics IllA 20 F 4 MAQM235
& Integration 1993 MAQM336 Mathematics IIIB IS F 3
MATH312 Algebra JO SI 3 MATH2184 & one of MAQM337 Mathematics me IS F 3
(MATH209, MAQM435 Mathematics IVA 10 F 2
MATH210 MAQM436 Mathematics IVB 10 F 2
MATH211) MAQM437 Mathematics rye JO F 2
MATH313 Numerical Analysis JO SI 3 MATH2DI H.Ed (Primary Education)
(Theory) MATH2D3 MAQM146 Foundation Studies IS F 3
MATH2045 in Elementary Mathematics
MATH21S' B.Ed (Early Childhood)
MATH314 Optimization JO FY 1 1/2 MATH201 MAQM147 Mathematics lEe JO SI 4
MATH2184 Footnote
MATH315 Mathematical JO SI 3 MATH2DI t Credit cannot be obtained for bath MATH215 and MAQM214
Biology MATH203
MATH213 PHYSICS
PHYSJOI Physics 101 JO SI 6 See6 PHYSJ02 Physics 102 JO SI,S2 6 See?
or PIIYSI01
4S 49
SECI'ION FOUR
Number Subject
PHYS103 Physics 103
PHYS201 Quantum
Mechanics
& Electromagnetism
PHYS202 Mechanics &
Thermal Physics
PHYS203 Solid Slale &
Atomic Physics
PHYS205 Scientific Measurement
Principles, Processes
and Applications
PHYS301 Mathematical
Methods & Quantum
Mechanics
PHYS302 Electroma20etism
& Electronics
PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular
& Solid State Physics
PHYS304 Statistical Physics
& Relativity
PHYS305 Nuclear Physics &
Advanced
Electromagnetism
Footnotes
Points When
10
10
10
10
10 10
10
10
10
10
S2
SI
SI
S2
S2
SI
SI
S2
S2
S2
6 Advisory entry requirement· HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a
perfonnance in the top 30% of candidature.
ww
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Prerequisites
1993 PHYSI02
MATH103
PHYS103'
MATH102
PHYSI03'
PHYS201
PHYS102 PHYS201 MATH201
MATH203
PHYS201
MATH201
PHYS203 PHYS301
PHYS202
MATH201
PHYS302
1994
APPROVED SUBJECfS
Corequisites
1993
7 Assumed Imowled&e of HSC2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC3 unit mathematics (with a mark of at least 110/150). Students with lesser attainment than this are advised to attempt Physics 101, together with a first year mathematics subject before proceeding to Physics 102.
8 Students achieving a credit level or better in PHYSI01 and PHYSI02 may be admitted with approval of the Head of Department.
MATHll1 and MATH112 may substitute for MATHI03 with approval of Head of Department
PSYCHOLOGY
PSYCI01 Psychology Introduction I 10
PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10
PSYCZOI Foundations for Psychology 10
PSYC202 Basic Processes
PSYC203 Developmental & Social
Processes
PSYC204 Individual Processes
PSYC205 Applied Topics in
Psychology I
PSYC206 Applied Topics in
Psychology 2
PSYC301 Advanced Foundations
for Psychology
PSYC302 Independent Project
PSYC303 Basic Processes I
50
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
SI
S2
SI
SI
52
52
Not
in 1993
Not
in 1993
51
F
51
5 5 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
P5YCI01
PSYC102 P5YCI02
P5YCI02
P5YCI02 P5YCI02
PSYC102
PSYC20I,P5YC202
& P5YC203
P5YC201
P5YC201
PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYOOI
PSYOOI
SECTION FOUR
Number Subject
PSYC304 Basic Processes 2
PSYC305 Individual Processes
PSY006 Advanced Social
Processes
PSYC307 Advanced Applied Topics
in Psychology I
PSY008 Advanced Applied Topics
in Psychology 2
PSYC309 Topics in Neural Science
PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401
PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402
PSYC403 Psychology 403 PSYC404 Psychology 404
Footnote
Points When
10
10
10
10
10
10 40
40 30 50
S2
52
SI
51
S2
S2
F F F F
ww
4
4
4
4
4
4
12
12 8
16
Prerequisites
1993 PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYC201
PSYC201
See' PSYC401 Consult Dept.
PSYC403
1994
APPROVED SUBJECTS
Corequisites
1993 PSYOOI
PSYOO1
PSYOOI
PSYOOI
PSYOO1
PSYOOI
9 Entry to PSYC401 and PSYC402 in the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) degree requires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining a Credit grade in each of four 300 level subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Additional conditions apply; see the Department for details.
LIST OF OTHER APPROVED SUBJECTS FROM GROUP B
COMPUTER SCIENCE
COMP101 Computer Science I
COMP201 Advanced Data Structures
COMP202 Computer Architecture
COMP203 Assembly Language
20
5
5
5
F
2
COMP204 Programming Language Semantics 5 2
COMP205 System Programming 5
COMP206 Theory of Computation 5
COMP212 Introduction to Programming 5
COMP241 Cognitive Science
COMP299 Project
COMP301 Compiler Design
COMP302 Artificial Intelligence
COMP303 Computer Networks
COMP304 Database Design
10
5
10
10
10
10
2
F
1,2,F I
2
2
COMPIOI orCOMP212
or Graduate
enrolment
COMP203 COMPIOI
orCOMP212
or Graduate
enrolment
COMP205
COMPIOI
orCOMP212
or Graduate
enrolment
COMPlOl
orCOMP212
or Graduate
enrolment
Permission of H.O.D.
COMP2Ol
COMPIOI
orCOMP212
COMP2Olor
Graduate enrolment
COMP2010r
Graduate enrolment
MATH212
MATH212
51
SECfION FOUR APPROVED SUBJEcrs
Number Subject Points When WW Prerequisites Corequisites
1993 1994 1993 COMP305 Algorithm Design and
Analysis 10 COMP201
COMP306 Computer Graphics 10 2 COMP201
MATH216
and either MATH217
orMATH218
COMP307 Software Engineering Principles 10 F** COMP2010r
Graduate enrolment
COMP308 Operating Systems 10 2 COMP201 COMP202
COMP391 Special Topic 1 10 Not in Yr II of BCompSc
1993
* Elective subjects. Not all elective subjects will be available in anyone year. Elective subjects indicated as potentially available may be cancelled if enrolments are insufficient. Availability should be confirmed with the Department Office.
** COMP307 requires attendance at lectures in Semester 1 and completion of a project report in Semester 2.
INFORMATION SCIENCE INF0101 Introduction to
Information Systems
LAW
Compulsory Subjects
10 SI,S2 5
The following subjects are compulsory for candidates enrolled in the combined Bachelor of SciencelBachelor of Laws degree: consult the Faculty of Law Handbook for further details.
LL.B.101 Legal Progress 20
LL.B.102 Criminal Law and Procedure 20
LL.B.201 Torts 20
LL.B.202 Property I 10
LL.B.301 Contracts 20
LL.B.401 Constitutional Law I 10
LL.B.402 Administrative Law I 10
LL.B.403 Equity and Trusts 10
LL.B.404 Civil Procedure 10
LL.B.405 Evidence 10
LL.B.406 Company Law I 10
LL.B.407 Jurisprudence 10
LL.B.408 Professional Conduct 10
PHILOSOPHY
PHIL207 Scientific Knowledge and 10 SI 4
Scientific Method STATISTICS STATIO! Introductory Statistics 10 SI, 5
S2
STATl03 Introductory Mathematical 10 S2 5 Advisory MATHt02
Statistics t and INFOIOI
52
SECTION FOUR
Number Subject Points When WW
STAT2O! Mathematical Statistics· 10 SI 4
STAT202 Regression Analysis 10 S2 4
STAT203 Queues & Simulation 5 SI 2
STAT204 Non-parametric Statistics 5 S2 2
STAT205 Engineering Statistics· 5 SI 2
STAT3O! Statistical Inference 10 SI 3
STAT302 Study Design 10 S2 3
STAT303 Generalized Linear Models 10 SI 3
STAT304 Time Series Analysis 10 S2 3
STAT310 Total Quality Management 10 S2 2 Footnote
Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT20t and STAT205
Credit cannot be obtained for both ST A Tl 01 and STATt 03
Prerequisites
1993 1994 MATH103 or STATIO! &
MATH112 (or equivalent level of Mathematics) STAT20lor
STATIOI &
MATHl12/MATHI02 (or equivalent level of Mathematics) MA TH112/MA THI 02
or equivalent
STAT2010r STATIO! & MATHl12/MATHI02
(or equivalent) MATHl12/MATHI02
STAT201 & MATH201
STAT201 &
STAT202
STAT201 &
STAT202
Advisory ST A T301
STAT201 &
STAT202
Advisory ST A nOt
APPROVED sUBmcrs
Corequisites
1993
STAT204
forBSc degree STAT203
forBSc degree
53
SECTION FIVE
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries Subject outlines and reading lists are set out in a standard fonnat to facilitate easy reference.
An explanation is given below of some of the technical terms used in this Handbook.
1. (a) Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed at a Pass level or betterbefore a candidate enrols in a particular subject.
(b) Where a subject is marked Advisory it refers to a pass in the Higher School Certificate. In such cases lectures will be given on the assumption that a pass has been achieved at the level indicated.
(c) Preparatory subjects are those which candidates are strongly advised to have completed before enrolling in the subject for which the preparatory subject is recommended.
2. Corequisites refer to subjects or topics which the candidate must either pass before enrolling in the particular subject or be taking concurrently.
3. Under examination rules "examination" includes mid-year examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by which the final grade of a candidate in a subject is assessed. Some attempt has been made to indicate for each subject how assessment is determined.
4. TeXIs are books recommended for purchase.
5. References are books relevant to the subject or topic which need not be purchased.
S4
Applied Science and Technology BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT
EAMS/EAMC subjects are available only to candidates enrolled in the Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management degree.
EAMSIOI CONCEPTS OF ECOLOGY lOcp
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Written reports and end of semester examination.
Content
The fundamental concepts of ecology are examined in relation to various natural systems, including dry forests, rainforests, heathlands, lakes, and wetlands. The ecosystem processes of energy flow, nutrient and water cycling, population dynamics, and successional change are studied through both theoretical considerations and relevant field and laboratory investigations.
Text
Kormondy, E.J. 1986, Concepts of Ecology 3rd edn Prentice Hall.
References
Kupchella, C., and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Living wilhin the System of Nature Allyn and Bacon.
Recher, H.F. et al. 1986, A NaJural Legacy Ecology in Australia 2nd edn Pergamon.
EAMSlll SYSTEMS APPROACH IN ECOLOGY Hkp
Prerequisite EAMSlOl.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Written reports and end of semester examination.
SEctION FIVE
Content
Theory of open, cybernetic systems, comprising inputs, changes, outputs and negative feedback mechanisms. Analysis of natural systems in systems terms. Employment of Odum symbols. Calculations of energy flow through both natural and human modified systems. Calculations of partitioning and budgeting of nutrients. Structure and dynamics of ecological communities.
Texl
Kormondy, E.J. 1986, Concepts of Ecology 3rd edn Prentice Hall.
References
Kupchella, c., and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Living within the System of Nature Allyn and Bacon.
Recher, H.F. et al. 1986, A Natural Legacy Ecology in Australia 2nd edn Pergamon.
EAMSI02 MONITORING AND STATISTICS I lOcp
Hours 5 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Final examination.
Content
Cell theory, diversity, Whittakers scheme of classification, microbiology of aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems sampling methods. Bright field, dark field, phase contrast, polarising microscopy and the use of the optical microscope in environmental analysis. Relevant introductory environmental chemistry. There is emphasis on group work and problem solving.
The statistics program runs parallel to the above and reviews basic mathematical analysis, probability. multinomial, binomial theories and patterns of distribution.
Texts
Curtis, H. and Barnes, N. 1985,Invitation to Biology 4th edn Worth.
Pentz, M. and Shott, M. 1988, Handling ExperimenJal Data Open University Press.
References
Willdnson,J.F.1986,AnlnJroductiontoMicrobiology Blackwell.
Kupchella, C. and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Allyn and Bacon.
EAMSIl2 MONITORING AND STATISTICS II lO,p
Prerequisite EAMS 1 02.
Hours 5 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus 2 hour final examination.
Content
An introduction to water qUality and water quality analysis using the concept of a water quality index as a model.
Student groups carry outan analysis of the water quality in alocal stream whilst they develop and refine laboratory skills in water quality analysis. Each group then embarks on a biogeographical study of a small enclosed water body in the Newcastle area
APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Emphasis is placed on scientific method, group dynamics and a continuation of relevant principles in environmental chemistry.
The statistics program runs parallel and deals with tests of significance.
Text
Laidler, G. 1991, Environmental Chemistry Australian Perspective Longman.
Shield, MJ. 1984, Statistics Jacaranda
Reference
Rump, H. and Krist, H. 1988, Laboratory Manual for the examination of water waste and soil VCH.
EAMCI03 CONTEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL PHILOSOPHY lOcp
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Tutorial work and assessment, essay, take-home examination.
Content
The historical foundations of despotic and destructive attitudes toward the natural environment, contemporary responses to the need for an environmental ethic, eg, Stewardship, Animal and Ecological Rights - Liberation, the Land Ethic, Deep Ecology, Eco-feminism, Social Ecology and Eco-anarcrusm, Gaia and other "New Age" environmental philosophies.
References An extensive list of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.
EAMC1l3 ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN VALUES I lOcp
Prerequisite EAMC103.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
ExaminaJion Tutorial assessment, essay, take-home examination.
Content
A. An examination of the major responses from economics to "green" philosophies and science. Responses include; Green Capitalism, Eco-Socialism, Buddhist Economics, Negative Growth Economics, Steady -Stale Economics andEcologically Sustainable Development (ESD).
B. The values that underpin scientific and technological knowledge and achievements. The Philosophy of Science, the social shaping of Science and Technology, Technology and Development.
References An extensive list of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.
EAMSI04 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING AND POLLUTION CONTROL LEGISLATION lOcp
Hours 4 Hours per week lectures, field work and directed reading.
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
SS
SECITON FIVE
Content
This course examines the environmental planning and development oontrol system in NSW and pollution control legislation. 1M emphasis in the course is to understand the system which regulates development and requires environmental studies to be undertaken.
Text
Farrier, D., Enllironmenlal Law Handbook Planning and Land Use in NSW Redfern Legal Centre, 1988.
Reference
Department of Environment and Planning. Manual for En'llironmenlallmpact Assessment 1985.
EAMS1I4 LOCAL AND REGIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES IOcp
Hours 4 Hours per week lectures, field work and directed reading.
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
Conlenl
Case studies of particular local and regional environmental issues including the environmental impact of mining, solid waste disposal, water quality management, industrial development and sewage treatment. Introduction to environmental assessment techniquesandanalysisofreasonsforconflict. Particularattenlion is given to skills in communication.
References
Beder,S.1989,ToxicFishandSewerSurfing Allen and Unwin.
Laidler, G.1991, Environmental Chemistry 2nd ed Longman Cheshire.
EAMS201 AGRICULTURAL SYSTEMS IOcp
PrerequisiJe EAMS101, EAMSl11.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Assignments and final examination.
Content
The effect of human disturbance of natural ecosystems is studied using agriculture as the focus. Systems concepts are further developed using a series of agricultural systems of increasing complexity and energy demand.
Text
Kupchella, C. and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Living within the System of Nature Allyn and Bacon.
References
Wilson, J. 1988, Changing Agriculture. An Introduction to Systems Thinking Kangaroo Press.
Checkland, P. 1981 ~ Systems Thinking, Systems Practice Wiley.
Checkland, P. and Scholes, J. 1990, Soft Systems Methodology in Action Wiley.
EAMS211 INDUSTRIAL AND URBAN SYSTEMS IO<p
Prerequisite EAMSI0l, EAMS111.
56
APPLIED SCIENCE AND lECHNOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Corequisite EAMS201
HOUTS 4 Hours per week for one semester.
ExmninaJion Assignments and final examination.
Conknt
Industrial and urban systems are the focus for further studies of the impact of humans on the natural environment. 1be notion of Human Activity Systems is developed as an approach to the improvement of complex, environmental issues.
Text
KupcheUa, C. and Hyland, M. 1989, Environmental Science Living within the System o/NaJure Allyn and Bacon.
References
Wilson, J. 1988, Changing Agriculture. An Introduction to Systems Thinking Kangaroo Press,
Checkland, P. 1981, Systems Thinking, Systems Practice Wiley.
Checkland, P. and Scholes, 1. 1990, Soft Systems Methodology in Action Wiley.
EAMS202 SYSTEMS DYNAMICS AND DATA ANALYSIS I IOcp
Prerequisite EAMS102, EAMS112.
Hours S Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment and final examination.
Conlenl
This module develops system dynamics theory using Forresters system dynamics language as applied to natural and man made systems. It examines positive and negative feedback control loops, rates, levels, auxiliaries, sources, sinks, information feedback and system boundaries, Models are developed taking account of perspective, reference modes, time horizons and policy choices. Emphasis is placed upon the importance of group work and action research.
Models of a chosen catchment are developed as part of an ongoing catchment management study.
The data analysis program runs parallel. It reviews and further develops tests of significance using the minitab software program.
References
Roberts, N., et al. 1983,Inlrodudion to Computer Simulation A system dynamics modelling approach Addison Wesley.
Ryan, B., et al. 1985. Minitab Handbook 2nd edn PSW Kent
EAMS212 SYSTEM DYNAMICS AND DATA ANALYSIS II IOcp
PrerequisiJe EAMSI02, EAMSI12.
Corequisite EAMS202.
Hours 5 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment and final examination.
Content
Further development of system dynamics models, Introduction to computer modeUing, rate and level equations. Dynamo language.
SECTION FIVE
Data analysis runs parallel and involves computer applications of group developed models and their analysis.
Reference
Roberts, N. et al. 1983,Inlroduclion to computer simulation A system dynamics modelling approach Addison Wesley.
EAMC203 ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN· VALUES II IOcp
PrerequisiJe EAMC103, EAMCI13.
HOUTS 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Tutorial assessment, essay, take·homeexamination.
Conlent
Public policy and environmental issues; eg energy policy, ecologically sustainable development, ethics and a sustainable society, ethics and acceptable risk. ideology and green political thought in the national and international contexts.
References
An extensive set of references for this subject will be given to students at the commencement of the semester.
EAMC213 DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT IOcp
Prerequisites EAMC103, EAMCI13,
Corequisite EAMC203.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Tutorial assessment, essay, take-home examination.
Content
The role of Social Impact Assessment (SIA) in Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), theory and methods of SIA, social variables studies by SIA, Heritage considerations and the National Estate, Cultural values and SIA.
References An extensive set of references for this subject will be given to students at the commencement of the semester.
EAMS290 HYDROLOGY AND SOILS ANALYSIS
Prerequisites EAMSI02, EAMS112.
IOcp
Hours 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and directed reading.
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
Contenl
Basic components of the hydrologic cycle and soil classification and identification. Topics include rainfall/runeff analysis (RATIONAL method), soil moisture and permeability, interception, flood analysis, solute mixing, pollutant loading, instrumentation and small catchment hydrology.
References
Dunne, T. and Leopold, L. 1978, WalerinEnvironnumtaJPlanning Freeman.
Institution of Engineers, 1987, Australian Rainfall and Runoff lEA.
APPLIED SCIENCE AND lECHNOLOOY SUBJECT DlOSCRIPTIONS
McDonald, R.C. Isbell, R.F.,et al. 1990, Australian Soil and Survey, Field Handbook, 2nd edn Inkata Press.
EAMS291 WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT
PrereqllisiJes EAMSI02, EAMS112.
Corequisite EAMS290.
likP
HOUTS 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and directed ruding.
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
Contenl
Examination of many of the majorenviroruneruaJ. issues associated with water resources development. Topics covered include reseIVoir and catchment management, wateruse, entrophication, thermal stratification of storages, floodplain management, irrigation/salinisalion and wastewater disposal to land and water bodies.
References
Petts, G.E. 1984, Impounded Rivers Perspective/or Ecological Management 10hn Wiley,
Pigram,l,]. 1986, Issues in the Management of Australia's Water Resources Longman Cheshire.
Carter, L. 1986, Environmental Impact of Water Resources Projects Lewis Publishers.
EAMS292 PLANT SYSTEMATICS AND PLANT ECOLOGY IOcp
Prerequisites EAMSI01, EAMSll1.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Assignments,laboralOIy and field reports, andfinal examination.
ContenJ
A study of botanical concepts and principles with particular emphasis upon Australian species and ecosystems, Students will acquire skills in plant identification and classification. Physiological processes and evolutionary adaptations will be studied along with checklists, distributions, and plant associations reflecting environmental factors. Current theories in plant ecology will be examined.
TexI To be advised.
Reference
Beadle, N.C.W. Evans et al., 1981, Flora oflhe SydfU!yRegion 2nd edn A.H. & A.W. Reed.
EAMS293 ANIMAL SYSTEMATICS AND ANIMAL ECOLOGY IOcp
Prerequisites EAMSI0l, EAMS111.
Corequisite EAMS292.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Assignments, laboratory and field reports and final examination.
57
SECfION FIVE
Content
A study of the systematics, evolution, ecology and distribution of the Australianfauna. Theidentificalion of Australian vertebrates to at least the level of sub·class or order. Diagnostic structures such as skeletal and dental features will be studied along with trapping and tagging techniques to estimate population size and distribution. Terrestrial and aquatic systems will beexamined for life histories and ecological relationships.
Text To be advised.
EAMS301 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT I
Prerequisites EAMS201, EAMS211.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
10 cp
Examination Assignments, field reports and final examination.
Conlenl
The skills, attitudes and knowledge needed for environmental management practices will be developed through experiential and team learning strategies. The economics of the ecologically sustainable utilisation of natural resources will be a prime focus. Management practices in AustraJia and selected foreign countries will be studied.
Text To be advised.
References
IUCN. WWF, and UNEP, 1991, Caring for tM Earth United Nations Environment Program.
World Commission on Environment and Development Our Common Future The Brnndtland Report.
UNEP, 1987.
Dorney, L.C, 1987 , TM Professional Practice of Environmental Managemenl Springer-Verlag.
EAMS311 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT II IOcp
Prerequisites EAMS201, EAMS211.
Corequisite EAMS301.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Assignments, field reports and final examination.
Content
The principles of land management and people management will be explored in relation to the impact of developments in Australia Restoration and rehabilitation techniques and practices will be studied in conjunction with cost/benefit analysis and the maintenance of biological diversity, freshwater, soil and marine resources.
Text To be advised.
References
IUCN, WWF, and UNEP, 1991, Caring for the Earth United Nations Environment Program.
World Commission on Environment and Development Our Common Future The Brundtland Report, UNEP, 1987.
58
APPLIED SCIENCE AND lECHNOLOOY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Dorney, L,C. 1987, The Professional Practice ofEnvironmenlal MantJgement Springer-Verlag.
EAMS301 SPECIALIST STUDY
Prerequisite All prescribed l..evel200 subjects,
20cp
Hours 4 Hours per week (minimum) for one year.
Examination Maintenance of log book, performance at viva. and submission of final report.
ConJenl
The student is assigned to a co-operating host organisation and placed in a problem solving orteam situation to study an issue or set of issues currently being addressed by that organisation, The student will report on the structure and functions of the host organisation and on progress made towards the resolution of the particular issue(s) under study.
References lists will be provided by the student's supervisor and by the host organisation.
EAMS304 REGIONAL AND NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES IOcp
Prerequisites EAMSI04, EAMSI14.
Hours 4 Hours per week, field work and directed reading.
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
Content
This course examines case studies of regional and national environmental issues which highlight the major types of environmental assessment. The Commonwealth environmental legislation and environmental law are also covered.
Reference
Thomas, I. 1987. Environmental Impact Assessment Australian Perspectives and Practice Monash University.
EAMS314 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT IOcp
Prerequisites EAMS104. EAMSI14.
Hours 4 Hours per week, field work and directed reading.
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
Content
This course covers the rationale and methodology of environmental impact assessment (ElA). Also covered areimpact assessment techniques in the practice, the role of International Aid agencies, current developments in environmental management, environmental audits and risk analysis.
Texts
Walhem, P. (ed). 1988, EnvironmentallmpactAssessmentTMory and Practice Unwin Hyman.
Beder, S. (ed), 1990, Environmental Impact StatemenlsSelected Readings Sydney University.
Reference
Buckley, R. 1991 ,A Handbookfor EnvironmentalAudit AIDAB.
SECfION FIVE
EAMS390 SOIL CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT 10 cp
Prerequisites EAMS290, EAMS291.
HOUTS 4 Houn per week lectures and practicals, field work and directed reading,
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
Contenl
Examination of soils,land use and conservation. particularly in relation to soils of NSW, Soil and water management principles for various types of land use including urban development. Practical analysis of control structures, sizing and prediction. Use of soils for domestic and industrial wastewater disposal and site rehabilitation.
Text
Channan, P,E.V. and Murphy, B. W. 1991 ,Soils Their Properties and Management Sydney University Press.
Reference
McDonald, R.C. Isbell, R.F. et all990, Australian Soil and Land Survey, Field Handbook, 2nd edn Inkata Press.
EAMS391 WATER AND SOILS APPLICATIONS AND MODELLING IOcp
Prerequisites EAMS290 EAMS291.
Corequisite EAMS390.
Hours 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and directed readings,
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
Content
The use and application of micro-computers to model water balances, runoff, stormwater quality, non-point source pollution and soil erosion. Specific examination of practical applications using POLLUTE, SOILOSS (USLE), ANSWERS, CREAMS, OPT and other soft ware models to simulate hydrologic processes and water quality and pollutant variables.
References
Lal,R. (ed) 1988, Soil ErosionResearchMethods Soil and Water Conservation Societ.
Various software manuals.
EAMS391 FLORA COMPONENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT IOcp
Prerequisites EAMS292, EAMS293.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Assignments, field reports, and f'mal examination
Content
A study of the skills and knowledge required for competence in the compilation of vegetation surveys in connection with environmental impact studies and plans of management in connection with both development projects and the conservation and management of natural ecosystems. The use of relevant field
APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
techniques of transect studies, species composition analyses, and assessment of physical and chemical factors will be studied.
References
Groves, R.H. (ed) 1981, Australian Vegetalion Cambridge University Pres.
Australian Surveying and Land Infonnation Group (AUSUG). 1990,AtlasofAustralianResourcesVol6VegetaiionGovemment Printer, Canberr.
EAMS393 FAUNA COMPONENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT IOcp
Prerequisite EAMS292, EAMS293.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Content
A study of the assessment of the faunal factor in environmental impact studies and plans of management. Fluctuations in animal populations due to various factors such as season, drought, fire and developmental impact will be studied.
References
Reader's Digest 1988, Complete Book of Australian Birds Reader's Digest Services, Ply Ltd.
Strahan, R. (ed) 1983, Complete Book of Australian Mammals Angus and Robertson.
Kennedy. M. (ed) 1990,Australia' s Endangered Species, Simon Schuste.
EAMC303 OCCUPATIONAL HYGIENE AND TOXICOLOGY IOcp
Prerequisites EAMC203, EAMC213 or equivalent.
Hours 2 hours per week for one year.
Examination Two major written assisgnments and an examination at the end of each semester.
Content
A study of human organ systems and the nature of environmental pollutants and theiradverseeffects on human health. TIlis subject also studies hazard identification, hygiene standards and the control of environmental conditions in the workplace. Visits to industrial sites are undertaken together with practice in the use of monitoring and protective devices.
Text
Harrington, J .M. and Gill, F.S. 1987, OccupationalHealLhPoc/cet Consultant, 2nd edn, Blackwell Scientific Publications,
References
An extensive list of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.
EAMC3I3 THE SOCIAL ASPECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH IOcp
Prerequisites EAMC203, EAMC213.
Corequisile EAMC303
59
SECfION FIVE
Hours 2 hours per week for one semester.
Exanu:nation Tutorial assessment, essay, take·home examination.
ConlenJ
The social origins of disease, case studies and history, social forms of disease conteol, eg the sanitation movement, lifestyle related disease, standards of living and health, environmental degradation and health, ecologically sustainable development and health, the social construction of health related terminology, eg 'risk' ,risk .tak:ing and risk ·imposition, health protection policy, justice and the political economy of health at national and international levels.
References
An extensive list of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.
60
AVIATION SUBlECf DESCRIPTIONS
Aviation SUbject Descriptions A VIA subjects areavailable only tocandldatesenrolled Intbe Bachelor of Science (Aviation) degree
100 Level Aviation Syllabus
The aviation syllabus is based upon four broad areas of study:
1 Aeronautical Engineering (aerodynamics, engines, systems and design);
2 Aviation Science (meteorology and navigation);
3 Human Factors (aviation psychology, medicine, and ergonomics);
4 Aviation Management (aviation law, administration, and computer applications).
The syllabus has a spiral design with a broad foundation in first year proceeding to in-depth and more individualised study in the third year. The project in third yearis designed as background to pursue a postgraduate Bachellro of Science (Aviation) Honours program. Group or individual projects are problem·based and requ~ stu4z"ts to gain industry experience to link theory and praCllce.
The sequence and scheduling of aviation subjects is determined by the needs of integration with flight training and commercial pilot licensing over the first two years of the degree.
AVIAI09 INTRODUCTORY METEOROLOGY s.:p
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination.
Content
Introduction to atmospheric pressure, wind, humidity, thermodynamics, cloud, precipitation and icing; Structure of the atmosphere; Introduction 10 A vialion forecasts and meteorological reports.
Texl
P.P.L Meteorology
Bureau of Meteorology ,Manual of Meteorology Part I, General Meteorology, Part 2 Aviation Meteorology.
AVIAlIO INTRODUCTORY NAVIGATION Scp
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
ExaminaJion Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour examination.
COnlent
Practical methods of pilot navigation flight planning. The theoretical aspects of navigation; the fonn of the earth; map projections, scale and scale variation, confonnality; navigational astronomy; the vector triangle and its solution by plotting and by computing; flight and navigational instruments, theoretical aspects, accuracy, errors and use.
T"", Aeronautical Information Publication (CAA).
SECfION FIVE
AVIAIlI INTRODUCTORY AERODYNAMICS Scp
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus examination.
Content
Basicfluid mechanics of an incompressible flow • Reynold's No., Bernoulli's equation. The genera1ion of lift, drag,.induced drag, lift·augmentation devices, downwash and wake turbulence. Properties of aerofoils, three dimensional effects on section characteristics. Aerodynamic factors influencing aircraft performance drag index, IJD ratios, configuration and altitude effects, climb and descent.
References
Anderson, 1.D.1989, Introduction to Flighl 3rd edn McGrawHill.
Shevell, R.S. 1987, Funckunentals of Flighl 2nd edn PrenticeHall.
Dole, C.E. 1988, Flighl Theory for Pilots 2nd ed.
Thorn, T. Basic Aeronautical Knowledge Aviation Theory Centre.
AVIA1I2 INTRODUCTORY HUMAN FACTORS IOcp
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment based on class tests, seminars, assignments and a 2 hour examination.
Content
Information processing; vision/balance; spatial disorientation; perception; memory; decision making; motor control.
Texl
Trollip,S. &1ensen, R.1991,HumanFactorsforGeneraIAviation.
Reference
Green, R. 1991, Human Factors for Pilots.
A VIAIl3 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE AND SYSTEMS 5cp
Hours 3 Hours lecture and 2 Hours tutorial a week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus a final examination.
Conten!
(a) Principles of operation of aircraft fuel, hydraulicand electrical systems, undercaniageand flight controls. The application of mechanical linkages, and electrical circuits to these systems. Basic circuit theory.
(b) Aircraft weight and balance, performance and structural weight limitations, determination of take-off and landing weight and centre of gravity, aerodynamics reasons of centre of gravity limitations, use of aircraft loading systems (mathematical and graphical approaches), adjustment of weight and centre of gravity, regulatory requirements.
(c) International Standard Atmosphere, factors affecting aircraft penonnance, use of performance charts for take·off and landing, limitations and safety considerations, regulations and requirements for Authorised Landing Areas.
AVIATION SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Texts
Civil Aviation Regulalions (CAA).
Civil Aviation Orders 20-99.
Aeronautical Information Publicatwn (CAA).
Thom, T.BasicAeronautical Knowledge Aviation Theory Centre.
A VIAIl4 FLIGHT RULES AND PROCEDURES s.:p
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examinmion Progressive assessment plus a fmal examination.
Content
Overview of International aviation regulation. Australian Civil Aviation Regulations and Orders governing aircrew procedures and the airworthiness of aircraft and their design standards. Aircrew licensing requirements, Air Traffic Control procedures and pilot's airworthiness responsibilities. The course introduces CAA requirements to the level of the Private Pilot licence and addresses the international and local regulations of aviation activities.
Texts
Civil Aviation Regulations (CAA).
Civil Aviation Orders 20-99,100.101,104, (CAA).
Enroute Supplement - Australia (CAA).
Aeronauticallnformmion Publication (CAA).
Aerodrome Diagrams (CAA).
A VIA115 RECIPROCATING ENGINES
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Scp
Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments plus end of semester examination.
Conten!
Air standard thennodynamic cycles, two and four stroke cycles, petrol and diesel engines, construction features, induction, lu brication and cooling, engine instrumentation, effect of altitude and mixture on combustion, power output, aircraft engine operation, turbo/superchargers, thermodynamic efficiency, vibrations and balancing.
Text
Bent, R.D. & McIGnJey, J.L. 1985, Aircraft Powerplants, 5th edn, McGraw-Hili.
A VIA116 COMMERCIAL METEOROLOGY Scp
Prerequisite AVIAI09.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments, tutorials, seminars, and a 2 hour final examination.
Content
Atmospheric pressure; wind, humidity and thermodynamics; c1oud, precipitation and i clog; orographic effects; thunderstorms; tropical meteorology; synoptic situations and fronts;jet streams.
Hazardous weather windshear, microbursts and macrobursts.
61
SEcrION FIVE
Text
Manual of Meteorology Parts 1 and 2 (A.G.P.S.).
AVIA117 NAVIGATION Scp
Prerequ~ile A VlAllO.
HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments, tutorials presenta1ions and a 2 hour final examination.
Content
Theoretical aspects of Rhumb line navigation. The development of pilot navigation techniques from air plot and track plot meUtods. The development of metal DR and of orientation systems. Pilot navigation radio aids. Their basic principles, signal propagation, use, errors.
Flight planning for twin piston engined aircraft. The point of no return and critical point.
Text
AeronaUlicallnformo.tion Publication (CAA).
A VlA118 AERODYNAMICS Scp
Prerequisite A VIA 111.
HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment based on laboratory reports and assignments plus a final examination.
ConJent
Aircraft stability and control; longitudinal and lateral stability, aerodynamic coupling, CG effects on stability, gyroscopic coupling; effect of aircraft configuration on stability, wing sweep, dihedral, canards. Aerofoil characteristics. Boundary layer· laminar and turbulent and transition. Wind Tunnel experiments. Incompressible fluid dynamics. Vorticity. Propeller analysis blade element and disc Uteories, propeller efficiency and sizing, constant speed units.
References
Shevell, R.S. 1989, Fundamentals of Flight, 2nd edn, Hall.
Houghton, E.L. and Canuthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamicsfor Engineering Students Arnold.
AVIA119 AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY AND MEDICINE
Prerequisite AVIAI12.
HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Scp
Examination Progressive assessment based on class tests, assignments, tutorials and a 2 hour examination.
ContenJ
Medicine altitude, atmosphere and respiration; acceleration, vision, hearing, air sickness; health, drugs; first aid, pilot fitness; fatigue;
Psychology attention, workload, stress, personality, communications.
62
AVIATION SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS
Texis
O'Hare. D. and Roscoe, S. 1990, FlighldeckPerformance-The Human Factor, Iowa U.P.
References
Harding & Mills. 1988, Aviation Medicine, British Medical Associalion,.London.
A VIAl20 A VIA TlON LAW, COMMERCIAL FLIGHT RULES & PROCEDURES lOcp
Prerequisite AVIA114.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination on Part A and a 3 hour final examination on Part B.
Content
Part A The origins of Law in Australia; Legal Institutions in Australia; Constitution; Tort (Negligence); Criminal Law; Contract (Hire & Insurance); Criminal Law; Deregulation of the Aviation Industry; International Conventions; Administrative Law;
Part B Australian Civil Aviation Regulations and Orders governing aircrew licensing and procedures to the level of Commercial Pilot Licence.
Texts
Civil Aviation Regulations (CAA).
Civil Aviation Orders 20-99,100, (CAA).
AVIA121 AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS AND PROPULSION
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Scp
Examination Assessment based on assignments and laboratory reports plus a final examination.
Content
Hydraulic and mechanical systems on aircraft, air conditioning and pressurisation including thermodynamics, ice protection and fire systems, under caniage and flight controls. Electrical systems, analo gdevices, basic circuit anal ysis using Kirchoff and Thevenin methods, tuning circuits, filters. Introduction to database and spreadsheet software
References
Smith, RJ. 1987, Electronics Circuits and Devices Wile.
Pallet, Aircraft Electrical Systems.
Lombardo, D.A. 1988, Aircraft Systems- Understanding Your Aeroplane TAB.
Basic Functional Devices and Systems (CAA).
A VIA123 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE AND LOADING Scp
Prerequisite AVIA113.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus a fmal examination.
SEcrION FIVE
Content
(a) Mean Aerodynamic Chord; advanced use of loading charts; adjustment of weight and centre of gravity.
(b) Multi·engine operations and performance consideIations~ use of take-off enToute; and landing performance charts for single and multi·engine aircraft, knowledge of Ute perfonnance and operation of Ute Echo MK IV aeroplane. .
Texts
Civil Aviation Regulations (CAA).
Civil Aviation Orders 20-99 (CAA).
Aeronaulicallnformation Publication (CAA).
Abridged Performance and Operation Manualfor Echo Mk IV.
AVIA207 AVIATION METEOROLOGY Scp
Prerequisite A VIA116.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination.
ContenJ
Operational meteorology, tropical meteorology, complex. thennodynamics, micro and meso·sca1e winds, surface synoptic charts, dynamics of lows and highs, visibility, fog, hazardous weather analysis.
Text
Bureau of Meteorology, Manual of Meteorology Parts 1 and 2
Department of Aviation Meteorology Handbook
A VIA208 INSTRUMENT NA VIGA T[ON Scp
Prerequisite A VIA 117.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination.
Content
Radio Navigation Systems and Aids; Radio Navigation teclutiques using conventional aids; ADF/NDB, VOR, DME, U.s, Right Director, Radar; Principles and errors of radio and radar aids.
Instrument Flight Procedures, Airspace, and Air Traffic Control; Departure Procedures; Enroute Procedures; Holding Procedures; Instrument Approach Procedures; Emergency Procedures; IFR Right Planning
Texts
Enroute Charts (CAA).
Departure and Approach Procedures (CAA).
Tenninal Area Charts.
CAO's.
Enroute supplement.
A.J.P.'s.
A VIA nON SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS
Reference
Heel, S. 1992, Instrument Rating Course, Action Aviation Supplies.
Thorn, T.lnslrumenl Rating Manual, Vol. 1 & 2 Aviation Theory Centre.
A VIA209 LONG RANGE NA VIGA TlON Scp
Prerequisite A VIA 117.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plUS a 2 hour final examination.
Conlent
The construction properties and use of orthomorphic charts suitable for long range navigation. The calculation of great circle tracks and distances. Grid navigation; navigation in polar regions; navigation on the climb and descent~ high speed/high altitude navigation including the use of radio aids and area navigation systems; weather radar; inertial navigation systems; operational problems including the use of off track alternates; searches.
Text To be advised.
AVIA210 COMPRESSIBLE AERODYNAMICS Scp
Prerequisite A VIA 118.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment, tutorials plus a final examination.
Content
Thennodynamics of a compressible perfect gas, effects of compressibility on lift, Prandtl·Glauert equation, critical mach number, shock stall and drag of vergence. Supersonic and transonic aerofoils and wings, wave drag, area ruling.
Vortex lift at low speeds from delta wings and strakes.
References
Houghton, E.L. & Carruthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for Engineering Students, 3rd edn, Arnold.
Shevell, R.S. 1989, Fundamentals of Right, 2nd edn, Prentice· Hall.
McCormick, B.W. Aerodynamics, Aeronautics and Flight Mechanics.
AVIA211 JET ENGINES Scp
Prerequisite 60 credit points A VIAl00 level
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester plus field trip.
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
ContenJ
Characteristics of gas turbine engines and basic thermodynamic analysis, requirements for combustion, fuel specifications, combustion chambers, turbines, compresor design features, materials employed in aviation gas turbines, turbo·jets, turbofans, turbo-props, ramjets, requirements for supersonic intake and nozzle designs, developments in transonic, supersonic and
63
SECfION FIVE
hypersonic propulsion systems. Jet and Turbo-prop operations with application to in-service aircraft engines.
TexJ
Gas Turbine Powerplants and Their Maintenance on Aircraft (1987 AGPS-DTC-CAA Main! TexJ 6).
Reference
Rolls Royce, 1986, The Jet Engine, 4th edn, Derby, Rolls Royce.
A VIA212 HUMAN FACTORS lOcp
Prerequisite AVIA119.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2hourexamination.
Content
Ergonomics; displays; aircraft concrol; automation; simulation; training; stress/arousal; flight phobia; fatigue.
Text
Weiner, E.L & Nagel, P. 1988, Human Factors in Aviation, Academic Press.
Reference
O'Hare, D., & Roscoe, S. 1990, Flightdeck Performance- The Human Factor, Iowa U.P.
A VIA213 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES AND MATERIALS Scp
Prerequisite 60 credit point A VIA 1 00 level
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and lab reports plus examination
Content
Properties of materials commonly used in aircraft construction and typical fabrication methods. Loads applied to aircraft structures, the Manoeuvre Fnvelope, Gust Loads.
Material stress and strain, strength and ductility. Introduction to Metallurgy. Metal corrosion and methods employed in protection. Intnxluction to sandwich and fibre -matrix composite structures.
References
Shigley, J.E. 1985, Mechanical Engineering Design Metric edn McGraw-Hill.
Dole, C.E. Fundamentals of Aircraft Material Factors, Aviation Books.
AC 43.13 Acceptable Metlwds, Techniquuand Practices FAA/ lAP
US FAR 23 FAA Regulatory Data
A VIA214 JET AIRCRAFT FLIGHT PLANNING lOcp
Prerequisite A VIA 117
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment and a 2 hour final examination.
64
A VIA nON SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Content
This course provides the core component of the study of flight planning, bringing together jet aircraft performance; safety requirements; legal requirements; the economics of aircraft operation; the route structure. 1be requirements for all stages of the flight, (including emergency operations) are considered and evaluated
TexJ
8727 Performance Manual CAA.
References
Jet Transport Operations and Performance.
Manuals - as available.
A VIA218 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE
PrerequisiJe A VIA 123.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Scp
Examination Progressive assessment plus a final examination.
Content
Application of knowledge and skills gained in principles of flight; engines, systems, and instrumentation; aircraft perfonnance and operations; navigation; meteorology; and flight rules and procedures to the operation of charter flights in multi-engine aeroplanes.
a) Concepts and considerations which are distinctive to multiengine flight.
b) Determining the performance that can be expected following an engine failure and explaining the aerodynamic factors and piloting techniques involved with single-engine flight
c) Fuel requirements, fuel planning for holding or alternate requirements, fuel planning for multi-stage flights, finding the minimum or maximum fuel.
d) Determining the maximum take-off weight, esablishing a performance limited or landing weight, finding the maximum payload, picking up or dropping off weight at intennedia1e landing points.
e) Weight and Balance, adding weight while keeping the centre of gravity constant, shifting weight to place the C of G on forward or aft limits.
o Right planning and operations requirements, critical point, planning for alternate and/or holding requirements, use of flow charts.
g) Overwater flying. mountain flying and float flying.
Texts
Civil Aviation Regulations and Civil Aviation Orders 20-99.
Aeronautical Information Publication.
Abridged Performance and Operation Manual for Echo Mk N.
Different Twin Engine Aircraft Pilot Operating Handbooks.
SECIION FIVE
AVIA219 HIGH ALTITUDE METEOROLOGY AND FORECASTING Scp
Prerequisite A VIA207.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination.
Content
Upper air meteorology ,jet streams, c1earairturbulence, complex flows, thermal winds, wind shear, forecasting using radar, use of satellites, forecasting meso-scale phenomena
Text To be advised.
AVIA220 AIRCRAFT FATIGUE MANAGEMENT Scp
Prerequisite A VIA213.
Hours 3 Hours a week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.
Content
Concepts of safe life, fail safe and damage tolerance. The mechanism offatigue; stress concentration, dynamic load spectra, crack propagation, fatigue life determination,limitations offatigue test methods, non-destructive inspection techniques, damage tolerance ratings, certification requirements. aircraft structural inspection programmes, managing the "aging aircraft" fleet. Static structural overload: column and sheet instabilities. Failures in composites.
References
Shigley I.E. 1985, Mechanical Engineering Design metric edn McGraw Hill.
1991, Structural Integrity of Aging Airplanes Springer Verla
AVIA221 HUMAN PERFORMANCE IN MULTI-CREW OPERATIONS
Prerequisite A VIA212.
Hours 3 Hours for one semester.
Scp
Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, exercises (including demonstrated instruction), assignments and a final examination.
Content
Personality; communications; group processes; leadership; cabin safety.
Text
Wiener E.L.. & Nagel D.C. 1988, Hwnan Factors in Aviation Academic Pres.
AVIA222 MANAGEMENT OF AVIATION Scp
Prerequisite A VIA 120.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars. projects, exercises, plus a final examination.
A VIA TION SUBIECI DESCRIPTIONS
Content
Management of a charter airline operation. Industrial Relations. Financial Management, HumanResourceManagement Industrial safety including legal requirements and management responsibilities. Airworthiness regulatory requirements for the establishment and operation of organisations involved in various aviation activities.
References
CAO's 80 and 82. 100 - 104 series (CAA).
CAR's (CAA).
AVIA223 AVIATION COMPUTING AND ELECTRONICS
Prerequisite AVIA121.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Scp
Examination Progressive assessment plus a final examination.
Content
Amplification and switching circuits using p-n jooctions. Boolean logic,logic gates, TTL and CMOS logic devices, multiplexers, comparators, analog-digital convertors, computer architecture, interfacing standards. The application of electronic circuits and computers in the control of aircraft systems; an oveIView of the glass COCkpit. Transducers; the application of electronic circuits and computers in data acquisition and the control of servo devices.
References
Smith, R J. 1987, Electronics Circuits and Devices, 2nd edn, Wiley.
Lancaster, 0.1989, TTL Cookbook Howard Sams.
1987, United Airlines Avionics Fundamentals IA.
Mitchell, Introduction to Electronics Design.
A VIA30S AIRCRAFT DESIGN
Prerequisite AVIA213
Corequisite AVIA318
I/OUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester
Scp
Examination Progressive assessment based on individual and syndicate tasks plus final examination.
Content
Parametric design of aircraft, performance estimation, power requirements, international design standards, market feasibility studies, aircraft development case studies. The syllabus addresses the various roles Lbe professional pilot may play in the multidisciplinary process of aircraft design and development.
References
Civil Aviation Orders 101, 103, 108 series
Stinton, D. 1985, The Design of the Aeroplane Collin.
Raymer D.P. 1989, Aircraft Design: A Conceptual Approach AlA.
65
SECfION FIVE
A VIA306 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS
PrerequisiJe A VIA214.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
10cp
Examination Progressive assessment by class tests, tutorial presentations and assignments.
Content
Standard and computerized flight planning. The evaluation of aircraft types for particular types of operation. The development of operational procedures and policy.
Text To be advised.
References
Performance Manuals and Right Planning Oataor CUrrent Aircraft Types.
AVIA308 AVIATION INSTRUCTION 10cp
Prerequisile 60 credit points A VIA200 level
Hours 4 Hours lecture and 2 Hours tutorial a week for semester one.
Examination Progressive evaluation based on seminar preparation and presentation, practice teaching. assignments andexaminations.
Content
The psychology ofleaming. instructional methods, evaluation of instruction and leaming,lesson planning, use and preparation of teaching aids. Teaching in the aviation environment.
Texls
Telfer, R. and Biggs 1. 1988, The Psyclwlogy of Flight Training Iowa State University Press.
1988. eAA FlighJ Instructor's Manual CAA,.
References
Cole, P & Chan, L. 1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall.
Cooper, J.M. et al199O, Classroom Teaching Skills, Heath.
A VIA310 ADVANCED NA VIGA TlON IOcp
Prerequisites AVIA209.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment by class tests, tutorials, presentations and assignments.
Content
This course covers the spectrum of navigation aids, methods and systems, past, present and projected. The mathematical and physical basis of navigation and navaids. System accuracy and reliability requirements.
Text To be advised
References
Janes Avionics 1989 -1990.
Manufacturers Technical and Operating Manuals.
66
A VIA TION SUBlECf DESCRIPTIONS
AVIAJII ADVANCED AVIATION INSTRUCTION
Prerequisite A V1A308.
10cp
Hours 4 Hours of lectures and 2 Hours of tutorials a week in semester two.
ExaminationProgressiveassessmentbasedonseminarpreparation and presentations, practice teaching, assignments and examination.
Content
Inslructional design, problem-based learning, computers in instruction, simulation, training environments, student stress and training, aircrew perfonnance assessment.
Text to be advised.
References
Cole, P. and Chan, L.1989. TMching Principles and Practice Prentice Hall.
Cooper, J.M. et al. 1990, Classroom Teaching Skills, Heath.
A VIA312 APPLIED AERODYNAMICS 5cp
Prerequisites A VIA318, A VIA223
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination
Conlent
a) flight simulation using analog and digital computezs, modelling stability and control characteristics from flight lest data. simulator fidelity, aircraft flight control computers.
b) The use of computers in predicting aerodynamic peIformance; comparison of computer predictions with wind tunnel results. modelling real aircraft effects including boundary layers, and compressibility.
References
Elkin, B. 1982, Dynamics of FlighJ ,Wil.
HOUghton, E.L. & Canuthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for Engineering Students 3rd edn Arnol.
Katz,J. and Plotkin, A. 1990, Low Speed Aerodynamics McGraw Hill.
Nelson. R.C. Flight Stability and AUZomatic Control
AVIA314 DIRECTED STUDY 10cp
Prerequisites Atleasl two of the following: A VIA306,A VIA308. A VIA310, AVIA318
Hours 4 Hours per week in semester two.
Examination Satisfactory completion of project.
Conlent
This subject is designed for students interested in developing a specialist topic under the supervision of alecturer. The approval of the lecturer and Year III co-ordinator is required.
A detailed proposal indicating objective(s) and workplan are to be submitted by the end of semester one. The resultant project should represent the allocation of four Hours per week for the
SECfION FlVE
second semester, and is due on the first week of the examination period at the end of the semester.
Text To be advised.
A VlAJlS ADVANCED AVIATION MANAGEMENT 5cp
Prerequisite A VIA222.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, assignments and final project.
Content
Students will be assigned to groups of four which will be responsible for the production of a group report on an aviation management topic to be decided in consultation.
AVIA316 FLIGHT DECK PERFORMANCE 5cp
Prerequisite A VIA221.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment and final exam.
Content
Systems theory in aviation; selection and testing of pilots; human factors research methods; accident investigation.
Text
Flightdeck Performance: Course Resource Materials
AVIA317 AVIATION CLIMATOLOGY Scp
Prerequisite A VIA207.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination.
Content
Comparative urban and regional climatology. Implication for international flight planning and flying. Localised hazardous climates Europe; North America; the Atlantic routes; polar routes; Asia and the Pacific.
Text To be advised.
A VIA318 AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND CONTROL Scp
Prerequisite A VIA 118
Hours 3 Hours per week
Aircraft stability and control. aerodynamic couplir:.g, stick fixed / free longitudinal static stability. neutral point, cg margin. static margin, lateral and directional stability. configuration effects, control surface sizing. Introduction to Aeroelasticity.
References
Houghton. E.L. & Carruthers. N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for Engineering Students, 3rd edn, Arnol.
Stinton. D. 1985, The Design of 1M Aeroplane Collin.
AVIATION SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
AVIAJ20 AVIATION INSTRUCTION PRACTICUM I 5cp
Corequisile A VIA 308
Hours 2 Hours per week
Examinations Progressive assessment based on seminars, preparation and presentation of lesson plans.
The purpose of the practicum is to enable prospective flight instructors to apply their knowledge of learning and teaching principles to the preparation of lessons plans adapted to the flight training environment. Italsoaimstoprovidenewflightinstructors with the basis of future development in the practice and theory of aviation education.
A problem-based approach will be used, through small group discussion and team teaching, to examine the teaching practices and problems encountered in flight instruction. Special emphasis will be placedon teaching in a non-traditional and oftenthreatening environment.
Texls
Telfer, R & Biggs, J. 1988. The Psychology of Flighl Training, Iowa Slate University Press.
Civil Aviation Aurhorily 1988. FlighJ Ins/ruc/or's Manual.
References
Cole, P. & Chan, L. 1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall.
Cooper, J.M. et al. 1990. Classroom Teaching Skills. Heath.
Turney, C. et aI. 1976, Sydney Micro Skills. Teaching SkiUs Developmenl Project, Sydney University Press.
AVIA321 AVIATION INSTRUCTION PRACTICUM II
Prerequisites AVIA308
Corequisite AVIA 311, A VIA320
Hours 2 Hours per week
s cp
Examinations Progressive assessment based on seminars, presentations, and practice teaching.
Conlent
The purpose of the practicum is to enable prospective flight instructors to practice their teaching skills and apply their knowledge of learning and teaching principles in the flight training environment under the supervision of practising flight instructors and university supervisors.
The practicum will offer demonstrations by practisinginstruClors, followed by discussions, and supervised practical teaching experience for the students. It offers practical links for the academic components of the aviation instruction courses and provides the opportunity to integrate the knowledge gained to the aviation instruction context. It will expose student instructors to the variety and complexity of working in the flight training environment and allows them to gain professional experience and development.
67
SECfION FIVE
Tuls
Telfer, R & Biggs, J. 1988, TM Psychology ofFlighi Training, Iowa State University Press.
Cillil AlIialionAUlhority. 1988, Flighllnstructor's Manual.
References
Cole, P. & Chan, L. '1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall.
Cooper, J.M. et aI. 1990, Classroom Teacmng Skills, Heath.
Tumey, C. et aI. 1976, Sydney Micro Skills, Teaching Skills Dellelopment Project, Sydney University Press.
68
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Biological Sciences Subject Descriptions
BIOLlOI PLANT & ANIMAL BIOLOGY IOcp
Prerequisites Nil - see notes on BIOLlOl under "Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty".
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
ExaminaJion One 3 hour paper.
Content
The course is organised into 2 units.
Unit 1
Plant Diversity - Form and Function.
Theme Structural specialization to facilitate efficient functional capacity.
Topics
The major plant groups and their life cycles. Higher plant structure and function. Plant development. Plant diversity as a consequence of adaptation forsuIVival in a range of environments.
Unit2
Animal Diversity - Form and Function
Theme The variety of structural and functional adaptations which have allowed ani mals to exploit the wide range of available environments.
Topics
The Animal Phyla - organisation of tissues and organs, body plans, body cavities, patterns of development.
Animal Function - digestion, circulation, respiration, integration and control, homeostasis, reproduction and development.
TexlS
Villee, C.A., Solomon, H.P. et al.1989, "Biology" 2nd edn, Saunders College Publishing, Philadelphia/Sydney.
or
Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. 1986, Biological Science, 4th edn, Norton.
Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et al 1985, The Penguin Dictionary of Biology Penguin.
References
Pearse & Buchsbaum,el al. 1987 ,Living Invertebrates BlackweW Boxwood.
Taiz, L. Wld Zeijer, E. 1991, Plant Physiology The Benjamin! Cummings Publishing Co.
BIOLl02 CELL BIOLOGY, GENETICS & EVOLUTION IOcp
Prerequisite See notes on BIOL1 01 under" Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty".
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 3 hour paper.
SECfION FIVE
Content
Cell Biology
Theme The evolution and functional organization of cells.
Topics
Biological molecules - the structure of proteins, carbohydrates and lipids.
Cell organization - emphasis on organelle ultrastructure and principal function, evolution of cells.
Biological energy processes - photosynthesis, cellularrespiration.
Genetics
Cell division, Mendelian genetics, Scientific method. Molecular biology. Gene action; development and differentiation. Probability. Tests of significance. Immunology.
An introduction to ecology.
Texts
Villee, C.A., Solomon, E.P., et al1989, "Biology" 2nd edn Saunders College Publishing, Philadelphia/Sydney.
or
Keeton, W.T. & Gould, J.L. 1986, Biological Science, 4th edn, Norton.
Abercrombie, M., Hickman, C.J. et al 1985, The Penguin Dictionary of Biology Penguin.
References
Ayala, F.M. & Kiger, J.A. 1984, Modern Genetics, Benjamin Cummings.
Moroney, MJ. 1984, Facts from Figures, Penguin.
Parker, RE. 1973, Introductory Statistics for Biology, Edward Arnold.
Tamarin, R 1991, Principles of Genetics, 3rd edn, Wm. C. Brown.
BIOL201 BIOCHEMISTRY
Prerequisites BIOLlOl, BI0L102.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
IOcp
Carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids Wld proteins. Vitamins and coenzymes. Enzymes. Intermediary metabolism.
Texl
Mathews, C.K & van Holde, K. E. 1990, Biochemistry, Benjamin! Cummings Publishing Co.
References
Zuhay, G. 1988, BiocMmistry, 2nd edn MacMillan.
Conn, E.E., Stumpf, P.K. et aI. 1987, Outlines of BiocMmistry , 5th edn, Wiley.
Lehninger, A.L. 1983, PrincipiesofBiochemistryGeneralAspecls ,7th edn McGraw-Hil.
McGilvery, R.W. 1983, Biochemistry. A Functional Approach, 3rd edn Saunders.
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
BIOL202 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY
Prerequisites BI0L101, BIOLl02
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
ExaminaJion One 2 hour paper.
ConunJ
Uk"
Consideration of the processes involved in the transport of oxygen in mammals and emphasizing the relation between structure and function. The course examines molecule. cell and tissue structure and function, particularly of nerve and muscle. and therespiralory ,cardiovascular andcontrol systems. Particular emphasis is given to physiological adaptations to the environment and the effects of the environment on physiological functions.
References
Eckert, R. & Randall, D. 1983, Animal Physiology Mechanisms and Adaptations, 3rd edn, Freeman.
Bloom, W. & Fawcett,D.W. 1975,A TextbookofHistology ,10th edn, Saunders.
Prosser, C.L. 1973, Comparative Animal Physiology, 3td edn Saunders.
Ruch, T.e. & Patton, H.D. 1974, Physiology and Biophysics If CircuJationRespiralionand Fluid Balance ,20thedn, Saunders.
McGilvery, RW. 1983, Biochemistry A Functional Approach, 3rd edn Saunders.
BIOL204 CELL AND MOL,~,CULAR BIOLOGY lOcp
Prerequisites BIOL101, BIOLl02.
Hours 6 Hours per week. for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Cellular organisation and inter-relalionships. Organelles, their structure & function. Cellular processes.
Texl
Alberts, B., Bray, D. et aI. 1989, Molecular Biology oftMCell, 2nd edn, Garland.
BIOL205 MOLECULAR GENETICS
Prerequisites BIOL101, BIOLl02.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ContenJ
IOcp
The structure of chromosomes and chromatin. Genetic mapping and recombination. DNA structure, replication and repair, Gene action and its control. Immunogenetics.
Recombinant DNA technology and genetic engineering.
TeXIs
Tamarin, R. 1991, Principles of Genetics, 3rd edn, Wm. C. Brown.
Old, R.W. & Primrose, S.B. 1989, Principles of Gene Manipulation, 4th edn, Blackwell.
69
SECfION FIVE
References
Alberts. B., Bray. D. el aI. 1989, Molecular Biology o/the Cell. 2nd edn, Garland.
Sambrook. J" Fritsch. liF. et aI. 1989, Molecular Cloning. 2nd edn, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.
BIOL206 PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
Prerequisites BIOLlOt, BIOLI02.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
lOc:p
Fundamental processes peculiar to plant cells are examined. Theseincludecell walerreiations, membrane transport of solutes, fixation of atmospheric nitrogen, and photosynthesis. Cellular regulation of the processes is emphasized.
Text
Taiz. L. & Zeijer. E. 1991, Plant Physiology The Benjamin! Cummings Publishing Co.
Reference
Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. 1985, Plant Physiology. 3rd edn, Wadsworth.
BIOL207 ECOLOGY lOc:p Prerequisites BIOLIOl.BIOLl02.
Only one of BIOL203 and BIOL207 can be credited towards a degree.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ConJenJ
A course in animal and plant ecology. Topics will include
life tables and population growth equations. The estimation of population parameters. The effect of environmental factors on the survival and reproduction of organisms and hence on their distribution and abundance. The effect of pollutants on animals and plants. The detection of patterns within plant communities and the causes of such patterns. Energy flow andresourcecycling in communities. Species diversity - measurement and relationship between species diversity in an area and the environment. Quantitative methO(1s for comparing communities. Rehabilitation studies.
Texl
Krebs, C.J.1985,Ecology 3rd edn, Harper & Row.
References
Recher, H., Lurmey, D. et al (eds). 1986, A Natural Legacy Pergamon Press.
Krebs, C.J. 1989, Ecological Methodology, Harper & Row.
Hedrick, P.W. 1984. Population Biology. Jones & Bartlett.
BIOLJOI CELL PROCF.5SES lOcp
Not offered in 1993.
70
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
BIOLJ02 REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY
PrerequisiJes Two BIOL200.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Emminalion One 2 hour paper.
Content
lOc:p
Biology of reproduction with particular emphasis on sexual differentiation and gamete physiology. Particular emphasis is given to physiological adaptations to the environmenL
References
Johnson, M.H. & Everitt, B.l. 1988, EssenJial Reproduction Blackwell.
Torrey, T.W. & Feduccia.. A. 1979, Morphogenesis of the VertebraJes , 4th edn Wiley.
Bloom, W. &Fawcett,D.W.1973,ATexlbookofHistology, 10th edn, Saunders.
McGilvery, R. W. Biochemistry. 1983, A Functional Approach, 3rd edn, Saunders.
BIOL303 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
Prerequisites Two BIOL200.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
lOc:p
Environmental impacts on whole plant growth are interpreted in tenns of the responses of susceptible components of key physiological processes. The processes examined include whole plant water relations, photosynthesis, mineral ion acquisition and nutrient transport.
ReJerences
Hay, R.K.M. & Walker, Al. 1989, An Introduction to the Physiology oJCrop Yield, Longman Scientific & Technical.
Milthorpe, F.L. & Moorby, 1. 1980, An introduction to Crop Physiology, 2nd edn, Cambridge U.P.
Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. 1985,Plant Physiology, 3rd edn, Wadsworth.
Taiz, L. & Zeijer, E. 1991, Plant Physiology, The Benjamin/ Cummings Publishing Co.
BIOLJ04 WHOLE PLANT DEVELOPMENT
Prerequisites Two BlOL200.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ConJent
lOc:p
The co-ordinated development of the structural organization and functional capacity of plants from their meristems. The role of environmenta1 parameters, plant growth regulators and selective gene expression in regUlation of developmental patterns.
References
Esau, K. 1960. Anatomy of Seed Plants • Wiley.
SECTION FIVE
Lyndon, R.F. Plant DevelopmenJ. The Cellular Basis. Topics in Plant Physiology 3, M. Black and J. Chapman (eds). Unwin Hyman, London.
Salisbury, F.B. & Ross, C.W. 1985, Plant Physiology, 3rd edn, Wadsworth.
Steeves, T.A. and Sussex, I.M. 1989, Patterns in Plant Development, 2nd edn, Cambridge Univ.Press.·
Taiz, L & Zeijer, E. 1991, Plant Physiology, The Benjamin! Cummings Publishing Co.
BIOLJOS IMMUNOLOGY
Prerequisites Two BIOL200.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
lOc:p
Molecular and cellular aspects of the function of the immune system including phylogeny, reproductive and tumour immunology.
Text
Roitt, I.M. 1991, Essential Immunology, 7th edn, Blacnell.
BIOLJ07 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY OF PLANT DEVELOPMENT
Not offered in 1993
BIOLJ09 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
Prerequisites BIOL2Ql and BIOL205.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
lOc:p
lOc:p
How genes function - and their control. Organisms and techniques used in recombinant DNA technology. Applications of recombinant DNA technology in biology and medicine. The generation of immunological specificity. The control of cell proliferation. The origins and genetic basis of cancer. The origins of life.
Special Conditions: Because of limitations of laboratory space and resources, student numbers in this subject will be limited to one laboratory class (48 students). Because the laboratory sessions need to be continuous, they will be held over four consecutive days during the September recess. Students intending to enrol in this subject are required to indicate this during the Semester 1 enrolment period.
Texts
Watson, J.D., HopkinS, N. H. et al1987, Molecular B:'ology of the Gene, Vols. 1 and 11. Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co., Menlo Park, California and Sydney.
Old, R.W. & Primrose, S.B. 1989, Principles of Gene Manipulation. Blackwell, Oxford and Melbourne.
References
Beiger, S.L. & Kimmel, AR. eds 1987, Guide to Molecular
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Cloning Techniques. Methods in Enzymology, Volume 152, Academic Press, San Diego and Sydney.
Sarnbrook, J. Fritsch, E.F. & Maniatis, T. 1989, Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manti<U., 2nd edn, (3 vols) Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
Ausubel, P.M., Brent, R., et al eds 1987 and continuous updates, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, (2 vols), John Wiley &. Sons, New YorkIBrisbane.
BIOLJIO MICROBIOLOGY 1Oc:p
Prerequisites BIOL201 and one other BIOL200 (BIOL204 advisable).
HoUl's 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Bacteria, fungi, viruses, mycoplasma, protozoa and algae; comparative biochemistry; nutrient cycles; pathogenicity (interactions of agricultural and human significance); industrial microbiology/biotechnology.
Text
Prescott, L.M. 1990, Microbiology Harley & Klein.
References
Brock, T.D. & Madigan, M.T.I991,BiologyofMicro-organisms , Prentice-Hall.
Mathews, c.K. & van Holde, K.E.1990,Biochemistry,Benjamin/ Cummings Publishing Company.
Cano, R.I. & Colome, J.S. 1986, Microbiology West.
BIOLJIl ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY lOc:p Only one of BI0L306 and BIOL311 may be credited towards a degree.
Prerequisites BIOL203 or BIOL207.
Hours 2 Hours of lectures per week for one semester. A threeday field excursion and some laboratory classes.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
The course covers applied aspects of both anima1 and plant ecology.
SECTION A Topics include:
Island ecology - thereduclion in species diversity of communities and genetic variability within populations. Evolutionary prospects of island popUlations. Nature Resenres as ecological islands.
Community change - succession, eutrophication and fire in the Australian environment.
Eva1uation of pest control methods (including biological conttol) on environmental and economic grounds as well as their short and long tenn effectiveness.
Under population effects, particularly the relevance of threshold levels for endangered species.
71
SECfION FIVE
SECTION B A selection of topics will be taken from:
The threat of modem agricultural practices to genetic diversity
The potential of microbiology for waste management
Methods for detecting biological pollution
The principles of conservation
Environmental animal and plant physiology studies
The interaction between vegetation, water.table. irrigation and soil salt levels
The commercial harvesting of natura} populations - fish, whale and kangaroo models
Evolution of plant-herbivore and predator-prey systems and otherinterspecificinteractions - implications forcontro] programs
Environmental consequences of the release of genetically engineered species.
The choice of IOpiCS in Section B should be determined in consultation with the Head of Department.
TexI
Krebs. C.!. 1985, EcoLogy, Harper and Row.
References
Hedrick. P.W. 1984, PopUlation Biology, Jones & Bartlett.
Krebs, C.J. 1989, Ecological Methodology ,Harper and Row.
Recher, H., Lunney,D. et al 1988. Natural Legacy ,Pergamon Press.
BIOL312 ANIMAL DEVELOPMENT IOcp
Only one of BIOLJ08 and BlOLJ12 can be credited towards a degree.
Prerequisites Two BIOL200
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ConJenJ
The course deals with molecular, cellular and physiological aspects of the development and differentiation of invertebrates and vertebrates. Specific topics include gametes & fertilization, cleavage & gastrulation, molecular biology of development, mammalian development and placentation, sex determination & differentiation, embryos & reproductive technologies, and abnormal development & the role of environmental agents.
References
Alberts, B., Bray, D. et al1989, Molecular Biology of the Cell, 2nd edn. Garland.
Austin, C.R. & Short R V. 1982,ReproductioninMammais vols 1 & 2, 2nd edn, Cambridge.
72
CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Chemistry Subject Descriptions
CHEMIOI CHEMISTRY 101 IOcp
Students who have not studied Chemistry previously are strongly advised to read the first six chapters in the main teXt (Brown and leMay) before commencement of the academic year.
Adlluory subjects Atleast Mathematics (2 unit course), Otemistry (2 unitcourse) and Physics (2 unit course), with ranking in the top 50% in each case.
Hours 3 lecture Hours, 1 hour of tutorial and 2 Hours of laboratory classes per week for one semester.
Examinalion One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
ConJenJ
General Chemistry (approximately 12 lectures)
Revision of basic chemical principles. Introduction to atomic and molecular concepts. Simple ionic and covalent bonding models.
Organic Chemistry (approximately 241ectures)
Historical development. The shapes, structures and names of organic compounds; reactions of common functional groups; synthesis, differentiation and structural elucidation of organic compounds. Applications of organic chemistry.
Texts
EITHER
Brown, W.H. 1988,lnJroduction to Organic Chemistry, 4th edn, Wadsworth student edn, Brooks/Cole & Nelson.
OR
Hart, H. 1991, Organic Chemistry-A Short Course ,8th edn, International student edn, Houghton Mifflin Co.
Aylward,G.H. & Findlay, T.J.V. 1974, S.l. Chemical Data, 2nd edn, Wiley.
Brown, T.L., LeMay,H.E.,eta1.1991,CMmistry-TMCenJral Science, 5th edn, Prentice-Hall.
Lehman,J. W. 1984,Molecular Model SetforOrganic CMmistry, Allyn & Bacon.
CHEMI02 CHEMISTRY 102 IOcp
Hours 3 lecture Hours and 1 hour of tutorial and 2 Hours of laboratory classes per week for one semester.
Examination One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 10% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
CoflienJ
Inorganic Chemistry (approximately 12 lectures)
Inorganic solids and their structures. Simple molecular orbital theory and structure and bonding in metals. Transition metal chemistry, coordination compounds.
Physical Chemistry (approximately 24 lectures)
Chemical equilibria, thermodynamics, electrochemistry, chemical kinetics.
SECTION FIVE
Text
Brown. T.L.. LeMay. H.E .•• ! aI. 1991. Chemistry- The Cenlral Science, 5th edn, Prentice-Hall.
CHEM211 ANAL ITICAL CHEMISTRY IOcp
Prerequisites CHEMI 01, CHEMI02.
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment buta pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
ConJefli
Evaluation and manipulation of analytical data, tiuimetric methods of analysis including theory of acid-base, complex fonnation and oxidation - reduction titrations.
Selected instrumental methods of analysis, atomic spectroscopy, absorption spectrophotometry, potentiometric techniques, gas chromatography.
Text
Hargis, L.G. 1988, Analytical Chemistry, Principles and Techniques, Prentice-Hall.
CHEM221 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Prerequisites CHEMI01,CHEMI02.
IOcp
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
ConJem
Main group chemistry and transition metal chemistry. Coordination complexes and metal ion-ligand interactions~ ionic bonding; symmetry and structure.
Introduction to reactions and mechanisms, synthesis, spectroscopic methods, bonding and ligand field theory in coordination compounds and organometallic chemistry.
Text
Cotton, F.A., Wilkinson, G.,d aI. 1987 .Basic Inorganic Chemistry ,2nd edn, Wiley.
CHEM231 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Prerequisites CHEMI01, CHEMI02.
IOcp
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
CoflienJ
A course covering the basic chemistry of aliphatic and aromatic compounds and their spectroscopic properties.
An introduction to spectroscopic methods of structure
CHEMISTRY SURlECTDESCRlPTIONS
determination (infra-red, proton magnetic resonance, mass spectrometry); acidity and basicity of organic compounds; reactions of carbonyl compounds; aromaticity; electrophilic substitution in aromatic systems; reactions of aromatic compounds. An introduction to the chemistry of some biologically important compounds including carbohydrates, amino acids, proteins and nucleic acids.
Texis
Solomons, T.W.G. 1988, Organic Chemistry ,4th edn, Wiley.
OR
(Recommended for students proceeding to Level 300 subjects).
Morrison, R. T. & Boyd, R.N. 1987, Organic CMmistry, 5th edn, Allyn & Bacon.
Lehman,J.W. 1984, Molecular Model Set for Organic Chemistry Allyn & Bacon.
CHEM241 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Prerequisites CHEM10t, CHEMI02.
IOcp
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examinillion One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
CofllenJ
Chemical Dynamics - rate laws of chemical kinetics, principles of mechanism, determination; transition stale theory; electrolyte activity; thermodynamics of galvanic cells.
Surface Chemistry - definitions; binding in crystals; condensation coefficient; sticking probability; adsorption isothenns; Langmuir modeJ; types of isotherms; detennination of sunace area of adsorbents (BET); applications of adsorptions.
Atomic & Molecular Spectroscopy - structure of free atom~ Bohr model; electronic structure of diatomic molecules; potential energy cUJVes; rotational spectroscopy; vibrational spectroscopy; vibration-rotation spectroscopy.
Texl
Atkins, P.W. 1990, Physical Chemistry, 4th edn, Oxford.
CHEM251 APPLIED CHEMISTRY
Not offered in 1993.
IOcp
CHEM261 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY IOcp
Prerequisites CHEMI01, CHEMI02.
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass in this work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Cofllefll
This subject is an introduction to environmental chemistry, focussing on the hydrosphere and the atmosphere. Specific topics include general introduction; properties, composition,
73
SECTION FIVE
redox equilibria and complexation in natural and waste waters; chemical aspects of microbial cycles; water pollution; nature and composition oftheatmosphere; inorganic atmospheric pollutants; photochemical smog; atmospheric mOnitoring; an overview of energy sources.
Text
Manahan,S.B. 1990. Environmenlal Chemistry ,5thedn, Lewis.
CHEM311 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY lOcp
Prerequisile CHEM211.
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
ExaminaJion One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
Principles of selected instrumental techniques (e.g. emission spectroscopy and electro-analytical procedures). Solvent extraction; chromatogmphy (theory and techniques).
Text
Christian. G.D. & O'Reilly. I. E. 1986. Instrumental Analysis, 2nd edn. Allyn & Bacon.
CHEM312 CHEMOMETRICS Scp
Prerequisites CHEM211. MATH102 (or MATH 1 12)
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.
Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboralory/assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
Use of computers in chemistry to improve the performance of procedures using optimisation methods and to enhance the analysis of measurements using linear and non-linear regression and factor analysis. Theory is exemplified with lypical everyday problems.
Text No formal text; material to be advised.
CHEM313 INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Scp
Prerequisite CHEM2Jl.
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.
ExaminaJion One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
A survey of selected techniques for specialised or high volume analysis used in areas as diverse as industriaJ, R & D,hos pital and
74
CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
nuclear chemistry. TopiCS include electronic analytical signal processing; automated analysis (flow analysers, batch anaJysers, samplers); applications of computers and robots; X-ray/electron microprobe analysis; radiochemical analysis; kinetic and enzymatic methods of analysis.
Text No fOImai text; material to be advised.
CHEM314 TRACE ANALYSIS IN ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
Not available in 1993.
CHEM321 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite CHEM221.
Scp
lOcp
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Exmninalion One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
A general course exploring the range of modem inorganic chemistry. including synthesis, reactivity and applications of spectroscopic methods.
Metal Chemistry - transition elements and coordination chemistry; isomerism, f -block elements, inorganic reaction mechanisms, electron transfer and voltammetry.
Organometallic Chemistry - main group and transition metals; structure and bonding; cyclic donors; carbonyl and olefin complexes; applications to industrial cataJysis.
Inorganic Spectroscopy - electronic spectroscopy; vibrational spectroscopy; nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy; introduction to other methods (e.g. Mossbauer, eleclron spin resonance, and chiroptical spectroscopy).
Text
Purcell, K.F. & Kotz, J.e. 1980, An Introduction to Inorganic Chemistry, International edn, Holt-Saunders.
CHEM322 METAL·METAL BONDING AND CLUSTER CHEMISTRY Scp
Prerequisite CHEM221.
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.
Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/assignment work: will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
Metal-metal multiple bonding; lower halide clusters. structure and bonding in boranes and transition metal clusters; higher nuclearity clusters; clusters and catalysis; Zinll species.
Text No formallext~ material to be advised.
GENERAL INFORMATION Principal Dates 1993
(See separate entry for the Bachelor of Medicine degree course).
January
1 Friday Public Holiday - New Year's Day
6 Wednesday Last day for return of Enrolment Application Forms - Continuing Students
February
5 Friday New students accept UAC main round offer
12 Friday
TO New students enrol
22 Monday
26 Friday last date for payment of General Service Charge
March
1 Monday First Semester begins
30 Tuesday Last day for variation of program in relation
to HECS liability for Semester I.
April
9 Friday Good Friday - Easter Recess commences
19 Monday - Lectures Resume
June
7 Monday Public Holiday- Queen's Birthday
11 Friday FirstSemesterconcludes - Last date for withdrawal from Semester 1 subjects.
14 Monday Mid year Examinations begin
30 Wednesday Closing date for applications for selection to the BachelorofMedicine and BachelorofScience (Aviation) in 1994.
July
2 Friday Mid Year Examinations end
19 Monday Second Semester hegins
August
30 Monday Last day for variation of program in relation to HECS liability for Semester 2.
September
25 Saturday Mid Semester recess hegins
PRINCIPAL DATES 1993
30 Thursday Closing date for UAC applications for enrolment in 1994 (Undergraduate courses other than Medicine and Aviation.
October
4 MoNJay Public Holiday-Labour Day
11 Monday Lectures resume
November
5 Friday Second Semester concludes -last date for withdrawal from Semester 2 and Full Year subjects
8 Monday Annual EKaminations begin
26 Friday Annual Examinations end
1994 February
MOIlday First Tenn begins l
DATES FOR THE 1993 ACADEMIC YEAR FOR THE BACHEWR OF MEDICINE PROGRAM
Year I
Semester 1 commences Monday 1 March, 1993
recess Friday 9 April 1993
10
Friday 16 April 1993
resumes Monday 19 April 1993
concludes Friday 2 July 1993
Semester 2 commences Monday 19July 1993
recess Monday 27 September 1993
10
Friday 8 October 1993
resumes Monday 11 October 1993
concludes Friday 5 November 1993
Examinations commence Monday 8 November 1993
conclude Friday 19 November 1993
Mini-Elective commences Monday 22 November 1993
concludes Friday 3 December 1993
NOTE:
Semester One consists of Block One (10 weeks) and 7 weeks of Block
Two.
Semester Two consists of the remaining 3 weeks of Block Two, all of Block Three (10 weeks), and Sluvac (1 week).
1 Date to be fiNllised
ADVICE AND INFORMA nON
Year Two
Semester 1 commences Monday I March 1993 rece" Friday 9 April 1993
to
Friday 16 April 1993 reswnes Monday 19 April 1993 concludes Friday 2 July 1993
Semester 2 commences Monday 19 July 1993
""''''' Monday 27 September 1993 to
Friday 8 October 1993 resumes Monday 11 October 1993 concludes Friday 5 November 1993
Examinations commence Monday 8 November 1993 conclude Friday 19 November 1993
Mini-Elective commences Monday 22 November 1993 concludes Friday 3 December 1993
NOTE:
Semester One C01lSists of Block Four { 10 weeks) and 7 weeks of Block Five.
Semeste: Two consists oflhe remaining 3 weeks of Block. Five, all of Block SIX(JO weeb) and Stuvac (J week)
Year Three Block 7
Block 8
Vacation
Block 9
Stuvac
Assessment
Vacation
Block 10
Year Four
Clinical Auachmentia
Clinical Allachment lb
Vacation Clinical Attachment 2a
Clinical Attachment 2b
Vacation
Clinical Attachment 3a
Clinical Attachment 3b
GPPeriod
Stuvac
Assessment
Year Five
Clinical AUachrnent 1 Clinical AUachrnent 2
ii
PebS - April 30 12 weeks: llweekblock
May 3 - June 25
June 28- July 9
1 week A VCC/Easter
Vacation 9-16/4
8 weeks
2 weeks (A VCC
common week)
July 12 - Sept 10 9 weeks: 8 week block
1 week review Sept 13 - Sept 17 1 week
Sept 20 - Oct 8 3 weeks
Oct 11 - Detl5 1 week
Oct 18 - Dec 10 8 weeks Elective
Peb I - Mar 12 6 weeks
Mar 15 - April 30 6 week attachment
May3 - May7
May 10- June 18 June21- July30
Aug2 - Aug 13
Aug 16 - Sept 24 Sept 27 - Nov 5
1 week A VCC/Easter
Vacation 9-16/4
I week
6 weeks
6 weeks
2 weeks
6 weeks
6 weeks
Nov 8 - Nov 17 One and a half weeks
(inclusive)
Nov 18- Nov 26 Oneandahalfweeks
Nov 29 - Dec 7 One and a half weeks
Feb I - Mar 19 7 weeks
Mar 22 - May 7 7 weeks
(Easter 9-16/4)
Assessment May 10- May 14 I week Vacalioo May 17- May21 I week Clinical Audunent 3 May24- July9 7 weeks Clinical Attachment 4 July 12 - Aug 27 7 week, Stuvac Aug 30- Sept 3 I week Assessment Sept6 - Sept17 2 weeks 2nd Assessment Sept 20 - Sept 2A I week Elective Attachment Sepl27- Nov 19 8 weeks FinaJ Assessment Nov 22- Nov 26 I week
Nok_" Years 3,4 & 5 do fIOt co1lformwith the UniversityojNewcastie' s Sem.es~T da~s.
Advice and Information
Themainpointofcontactforenquiriesconcemingcoursesandenrolment is the Fagdty Office The Faculty Office can provide advice on Faculty rules and policies, course requirements, procedures relating to course administration and so on. If academic advice is required, the Faculty Office can direct enquiries to the appropriate Dean, Assistant Dean, Course Co-ordinator" or Head of Department.
FACULlY OFFICES
Facility Colllaci Location Telephone Architecture JennieGow 1-06N 215570 Art, Design & Sheila Proust ABI-31 216525 Communication Maryanne Cartwright
Vicki Drewe ABI-10 215639 Art, David Donnelly CU32 215323 Economics & Linda H8JTigan S18 215984 Commerce Natalie Downing S16 215983 Education Chandra Murti ABI-4I 216529
Katrina Killel ABI-43 216530 Irene Blyth ABI-39 216528 Nerida Vee ABI-22 216531
Engineering Geoff Gordon EA206 216064 Jill Norbwn EA204 216061 Helen Jackson EAW5 216066
Health Sciences Jenny Hughes ABI-37 216527 Maurice Chalmers ABl-18 216524
Law Linda Harrigan S18 215984 Medicine Brian Kelleher K607A 215676 Music Chris Palmer CONLG4 294207 Nursing Janet Hallinan ABI-33 216523
Estelle Graham ABI-16 216534 Science & Helen Hotchkiss SB210 215562 Mathematics Kristine Hodyl SB210 215569 Socia1 Sciences Susan Eade CU31 216526 THE STUDENT ENQUIRY COUNTER
Located in the Chancellery, the Student Enquiry Counter is the main point of contact for enquiries relating to 'non-academic' aspects of student administration, such as the issue of travel concessions matters relating to the administration of the Higher Education Con~ibution Scheme (flECS), and the issue and receipt of various forms, such as Change of NRfIle/Address and Transcript Request forms. The Enquiry Counter also acts as a point of referral for general student enquiries.
STUDENT SERVICES
~vailable for all students to assist with many practical matters which may affect personal adjuShnent to University and success in studies.
Most services are located in the Temporary Buildings adjacent to the Computer Teaching Building except where indicated. Most services are also available on the Central Coast Campus.
The Dean of Students, Professor K.R. Dutton (located in the Bowman Building) is responsible for the network of SlUdent Services and his assistance or advice is available to srudents where appropriate. The SubDean, Ms. M. Kibby (Hunter Building Room Cl8) will advise students on the correct procedures to follow in cases of appeal or grievance applications. Both can be contacted on 215806.
Accommodation Omce
Offers advice onrental matters and assistance inresolving accommodation problems. Maintains lists of accommodation available off-campus in private homes,rooms, flats and houses. Mrs Kalh Dacey ,Accommodation Officer. Enquiries phone (049) 215593.
Careers & Student Employment Office
A free service to students atany stage of their studies covering all matterS relating to employment: careers information and planning, resume and interview preparation workshops, graduate recruitment, vacation employment and part~time student employment service. Ms H. Parker, phone (049) 215588.
Chaplaincy
The Chaplaincy Centres are located in the temporary buildings adjacent to the Computer Teaching Building and also in Room A 187 in the Hunter Building nearthe Huxley Library. Pastoral and spiritual care is available from denominational chaplains. Phone (049) 215571 or (049) 216648.
Counselling ServIce
Location: Courtyard level Auchmuty Library building. Assists people whoare having academic orpersonal difficulties, orwho simply want to function more effectively. Individual counselling and group courses are available. Phone (049) 215806.
Health Service
Doctor's surgery is located in the Shortland Union building basement, phone(049) 21 6000. A nursing sister is available on the main concourse Hunter Building, phone 216452. The health service offers medical care similar to a general doctor's surgery with a special interest in the health needs of students. Patients are bulk-billed. All consulwions are strictly confidential. Health education and infonnation also provided. Dr. S. Brookman, phone (049)216000.
Sport & Recreation Omce
Promotes, controls and administers all sporting activities of the University. Organises classes in wide range of sporting and recreational pursuits. Provides assistance to the sludent sporting and recreation clubs. Coordinates participation in the Australian University championships. Administers the student accident insurance scheme on behalf of the Sports Union. Mr A. Lakin, phone (049) 215584.
Student Support Omce
Student Service enquiries, student loans and financial advice for students on low incomes, advice and referal on other welfare matters and assistance and infonnation for students with disabilities. Ms A. Rudd phone (049) 216467.
STUDENTS WIlli DISABILITIES
The University of Newcastle has a policy to provide equal opportunity to students with Special Needs.
Practical assistance, which may be required by students with adisability to facilitate their participation in their course of study, can be arranged through the Student Support Officer. Ms Annette Rudd ,located in the Temporary buildings opposite Mathematics, phone (049) 216467.
STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES
Special equipment is available in some lecture theatres and in the Libraries.
If you need academic assistance, please do not hesitate to contact your rele.vant Faculty Adviser.
Fatuity Advisers
Architecture Mr Arthur Kingsland (049)215783
Art, Design & Comm. Mr Bruce Wilson 216606
Am A/Prof. A. Barthofer 215372
Economics & Commerce Ms. Anne Finlay 216769
Education Ms Margaret Davies 216283
Engineering Dr David Wood 216198
Health Sciences Mr Andrew Bertram 216733
Medicine A/Prof. David Powis 215625
Music Mr Paul Curtis 294133
Nursing Ms Suzanne Lyons 216312
Science & Mathematics Dr Graham Couper 215529
Social Science Ms Sue Muloin 216787
University Ubraries Ms Anne Robinson 215831 Mr Gary Jones 216465
ENROLMENT OF NEW UNDERGRADUATE STUDENTS
Persons offered enrolment are required to attend in person at the Greal Hall in February to enrol. Detailed inslructions are given in the Enrolment Guide which Is sent out with the UAC offer.
TRANSFER OF COURSE
Students currently enrolled in an undergraduate course who wish to transfer to adifferent undergraduate course in 1993 must apply through the Universities Admission Centre (UAC) by 30 September 1992. Late applications will be accepted through UAC until 31 October if accompanied by a $60.00 late fee. Late applications will be accepted after 31 October direct to the University, but such applications will only be considered if places remain after applications that have been submitted through UAC are considered.
If a student's request to transfer to another course is successful, the studentmustcomplete a separate Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) Payment Option fonn for the new course at enrolment time. Payment of the General Service Charge must be made using the notice issued as part of the re-enrolment process.
RE.ENROLMENT BY CONTINUING STUDENTS
There are five steps involved for re-enrolment by continuing srudents:
receive a re-enrolment kit in the mail
lodge the Enrolment Application fonn with details of your proposed program
receive a fees & charges notice in the mail in late January.
payment of the General Service Charge a1 any Commonwealth Bank by 26 Februaryl993.
receive an approved program and student card.
Re-Enrolment Kits
Re-enrolment kits for 1993 will be mailed to students in October. The re-enrolment kit contains the student's Enrolment Application and Statistical Fonn, the 1993 Class Timetable, the 1993 HECS booklet and Enrohnent Guide.
A fees and charges notice will be mailed separately in late January (Please note a Fees and Charges Notice will not be sent until all outstanding debts/fines have been paid.)
iii
RE-ADMISSION AFTER ABSENCE
Lodging Enrolment Application Forms
The Enrolment Application fonn must be completed carefully and lodged at the Srudent Division Office by 6 January 1993. Srudents should know theireum in81ion results beforecomple ting the re-enrolment form. There is no late charge payable if the form is late, but it is very Important that the Enrolment Application fonn is lodged by 6 January 1993 as late lodgement will mean that enrolment approval and student card may nOl: be available for the slart of the semester.
Enrolment Approval
All re-enrolling students will receive in early February either a confirmation program and student card or a letter asking them to attend in person because there is a problem with their proposed program. Enrolment in tutorial or laboratory sessions should be arranged with Departments on an individual basis.
Payment of Cbarges
The Fees and Charges Notice will be mailed to re-enrolling students in late January (please note aPeesand Charges Notice will not be sent until all outstanding debts/fines have been paid). The 1993 General Service Charge must be paid at any Commonwealth Bank branch using the Pees and Charges Notice. Payments made after 26 February 1993 will incur a $50.00 late fee.
All charges listed on the Pees and Charges Notice must be paid. The Bank will not accept part payment.
SCHOLARSIDP HOLDERS AND SPONSORED STUDENTS
Students holding scholarships or receiving other forms of financial assistance must lodge with the Cashier their Pees and Charges Notice together with a warrant or other written evidence that charges will be paid by the sponsor. Spoosors must provide a separate voucher warrant or letter for each student sponsored.
LATE PAYMENT
The Final date for payment of the GeneraJ Service Charge is 26 February 1992. Payments made after this date will incur a $50.00 late tee.
Thereafter enrolment wIll be cancelled lfcharges remain unpaid by 19 March.
FAILURE TO PAY OVERDUE DEBTS
Any student who is indebted tothe University by reason of non-payment of any fee or charge, non-payment of any fine imposed, or who h as failed to pay any overdue debts shall nOl: be permitted to:
complete enrolment in a following year;
receive a transcript of academic record;
graduate or be awarded a Diploma; or
receive a replacement Student ID Card
until such debts are paid.
Students are requested to pay any debts incWTed without delay.
STUDENT CARDS
Students will bemailed theirConfinnation of Program and StudentCard in early February. The Student Card should be carried by students when at the University. The SlUdent Card has macl1ine readable lettering for use when borrowing boots from the University Library, and contains the student's interim password for access to facilities of the Computing Centre. Please note that the Student Card is not evidence of enrolment; students must also have paid the General Service Charge and fulfilled HECS requirements to be fully enrolled.
Students are urged to lake good care of their Student Card. If the card is lost or destroyed, !here is a service charge of $5 payable before the card wiU be replaced.
A swdeot who withdraws completely from studies should return the Student Card to the Student Division Office.
RE·ADMISSION AFrER ABSENCE
A person wishing to resume an undergraduate degree course who has been enroUed previously at the University of Newcastle, but 1IOl eN'olkd ;11 1992, is required to apply for admissiOQ again through the Universities Admissions Centre, U>cked Bag 500 Lidcombe 2141. Applicatioo forms may be obtained from the UAC or from the Student Division Office aod clo6e with the UAC OIl 30 September each year. There is a $60.00 fee for late applications. Students who withdrew from their course after 31 March 1992 are not required to apply for re~admission.
CHANGE OF ADDRESS
The University holds on record both an address for correspondence and a home address. Students are responsible for notifying the SlUdent Division Office in writing of any change in their address. A Change of Address form should be used and is available from the Student Division Office.
Failure to notify chaoges to your correspondence address could lead to important correspondence or course information not teQChing you. The University cannot accept responsibility if official communications fail toreach a student who has not notified the SlUdent Division Office of a change of address.
CHANGE OF NAME
Students who change their name should advise the Student Division Office. A marriage or deed poll certificate should be presented for sighting in order that the change can be noted on University records.
CHANGE OF PROGRAMME
Approval must be sought for any changes to the programme for which a srudenthas enroJled. This includes adding subjects, withdrawing from subjects or the course, or replacing one subje<:t with another.
All proposed changes should be entered on the Programme Variation section on the reverse side of the COnfirmation of Programme fomJ.. Where appropriate, reasons for changes and/or docum en\ar)' evidence in the form of medical or other relevant certificates must be submitted.
Programme Variation fQftns should be lodgedatormailed totherelevant Faculty Office.
Withdrawal from Subjects or Course
Applications received by the appropriate date listed below will be approved for withdrawal without a failure being recorded against the subject or subjects in question.
Wi!hdrawal Dates
Semester 1 Subie&ls
11 June 1993
Semester 2lFuil Year Syhiects
5 November 1993
Except wi!h permission of the Dean:
<a) a slUdent shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject after the dates listed above
(b) a student shall nOl: be permitted to withdraw from a subject on more than two occasions.
If a student believes that a failure should not be recorded beca\lse of the circumstances leading to his or her withdrawal. it is important !hat fulJ dewls of these circumstances be provided with the application to withdraw.
AddlUon of Subjects
Students seeking to add a subject or SUbjects more than two weeks after the commencementoftherelevantsemester should seek advice from the Faculty Office prior to lodging their application. In SOnte instances Faculty policy or restrictions on class size preclude late enrolment and
students should make every attempt to flOai ise their enrolmen t within the first two weeks of semester.
ENROLMENTCONflRMATION
Students should ensure thataD details on theirConfjrmation of Program form are corTecL Failure tocheck: this information COIlld create problem s at examination time. Please note that it is the student'sresponsibility to
(i) ensure that all enrolment details are corTect and.
(ii) to withdraw from aSemester II subject if a failure has been incurred in the Prerequisite Semester I subject.
LEAVE OF ABSENCE
Undergraduate Awards
Subject to any provision concerning your course as set out in the schedule, a candidate in good academic standing in the course:
(a) may take leave of absence of one year from the course; or
(b) with the permission oftheDean, may take leave of absence for two consecutive years from the course
without prejudice to any right of the candidate to re-enrol in the couse following such absence.
Candid81es should also refer to the Rules Governing Undergraduate Awards, Rule 10 Leave of Absence, and the schedules regarding the defmition of'good standing'. You should also consult with your Faculty Officer. To re-enrol in your course after leave of absence, you must reapply through the Universities Admissions Centre (UAG, Locked Bag 500, Lidcombe, NSW, 2141. The closing date for applications is 30
Sepwmber each year.
Postgraduate Course work Awards
Leave of absence may not be available for some courses. Ca.'ldidates should refer to the course schedules, and also consult with their Faculty Officer regarding any requirement to lodge a formal application for
leave.
Research Higher Degrees
Leave of ab.sence is nOl: automatically granted, and candidates are required to lodge a written application for leave of absence prior to the end of the preceding semester. Applications should be lodged with the Postgraduate Studies Office for approval by the Graduate Studies Committee. Refer to the Masters and Doctoral Degree Rules.
Scholarship Recipients
Scholarship holders, both undergraduate and postgraduate, who wish to take leave of absence from their courSe, or who do not intend to lake a full-time program in any semester, are required to lodge a written appl ication for suspension of scholarhsip prior to the end of the preced ing semester. Applications for suspension should be lodged with the Scholarships Office for approval by the Scholarsh ips Commiuee. Refer to the Conditions of Award of your scholarship.
ATTENDANCE AT CLASSES
Where a student's attendance or progress has not been satisfactory, action may be taken under the Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory
Progress.
In the case of illness or absence for some other unavoidable cause, a student may be excused for non attendance at classes.
All applications for exemption from anendanceatclassesmust be made in writing to the Head of the Departmentoff ering the subject. Where tests or tenn examinations have been missed, this fact should be noted in the
application.
The granting of an exemption from auendance at classes does not carry with it any waiver of the General Services Charge.
EXAMINATIONS
GENERAL CONDUCT
In accepting membership of the University, students undertake to observe the by-laws and other requirements of the University.
Students .. e expected to conduct themselves at all times in a seemly fashion. Smoking is not permitted during let:tures, in examination rooms or in the University Library. Gambling is faroidden.
Members of the academic staff of the University, senioradministrative officers, and other peroons authorised for the purpose have authority to report on disorderly or improper conduct OCCUlTing in the University.
NOTICES
Official University notices are displayed on Departmental notice board s and students are expected to be acquainted with the contents of those announcements which concern them.
The Hunter Building Concourse is used for the specific purpose of displayingexaminationtime-tablesandothernoticesaboutexaminations and final results.
EXAMINATIONS
Tests and assessments may be held in any subject from lime to time. In theassessmentofastudent'sprogressinauniversitycourse,consideration will be given to laboratOry work, tutorials and assignments and to any term or other tests conducted throughout the year. The results of such assessments and class work may be incorporated with those of formal written examinations.
EXAMlNA TION PERIODS
Formal written examinations take place on prescribed dates within the following periods, Saturdays may be included:
MidYear; 14June-2July 1993
End of Year: 8t026November,l993
Timetables showing the date and time at which individual examinations will beheld will be displayed in the Hunter Building Concourse, specific Deparllnental noticeboards and other prominent locations on campus.
Mi steading of the timetable will not under any circumstances be accepted as an excuse for failure to attend an examination.
SITTING FOR EXAMINATIONS
Formal examinations, where prescribed, arecompulsory. Srudents should consult the final timetable in advance to find out the date and time of their
examinations.
LOCATION OF EXAMINATIONS
Seat allocation lists for examinations will be displayed about two weeks before the commencement of the examination period on the noticeboard of the Department running the subject and on a noticeboard outside the examination room on the day of the examination. Candidates should allow themselves plenty of time to get to the examination room so that they can take advantage of the 10 minutes reading time that is allowed before the exam ination commences. Normally,entry intothe examination room will be penn itted from 15 minutes before the acrual commencement of the examination writing time. This is to allow the candidate time to locate the allocated seat and complete the necessary attendance slipand any related necessary registration details before the commencement of reading time. During reading time no writing will be permitted. Materials which may betaken into each examination will also be displayed outside the examination room. A complete day seat listing will alsobe displayed in the Great Hall Foyer and Hunter Building Foyer.
PERMITTED AIDS
Students can take into any examination any writing instrument, drawing instrument or eraser. Logarithmic tables may not be taken in: they will be available from the supervisor if needed. Calculators may not be taken into an examination room unless the Examiner has instructed on the
v
EXAMINATIONS
examination paper that the calculator specified is a permitted aid. Calculatorsmust be hand held, battery operated and non-programmable" and sWdents should note that no concession will be granted:
(a) to a student who is prevented from bringing into a room a programmable calculator;
(b) to a student who uses a calculator incorrectly; or
(c) because of battery failure.
UNLISTED CANDIDATES
If you expect to sit for an examination and your name does not appear on the displayed seal allocation listing it could mean you are not formally recorded as being enrolled and eligible to sit and receive a result. In these circumstances you will need to visit the Examinations Office to identify the problem. If an enrolment problem is confinned you may also need to discuss the matter with your Faculty Officer.
RULES FOR FORMAL EXAMINATIONS
PART 1 - PRELIMINARY
Appllcatlon of Rules
1. These Rules shall apply to all examinations of the University with the exception of the examination of a thesis subm iued by a cand idate for a degree of Master or the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. The examinationofthesesforthesedegreesortheassessmentofpublished works submitted for Higher Doctoral Degrees shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements for the degree.
Interpretatlon
2. In these Rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:
"award" means the degree, diploma (including graduate diploma and associate diploma) or graduate certificate for which a candidate is enrolled;
"Department" means the department assigned responsibility for a particular subject and includes any other body so responsible;
"Departmental Examinations Committee" means the Departmental Examinations Committee of the Department constituted in accordance with the Rules governing Deparlments;
jjexamlnatlon" includes any form of examination, assignment, test or any other work by which the final grade of acandidate in asubject is assessed;
Uexternal examiner for a candidate" means an examiner, not being a member of the staff of the University, appointed to assist in the examination of an extended essay, project or similar work submitted by a candidate;
"externaJ examiner for the Department" means an examiner, not being a member of the staff of the University, appointed to assist in the examining processes within a Department;
''Faculty Board"means the Faculty Board of the Faculty responsible for the course in which a candidate is enrolled and includes a Board of Studies where given powers relevant to this Rule;
"formal written examination" means an eltamination conducted under Part 4 of these Rules;
usubJect" meansany partof acourseof study foran award for which a result may be recorded;
• A programmable calculator may be permitted if prescribed, provided that program cards and devices are not taken into the examination room and the H end of Department approves. Consideration is currently being given to the establishment of a listing of calculators approved for use where calcwators are specified as a permitted aid. vi
j'supervlsor" means the supervisor for an eltaminaUon appointed, in the case of a (onnal written examination, by the Academic Registrar and. in the case of any other examination, by the Head of Department.
j'supplementaryel.8mlnation"meansanexaminationadministered to a candidate in respect of whom any doubt exists as to the judgement to be recorded in an examination return.
PART 1 - GENERAL
Examinations other than in single department
3. (1) WhereaFaculty isnotcomposedofDepartments,the functions and responsibilities of the Head of a Department and the Departmental Examinations Committee shall be undertaken respectively by the person or body in that Faculty approved for the purpose of these Rules by the Academic Senate.
(2) WhereasubjectisnottheresponsibilityofasingleDepartment, thepersonorbodytoundertakethefunctionsandresponsibilities of the Head of a Departmentand the Departmental Examinations Committee in respect of that subject shall be decided by the Faculty Board concerned or, where Departments from more than one Faculty are involved, by theAcademicSenate.
Determination of nature and extent of examining
4. Each Faculty Board shall determine the natw'eand extent of examining in the subjects in the awards for which the Faculty is responsible and such examining may be written, oral, clinical or practical or any combination of these.
Publlcatlon of requirements
5. The Head of Department shall ensure the publication of the Department's examination requirements in each subject by the end of the second week of the semester in which the subject commences including the weight and timing of each task comprising the total assessment to be applied in determining the fmal grade.
PenaJUes
6. An infringement of any of the rules setout in Rule 16(1), other than pursuant to Rule 16(2), or the instructions referred to in Rule 19 shall constitute an offence against discipline.
PART3-PROCEDURES
External Examiners
7. (I) The Academic Senate may, on the recommendation of a Faculty Board made 00 the recommendation of a Head of Department appoint ODe or more external examiners for the Department. Such appointment shall be for a tenn of one year and, ellcept with the approval of the Academic Senate, no external ex.aminer for the Department shall be reappointed for more than four consecutive tenns of office.
(2) Where theappoinlmentof an external examiner for acandidate is prescribed by the Rules for an award, or where the Faculty Board considers it appropriate that an external examiner for a candidate by appointed, such appoinlment shall bemade by the Faculty Board or as otherwise prescribed in the Rules for that award.
Examining
8. The Head of each Deparlment shall arrange for the member or members of the academic staff responsible for each of the subjects offered by the Department:
(a) to prepare the examination papers in the subjects;
(b) in consultation with any other members of staff involved in the tuition or supervision of the candidates, to assess the scripts and other work submitted by candidates and, if required,
prescribe a further or supplementary examination for any candidate; and
(c) to record in an examination return a judgement in respect of each candidate fOT submission to the Departmental Examinations Committee.
Departmental recommendations of results
9. The Departmental Examinations Commiuee shall consider the judgementsrecordedforcandidatesandshallmakerecommendations to the Faculty Board as to the result in the subject to be recorded for each candidate.
Determination of results In subjects
10. (1) The recommendations of the Departmental Examinations Committee shall be presented totheFaculty Board by lheHead of the Department or the representative of that Head, who shall be entitled to vary any recommended result if of the view that it is appropriate to do so on the request of the Faculty Board.
(2) The Dean shall ensure that in making its recommendations the Departmental Examinations Commiuee has considered any request for special consideration made by a candidate pursuant to Rule 13.
(3) Each Faculty Board shaH consider the recommendations of the DepartmentalExaminationsCommitteeand,takingintoaccount any change to a recommendation under sub-rules (1) or (2), shall either:
(a) confinn the results; or
(b) defer the decision pending the outcome of such other action as the Faculty Board deems appropriate.
Grading of results In subjects
11. The result awarded in a subjecttoa candidate shaH be one of those in the list of approved results determined by the Academic Senate from time to time.
RevJew of result In subject
12. (I) A candidate may apply fora review of any result aWlU"ded in a subject to that candidate.
(2) An application made under sub-rule (1) shall be made to the Academic Regislrar on the prescribed form and shall be accompanied by the prescribed fee.
(3) A review of the result shall include a check:
(a) thatallrequiredpartsoftheassessmenthavebeenincluded in the final detennination of the result;
(b) that the content of examination scripts has been fairly considered, including, where possible, a review of marks awarded by the examiners; and
(c) that all marks contributing to the final grade have been correctly weighted and their total accurately obtained
but shall not include any review of earlier assessments which have been made available to the candidate on a continuing basis throughout the subject.
(4) If the Faculty Board,on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned or the representative of that Head, changes the result following review, the fee shall be refunded to the candidate.
Special Consideration
13. (1) A candidate who claims that:
Ca) study during the year or preparation for an ex.amination;
'"
EXAMINATIONS
(b) auendance at or performance in an examination
has been affected by illness, disability or other serious cause, may report the circumstances in writing, supported bymedical or other appropriate evidence to the Academic Registrar and request that they be taken into account in the assessment of the examination results of that candidate. Such request shall be made on the prescribed fonn.
(2) A request made pursuant to sub-rule (l)(a) shall be submitted by the candidate within seven days after any absence arising from. the illness or eventon which the request is based, or such longer-period as theDean of the Faculty in which the candidate is enrolled may accept.
(3) A request made pursuant to sub-rule (1)(b) shall be submitted by the candidate not later than three days after the date of the examination or within such further period as the Dean of the Faculty in which the candidate is enrolled may permiL
(4) Where a candidate is personally unable to take the action prescribed under this Rule, some other person may take such action on behalf of that candidate.
(5) The Academic Registrar may call for such other evidence in respectofthecandidate'srequestasmayhereasonablerequired.
(6) A candidate who is granted special consideration may be required to attend a further examination or to undertake further assessment to determine a result.
PART 4· FORMAL WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS
Responsibility
14. The Academic Registrar shall be responsible for the adminislration and superv ision of the fonnaJ written examinations of the University.
Timetable for formal written examinations
15. (I) The Academic Registrar shall publish a timetable showing when and where formal wrineo examinations will be held and it shall be the responsibility of candidates to attend those examinations prescribed for the subjects in which they are enrolled.
(2) Notwithstanding the previsions of Rule 15(1), where the Academic Registrar considers it justified on religious, conscientious or other grounds, special arrangements may be made to allow a candidate to attend a prescribed examination fOT a subject at a time and place different from that published in the examination timetable.
(3) Subject to the provision of Rule l30)Cb), candidates who fail to attend an examination which is show on the examination timetable will be deemed to have sat for and failed the examination.
Rules for formal written examinations
16. (1) Formal written ex.aminationsshall beconducted in accordance with the following rules:
(a) candidates shall comply with any instructions given by a supervisor relating to the conduct of the examination;
(b) before the examination begins candidates shall not read the examination paper until granted permission by the supervisor which shall be given ten minutes before the start of the examination;
Cc) no candidate shall enter the examination room afterthirty minutes from the time the examination has begun;
(d) no candidate shall leave the examination room during the first thirty minutes or the last ten minutes of the examination;
vii
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION REQUESTS
(e) no candidate shall re-enter the examination room after leavinj it unless during the full pel'iod of absence that candidate has been under approved supervision;
(0 acandidate shall not bring inlotheexaminationroomany bag. paper, book, written material, device or aid whlltSOever, other lhan such as may be specified for the particular examination:
(g) a candidate shall not by any means obtain or endeavour to obtain improper assistance, give or endeavour to give assistance to any other candidate, or commit any breach of good order;
(h) acandidate shall not take from the examination room any examination answer book, any examination paper so marked, graph paper, drawing paper or other material issued for use during the eumination;
(i) no candidate may smoke in the examination room.
(2) The provision of sub-rule (I) may be relaxed:
(a) by the Academic Registrar; and
(b) with the exception of paragraphs (e), (0, (g) and (h) by the supervisor upon the direction of the Academic Registrar or at the discretion oflbe supervisor, provided that the circumslances of anycase in which discretion has been exercised shall be reported in writi ng totheAcademic Registrar immediately following the conclusion of the examination.
PART 5 a OlHER EXAMINA nONS
Responsibility
17. The Head of Department shall be responsible for the administration and supervision of the eXhinations of the University, other than fonnal written examinations, in the subjects offered by the Departmenl
Timetable
18. (1) Where appropriate, the Head of Deparbnent shall publish a timetable showing when and where examinations will be held and it shaJ I be the res(X>nsibility of candidates to aUend those examinations prescribed for the subjects in which they are enrolled.
(2) NotwithstandingtheprovisionsofRule 18(1), where the Head of Department considers it justified on religious, conscientious or other arounds, special arrangements may be made to allow a c;mdidate to attend a prescribed examination for a subject at atimeand pJacedifferentfrom that published in the examination time~ble.
Compliance with Instructlons
19. Candidates shaJl comply with any instructions given by the Head of Department or the supervisor relating to an examination.
Any infri niement of these rules constitutes an offence against discipline.
FINAL EXAMINATION RESliL TS
End of year examination results will be mailed out by late December. Examination resulu for Semester I subjects will be mailed out the week: precedini the commencement of SemeEter 2.
Final examiantion results are also displayed in the Hunter Building Concourse as soon as they become available.
No results will be given by telephone.
REVIEW OF FINAL RESULT
After the release of both Semester I and end of year final examination resulls a student may apply to have a result reviewed. Part 3 of the
viii
University' sExamination Rules specifies procedures relating to Review of Rerult in a subject, for details see page ('Ii) and the necessary applicatioo form. You should read the inslrUctions on the application form before applying foraReview. There is achargeper subject, which is refundable in the event of an error being discovered, However, it should be noted that examination results are released only after careful assessment of slUdenls' performances and that, amongst other things, marginal failures are reviewed before results are released.(see page ix)
SPECIAL CONSlDERA TION REQUESTS
All applications for special consideration should be made on the Application for Special Consideration fonn.
The grmting of Special Consideration could involvea further examination or /ilSsessment held shortly after the formal examination. Any further examination or assessment administered will be by the Department that offered the subject Consequently you must therefore check wltb the Departmmt that offered the subject to .ascertaJn that Department's requirements. Yousbould also watch the"Deparlment'snooceboard for further advice concerning Special Consideration.
Application Forms may be obtained from your FaCUlty Omce, Student Division Enquiry Counter, Student Health Service, Student Counselling Unit and Examinations & Services Counter, Hunter Building.
Part 3 of the University's Examination Rules specifies procedures relating toSpecial Consideration Requests, for details see page (vi) and the necessary application fonn. You should read the inslructions on the application form before applying for Special Consideration.
STATEMENTS OF ACADEMIC RECORD
If you wish to he issued with a statement of your academic record, you must complete the appropriate application form and lodge it with the University Cashier along with the appropriate fee (see page x). The statement will be mailed out as soon as it becomes available, to the nominated address. Applicanls should allow adequate time for this to occur. Computer produced statements can normally be mailed within a week, St.ltements involving pre 1979 records might be expected to take longer to produce. Indebted applicants must dear their debt before statements can be Issued. Application fonns may be obtained from the Student Division Enquiry Counter, Chancellery Building and the Examination and Services Counter, Hunter Building.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
The University has adopted Rules Governing Unsatisfactory Progress which are set out below.
Students who become liable for action under the Rules will he infonned accordingly by mail after the release of the End of Ye .. examination results and will be informed of the procedure to be followed if they wish to 'show cause'.
Appeals Biainst exclusion must he lodged together with Enrohnent Application forms by Wednesday 6 January 1993.
The Faculty'S progress requirements are set out elsewhere in this volume.
RULES GOVERNING UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
Applk.Uon of Rules
1. These Rules shall apply 10all students of the University except those who we candidates for a degree of Master or Doctor.
Interpretation
2. In these Rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates or requires:
"the Committee" means theAdmi ssions and Progression Committee of the Academic Senate as constituted from time to time.
''Dean''meanstheDean of the Faculty in whiclt astudentis enrolled.
''Board'' means the Faculty Boa-d of the Faculty in which the
student is enrolled.
Termination of Enrolment by Head of Departmmt
3. (1) A student's enrolmenlin a subject may be terminated by the Head of the Department offering that subject if that student does not. maintain a rate of progreSE considered satisfactory by the Head of the Department. In determining whether a student is failing to maintain satisfactory progress the Head of Department may take into consideration such f~tor& as unsatisfactory attendanceorfailure tocomplete ata satJ~factory standard academic or professional componenls specIfied for
the subject.
(2) The enrolmentofa student in a subject shall nothe terminated pursuant to Rule 3(1) of these Rules unless that stu~nt has been given prior written notice of the intention to con~lder the matter with brief particu! ars of the ground s for so domg, and has a1~ been given a reasonable opportunity to make representations either in person or in writing or both.
(3) A student whose enrolment in a subject is tenninated under Rule 3(1) of these Rules may appeal to the Board which shall
determine the matter.
(4) A student whose enrolment in a subject is tenninated under this Rule shall be deemed to have failed the subject
Review of Performance by Board
4. (1) A Boord may review the academic performance of a student who does nolmainlain a ra1e of progress considered satisfactory
by the BoW'"d and may determine:
(2)
(3)
(a) that the student be pennitted to continue the course;
(b) that the student be permitted to continue the course subject to such conditions as the Board may decide;
(c) that the student be excluded from further enrolment:
(i) in the course; or
(ii) in the course and any other course offered in the
Faculty; or
(iii) in the Faculty; or
(d) if the Board considers its powers todeal with the case are inadequate, that the case be referred to the <:>mmittee together with a recommendation for such actJon as the
Board considers appropriate.
Before adecision is made und er Rule 4( 1 )(b), (c) or (d) of these Rules, the student shall be given an opportunity to m~e representations with respect to the matter either in person or ID
writing or both,
A student who has made representations to a Board may appeal against any decision made under Rule 4(1)(b) or (c) of these Rules to the Committee which shall determine the maUer.
Reference to Committee
5. Where the proaress of a student who is enrolled in a combi~ed course or who has previously been excluded from enrolme~t m another course or Faculty is considered by the Bowd to be unsatISfactory, the BOIlfd shall refer the matter to the Committee. toaether wi~ a recommendation for such action as the Board conSiders appropnate.
Hearing of Appeals by Committee
6. (I) An appeal made by astudenttotheCommiuee pursuantto~ule 4(3) of these Rules shall be in such fonn as may be preSCrIbed by the Committee, and shall be made within fourteen (14) days
CHARGES
from the date of posting to the Etudent of the notification of the decisiOll or such further period as the Committee may accept.
(2) lnhe.inganappealtheCommineemaylakeintoconsideratiOIl anycircumstances wb.atsoever, including matlennotprevlou~1y raised andmayseeksucbinfonnationasitthin.k:sfitconcermng the ~ic record of the appe1Iant and the making of the detennination by the Board. Neither the Dean nor the sub..
Dean shall act as a member of the Committee on the hearing of
any such appeal. (3) The appellant and the Dean. or the Dean's nominee shaH have
the right to be he.d in person by the Committee.
(4) The Committee may confinn the decision made by a&.d~ may substitute for it any other decision which the Board IS empowered to make pursuant to these Rules,
Committee ConslderaUon of Referred Cases
7. (1 ) The Committee shall consider any case refmed to it by a Board
and may:
(2)
(3)
(a) make any decision which the Board itself could have made pursuant to Rule 4(1 Xa), (b) or (c) Qfthese Rules;
'" (b) excludethestudentfromenrolmentinsuchothersubjects,
courses or Faculties as it thinks fit; or
(c) exclude the student from the University.
The Committee shall not make any decision pursuant to Rule 7(1)(b) or(c) of these Rules unless ithas first given ~e student the opportunity to be heard in person by the Committee.
A student may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor against any decision made by the Committee under this Rule.
Actlon by VlceaCbanceilor and Council
8. Where there is an appeal against any decision of the Conunittee made under Rule 7 of these Rules, the Vice-Chancellor may refer the m.ner back to the Committee with a recommendation or shall arrange for the appal to be heard by the Council. Th~ Counc~ may confum the decision of the Committee or may substitute for It any other decision which the Committee is empowered to make pursuant
to these Rules.
Reaenrolment
9. (I) A student who has been excluded from further enrohnent in a Faculty may enrol in acourse in another Faculty only with the pennissionoftheBoard ofthal Faculty and on such conditions
as it may detennine.
(2) A student who has heM excluded from further enrohnent in any course, Faculty of front the University Dt,Ider the~ Rules may apply for pennission to enrollherein agam, provIded that in no case shall such re-enrolment commence before the expiration of the period of exclusion. A decision on such
application shall be made:
(a) by the Bo.d, where the student has been excluded from a single course or a single Faculty; or
(b) by the Committee, in any other case,
Appeal Alalnst ReJ«tlon ofRe--enrolment Appllcatlon
10. (I) A student whose application to enrol pursuant to Rule 9(1) or 9(2Xa) of these Rules is rejected by a Board may appeal tothe
Committee.
(2) A studtmt whose application to enrol pursuant to Rule9(2)(b) of these Rules is rejected by the Committee may appeal to the
Vice-Chancellor.
SCHOLARSHIP HOLDERS AND SPONSORED Sl1JDENTS
CHARGES
The General ServlcesCbarge ( details below) is payable by all students.
In 1993, a fees and charges notice will be sent to continuing students in late January and to commencing students in mid February.
Students are expected to pay charges al any Commonwealth Bank. The last date for payment of charges with the Commonwealth Bank is 19 March 1993.
All other payments should be made directly tothe University by cheque, or in person to the Cashier, level 2, Chancellery.
1. General ServJces Charge Per Annum
(a) Students Proceeding to a Degree or Diploma $264
Plus Students joining Newcastle University Union for the first time
(b) Non-Degree Students Newcastle University Union Charge
(c) EXlerM/ Siudents
$35
$137
$37
The exact amount must be paid in full by the prescribed date.
2. Late Charges
Where the Fees and Charges NOlice is lodged with all charges payable after the 26 February 1993
3. Other Charges
(a) Examination under special supervision
(b) Review of examination results, per subject
(c) Replacement ofRe-enrolment kit
(d) Replacement of Student Card
(e) Statement of Matriculation Status
for non-member of the University
(f) Replacement of lost or damaged Testamur
(g) Academic Transcripts
(i) First copy
(ii) Second Copy
(iii) Each additional copy
Note:
$50
$15 per paper
$25
$10
$5
$10
$30
$10
No charge
$1
(i) Graduands will be providcd with two copies of their transcript free upon notification of e1igibility to graduate.
(ii) Transcripts will be issued on request free of charge to other tertiary education institutions ..
4. Indebted Students
All debts outstanding to the University must be paid before enrolment can be completed- part payment of total amount due will not be accepted.
IDGHER EDUCA nON CONTRIBUTION SCHEME (HE.C.s.)
The Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) requires students to contribute towards the cost of their higher eduction. Each semester a student's HECS liability is calculated according to his or her Student Load. The liability for an 80 credit point full-time load in 1993 is $2328.00. Student Loads are calculated as at the census date each semester i.e. 31st March in Semester One and 31st Augustin Semester Two. Withdrawn subjects effective on or after the census dateand failed subjects incur HEes liability.
Some courses are exempt from HECS charges and some students are exempt. Exemption from payment of the Higher Education Contribution (HEC) applies to:
afee-paying student in a "fees-approved postgraduate award course"
a student in a ''basic nurse education course"
a "full-fee·paying overseas student"
a "student who has paid the Overseas Student Charge"
a "fully sponsored overseas student"
a student in an "enabling course"
a studmt in a "non-award" course
a student who has been awarded "a HECS postgraduate scbolarsh ip"
Basic Nurse education courses will not be exempt from HECS after 1993. Currently enrolled students continuing their studies in such a course will also be liable for HECS in 1994 and in subsequent years.
HECS is administered as part of the enrolment process. Students commencing a new course must select one of three sections on the HECS Payment Options form.
On enrolment students must do one of the following:
(a) Elect to pay up-front which would require payment of 75% of the contribution for the semester, with the balance to be paid by the Commonwealth. Students electing to pay up-front will be asked to pay at the CQlnmencement of each semester.
(b) Defer their HEC and elect to pay through the taxation system, in which case they must either provide a tax file number or apply for a tax file number as part of their enrolment. Institutions are required to ensure that the information given by students of their tax file number application is the same as that on their enrolment form.
Students electing to defer their HEC and pay through the taxation system are notrequired tomake a payment towards their contribution until their taxable income reaches a minimum threshold level. Por the 1991-92 financial year the minimum threshold was $27,098. This amount will be increased each year.
(c) As front 1993 NewZeaJandcitizens residing inAustrai iafor less than two years and permanent residents of Australia whose term address is overseas will berequired to pay their HECS contribution up-front. The 25% discount applies.
New Zealand citizens living outside Australia and enrolled in external courses at Australian institutions should be treated in the same way as permanent residents of Australia whose semester address is overseas and be required to pay up-fronl
The requirement to pay up-front will apply to both commencing and continuing students.
(d) Provide evidence of exemption from the HECS.
All students enrolling in a new course must complete a Payment Options fonn selecting one of the above three options. Deferred or Up-front re-enrolling students will retain their elected payment option (excluding sbJdents falling into category (c) above). A new Payment Options form must be completed if sbJdents transfer courses or wish to change their payment options. Students who wish to change their Payment Option in any semester must do so before the census date forth81 semester. Changes to the Up-front option will not be permitted after the due date for payment of Up-front accounts (check with HECS Office for cut-off dates).
FAILURE TO PAY UP-FRONT ACCOUNTS BY THE DUE DATE OR CHANGE TO THE DEFERRED OPTION BEFORE THE CENSUSDATEWlLLLEADTOAUTOMATICCANCELLATION OF ENROLMENT.
LATE PAYMENTS WILL NOT BE PERMItTED.
Please contact the HECS Office if further infonnation on HECS is required.
LOANS
Students who do not have sufficient funds ~ r:ay the ?eneral ~erv~ Charge should seek a loan from their bank, buddmg society, cred It UDlan
or other financial institution.
An application for a loan from the student loan fimds is possible when no other help is available. Appoinbnents for loan from these funds must be made before the 26 February, 1993 to avoid th~ a,ddition of a late fee. Student loan funds are available for other essenbal needs. ConlSCt the Student Support Omcer, Ms Annette Rudd, pbone (049) 216467 to
arrange an appointmenL
REFUND OF CHARGES
Arefund of the General Services Charge paid on enrolment wi'.l bemade when the student notifies theStudentDivision of a complete withdrawal
from studies under the following conditions:
(i) when a student notifies the University of a complete withdrawal from studies by the following dates, a refund will apply:
Notification on or before 31 March 100% refund
Notification by the end of first semester 50% refund
Notification after the end of first semester Nil refund
(H) when a student solely enrolled in a program of studi~ offered QD!l in Semester2 notifies the University of a complete Withdrawal from studies by the following dates, a refund will apply:
Notification on or before 31 August
Notification after 31 August
100% refund
Nil refund
provided that in exceptional c~c~~stances the Bursar may vary these provisions in the case of indiVidual students.
The $35 joining fee is not refundable.
A refund cheque will be mailed toa student or if applicable, a sponsor.
Any change of address must be notified.
A refund will not be made before 31 March.
CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING
Matters to do with traffic and pW'king on the campus are gove~ed ~y traffic and parking rules approved under the authority of the Umverslty
Council. These rules determine that it is a privilege to bring a vehicle onto ~e Un iversity csmpus and th at this priv ilege i s subject to traffic an~ ~lDg rules. The rules identify the conditions which govern the ~lDgmg of vehicles onto the campus, parting and movement of v~tllcl~, and matters to do with breaches and enforcemenL The underlytng rab~nale of these rules is to ensure the safe and orderly movement and ~~kmg of vehicles on the campus for the benefit of students, staff and VISitorS and to protect the University's physical environment and landscape.
Essentially the rules require that persons who seek to bring a m~tor vehicle, including motorbikes, onto the campus apply for. a vehicle parking permit. In so doing, the applicant undertakes to abide by. the traffic and parking rules and are automatically.subject to pre~bed penalties for infringements. It is importMt toreali~ ~at the granttng of a parking permit does not carry with it an autotnatlC fight to ~k on the campus. The University hasa seri~s under supplyof carpatkmg spaces and frequently it will not be posSIble to park on the campus.
The issue of a parking permit only entitles a member of the University
to park in a properly designated and m.ar"ed ~t car park ~pace to the extent that such a space is available. It IS essenllal that vehl~les W'e nOi. parked on grassed W'eas, footpaths, roadways and the like for the protection of the University'S landscape and for the safety of students,
staff and visitors.
Alternative parking to be utilised when on cam~us car parks.are full. is available on both sides of University Drive (subJCct tocompltance With
BANKING
traffic regulations in regard to bus stops, distance from pedestriSl
crossings, roundabouts etc).
The University is working with public transport au.thorilleS to im~ve the level of IJ8Dsport to the University ~ as to ~1~l8te ~ necessity for staff and ItUdmls to use priva&e vehicles. It IS m the mterests of all members of the University community, and to the d~elopment and mailltenaDCe of the campus busb.1and setting, to dramatically redu:e ~ numbers ofvehicles being brou.ghton to the ClWPUS, as .wen as asSlSr:mg
with the broader issues of air pollution, traffic congesbon and the like.
Students .e urged to coosider alternative modes of transport. such as blic ................... , and greater use ofbicycles to takeadvmtage of the new
po "--r-'. .L._ U· .'Y Car nnnlino arrmgements are also cycleways servtng ""'" mversl. r-- "0 •
encouraged and your Student Representative Council (SRC) can asSist
you in this regard. The traffIC md parking regulations are stated in full in ~ Universi~'s Calender Volume I. The scale of penalties for rraf(IC and parking infringements as contained in the rules are as follows:
(a) exceeding the spwilimiton University roads ......................... $30
(b) failing to stop when signalled to do so by an Attendant (patrol) ..................................................................... $30
(c) refusal to provide informalion requested by an Attendant (patrol) ............... " ...... " ....... " ................................... $30
(d) failing to obey instructions given by an 3 Attendant (patrol) ..................................................................... $ 0
(e) illegal parking: (D parking on University roadways ................................... $15
(ii) parking on footpaths ................................ · .. · ...... · .... · .. ·· .. $15
(iii) parking on areas marked by sign ................................... $50
(iv) parking in a way that may risk injury to others ............. $50
(v) not displaying parking penn it ....................................... $30
(vi) parking In a restncted area ....... " ............................. $15
(0 parking in an area reserved for handiCapped person . ""'.' ...... $.50
(g) any other breach of the traffic and parking rules ......... " ........... $1 0
The penalty will be imposed:
(a) on the spot by an infringement notice being put on the vehicle; or
(b) by sending an infringement notice by ordinary prepaid post. to the registered person respcnsible for the vehicle, or to the regIStered
owner of the vehicle.
Any objection to the imposition of ~e ~Ity must include full details of the grounds on which the obJecuon IS based and be lodged in writing with the Director PropertyService.s within 14 d~ys oflbe date the infringement notice shows the breach as havmg been
committed. The Director Property Services, after considering an objection,shall
either reject it or waive the penalty.
Penalties must be paid:
(a) within 28 days of the date the infringement notice shows the breach
as having been committed: or
(b) where applicable, within 28 days ofnotification,utat any objection has been rejected by the Director Property Services.
Any queries in relation to traffic and parking matlers may be referred to the Security patrol Office, located in the foyer of the Great Hall an~ ~mt the Property Services Office, located in the foyeroftheHunter BUI~dmg. Applicalion forms to bring a vehicle onto the campus are also available
from these offices.
xi
LOST PROPERTY
The traffic and partinS rules apply to all University campus locatio-ns. It ~ould be noted, however, that no University parking facilities are available at the Conservatorium of Music campus in Auckl8lld Street. Newcastle.
BANKING
I) Commonwealth Bank
The University of Newcastle branch of the CommonweaUh Bank is located on the pathway between the Chancellery and the Hunter Gymnasium (south oflhe Hunter Union. An aulOmatic teller machine is located outside. Hours ofOpenjng:
Monday to Friday 9.30am - 4.00pm Friday 9.30am - 5.00pm
JI) Credit Union
The main branch afthe Universities Credit Union is located with the Student Union on the fonner University side of the campus,
Hours of Opening
Monday to Friday 9.00am -4.00pm
An agency is located in the Hunter Union Building.
CASHIER The cashiers' office on-campus in located on First Floor Chancellery Building_ Credit card facoilities are Dot available. I
HolUs of Opening (a) During Semester
(b) Vacation Period
1D.00am - 4.00pm (Open during lunch break)
1O.00am - 12.3Opm 2.00pm - '.00pm
CHAPLAINCY SERVICE
The Chaplaincy Centres are located in the temporary buildings adjacent totheCornputerTeaching Building and alsoin Room A187 in theHunter Building near the Huxley Library.
Pastoral and spiritual care is available from the following denominational chaplains:-
Anglican Catholic
Baptist Presbyterian
Uniting Church Assembly of God
Russian Orthodolt Seventh Day Adventist
Both centres are open Monday to Friday 8.30 am - 5.00 pm.
The Central Coast Campus and the Conservatorium of Music are both covered on a regular basis.
COMMUNITY PROGRAMMES
The Department of Community Programmes offcrs 8 wide range of courses for .the. general public. Of parti cular interest to in lending students are the ~ndgJng Courses conducted during February and the Open FoundatIOn Course for mature age entry PUflXlses which commences in March.
St~dents interested in Bridging or preparatory courses should telephone, wnte oreall at the Department's office in RoomLG49, Lower Ground Floor, McMul.lin Building. The Department is also able to respond to requ~ts to tailor: make Co~s, Workshops, Seminars and Training Sessions for particular clients in virtually any subject area. Telephone. (049) 216017.
CONVOCATION
All students of the University of Newcasl1e become members of C~v~ion upon graduating. Convocation is the graduate body of the Umverslty of Newcastle and, under the provisions of the University of
xii
Newcastle Act, is one of the constituent parts of the Un iversity. By virtue of the Act and the University By-Laws, Convocation has a voice in the government of the University through its right to elect members of Council and the Standing Committee's right to direct COOlmunication with the Council and the Senate. Through its membership of the Australi. University Graduate Conference, Convocation also cooperates with its counterpart& in other universities to give effective eqll'e8sion of opinion on matters of concern to graduates.
The Coovocation Officer may be contacted on (049) 216464.
CO·OP BOOKSHOP
The Co-op Bookshop is located within the Shortland Student Union. It stocks textbooks, general publications, computer discs and Olher software audio-visual cassettes. Discounts are available to Co-op members. '
Hours of Opening
Monday, Wednesday and Friday
Tuesday and Thursday
First two weeks of semester
LOST PROPERTY
9.00 ... - 5.00pm
9.00"" - 6.00pm 8.30 ... - 7.00pm
Lost property may be collected from, or deposited at two locations on campus:
(a) Patrol Office, Great Hall between 9.00am - 4.00pm
(b) Propeny Services, ClIO, between 9.00am - 4.00pm (Hunter Building)
It is suggested that you telephone in advance.
NOTICEBOARDS
Students wishing to post notices within the glass-fronted locked noticeboards should contact Mr D. Heggan, Property Services in the Hunter Building.
POST OFFICE
Offers all normal postal services EXCEPT interviews for passpons.
HOUTS of Ope1lillg
(a) During Semester
(b) Vacation Period
Monday to Friday
Monday to Friday
PUBLIC TRANSPORT
9.00 ... - 5.00pm
9.ooam -1 2.3c.pm I.3Opm - 5.00pm
The State TransitAuthorityprovides acomprehensive bus service to the University front the following locations:
Newcastle (Parnell Place), Newcasl1eRegional Museum, The]unction, Tighes Hill, Broadmeadow, Adamstown, Larnbton Park, Mayfield, Waratah, ]esmond, Wallsend, Rankin Park, Cardiff, Charlestown, Belmont.
Bus Timetables are available from the Student enquiry counter in the ground floor of the Chancellery Building.
STUDENT INSURANCE COVER
Studentplan Insurance is an w:.cidentpolicy which is administered by the Sports Union/Sport and Recreation Office on behalf of American Insurance Underwriters (A.J.U.). This policy provides benefits for death, disabilit~, hospitalization, loss of wages and medical expenses (these are reslncted to injuries sustained whilst engaged in campus activities). The injury must be the result of a 'fortuitous act' (i.e. due to chance). It does not cover disability arising from sickness or disease. There is a $20.00 excess applying to each accident, not each claim. This excess is deducted from the first pan-claim only.
Student plan can cover:
i) Students who are members of the Sports Union (this does not include students who have deferred study). Membership of the Spons Union is included in the General Service (barge;
i i) Active life and active associate members of the Insured organisation;
iii) Staff of the Sports Union and staff of the University who join the
Sports Union.
For further information and claim forms, please contact the Sports and Recreation office dwing business hours on (049) 215584.
UNIVERSITY COMPUTING SERVICES
The University of Newcastle has made use of computers in research and teaching and for administrative purposes since the first computer was
installed in October 1963.
Computers are widely used in teaching wherever this is appropriate. Some of these are managed by the teacbing departments while others are maintained and supported by University Computing Services in puhlicly
available locations.
The central computers and many others are connected to the University Information Network (UIN) which in tum is connected totheAustralian Academic and Research Network (AARNet) and to the worldwide
Internet.
UniversityComputingServicesprovidesandsupportscomputingservices for most activities of the university: for academic departments, through the HelpDesk and Computer Laboratories Manager, for administrative divisions and for service units. Services are provided through central computers, through a campus network with extemallinks, and through assistance to users ofboth the central computers and distributed desk-top
computers.
There are more than 800 terminal connections directly to the campus network, allowing connection to various computers, both in University Computing Services and in Universitydepartments. A number of School and Departmental computers and networks are also connected to the
lJIN. Students are given access to central V AXNMS and UNlX computers and centrally located microcomputers (Apple Macintosh and IBM PCs or 'clones') and to departmental and special purpose CQlnputers as appropriate to their course of study. Many packages are available such as the NAG numerical libr8J}', statistical programs such as Minitab, SAS, SPSS-X and BMDP and word-processing. All students are free to use the electronic News and Mail services for on-campus use. AARNet access is only available to course work students when specifically
requested by course lecturers.
Students enrolling in a subject for which acomputer connect-time quota has been established are automatically given accounts on the cenlral computers. Research students (Research Masters and PhD) are not limited on connect-timeand are allocated disk quotas appropriate to their
wOO<. The computers nonnaIly operate continuously, with terminal rooms open from 08:00 to 21:00 on weekdays (and in the Computing and Information Sciences Building from 09:00 to 17:00 at weekends for
most of the academic year).
University Computing Services aim to provide a high quality modem computing environment for students. Use of this together with their experience in using School and Departmental computers, will ensure graduates have acquired broad and valuable computing experience.
Students are encouraged to seek guidance in computer use fr<m their lecturers, but the ues Help Desk also offers assistance to all users.
UNIVERSITY LmRAR1ES
Condltloos orUse
The University accepts no responsibility for any damage to or loss of data arising directly or indirectly from use of these facilities or for any cotlStIqUeatiaJ loss or damage. The Univel'sity makes no warranty, express (]I' implied regarding the computing services offered, or their
fitness for.y particular purpolle.
The University cannot guarantee the cooftdentiaJity of any information stored en any University computer or transmitted through its network. For the purpose of managing the resources, it may be necessary for the
University to monitor ftles and usage.
The University's liability in the event of any loss or d.:nage shall be limited to the fees and charges paid to the University for the use of the computing facilities which resulted in the loss or damage.
You may use only those facilities which have been authorised for yoot' use. If access is protected by a password, you are not to make this password available to Olhers. You may not use any account set up for another user, nor may you altetnpt to find out the password of .other user. This applies both to facUities within the University and to any accessible using the University'S network.
You may only use authorised facilities for authorised purposes. For example, facilities made available for teaching may not be used for
private gain.
You must be aware of the law of copyright as it affects computer softw.-e. Softwaremust not becopied except with the eqwess permission
of the copyright owner.
You may not attempt to copy infonnation belonging to other users (whether they be staff, students or other users) without their express
pennission.
You may not attempt to interfere with the operation of the Universitys' computers or any other facilities accessed by use of the Universitys'
computers or network.
You may not attempt to subvert the secwityofany of the Universitys' computing facilities or any others accessible by use of the Universitys'
facilities.
You maynOl. use the Universitys' computing facilities to send obscene,
offensive, bogus, barassing or illegal messages.
You may grant access to your own files by other users by setting
appropriate protection.
You may access computing and communications facilities on other siles only with their pennission and in a manner consistent with these terms.
You must, on request by an authorised member of staff, produce evidence ofidentity (for ell:ample by student card) when using University
computing facilities.
You are required to infonn the University of any breach of these Tenns (for example, if you become aware that someone else bas used your
account).
You must abide by any relevant instructions given by the Director or the Director's delegated officer. Such instructions may be issued by notice displayed in the vicinity of computing facilities, by letter, by electronic
communicalion, in pezSOl1 or otherwise.
UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES As a member of the University of Newcastle, you are entitled to use the Auchmuty, Huxley, Conservatorium and Central Coast Libraries as well
as the libraries of the teaching hospitals.
Aucbmuty Library
Located adjacent to the ShOftland Union, the Auchmuty Library is the main library on the Callaghan campus. It supports the teaching and research requirements of the F acw ties of Arch itecture, Arts, Ecomomics
xiii
UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES
and Commerce, Education, Engineering, Medicine, Science and Mathematics and Social Sciences. It holds an extensive range of government publications, microforms, audiovisual media, archival materials and a Rare Book Collection. Specialist services are provided in Biomedicine, Law, and audiovisual media.
Otberservicesinclude:Loans,ShortLoans,CD-ROMs,OnlineSearching, Reference Service, Inter Library Services, Archives.
The Sbort Loan Col lectJon contains materials in high demand: srudents may borrow these for restricted periods.
The Biomedical Reading Room houses books, serials, pamphlets and reference mater"ial in Biological Sciences and Medicine; i.e. within the classification ranges 016.57-016.619 and 570-619. It also includes a special area, Ie Medical Reserve, which holds a variety of resources and equipment supporting the Faculty of Medicine's innovative and highly resource-dependent curriculum.
Collections of resources are also maintained in seven country centre hospitals for the use of students in clinical learning stages: Taree, Tamworth, Gosford. Maitland, Orange, Usmore and Dubbo. There is a formal agreement between the University and theArea Health Board on the operation of the Gardiner Library Service under which registered usersofthcAuchmutyandGardinerLibrariesenjoycompletereciprocity.
The Law Reading Room houses books, serials. and primary law materials including law reports, acts, bills and regulations.
The Audiovisual section includes computer-based multimedia.
Furthec information and assistance can be obtained at the Auchmuty Library Reference Desk, 'phone 215851,
Huxley Ubrary
Located in the Hunter Building, this Library supports the teaching and research requirements of lhe Faculties of Health Sciences, Nursing, Education and Art, Design and Communication. The Library has an extensive collection of audiovisual media and curriculum material and receives all publications from the NSW DepanmentofSchool Education.
Other services include: Loans, Reference Service, CD-ROMs, Online searching, Inter-Library Services, Eltterna! SrudiesService, ShortLoans. Borrowers may have access to the Short Loan Collection for restricted periods.
Furtherinformation and assistance can beobtained attheHuxley Library Reference Desk, 'phone 216453.
Newcastle Conservatorlum of Music Ubrary
The Library contains a collection of books, serials, scores, CDs, and sound recordings, It is located at the Newcastle Conservatorium of Music, on the comer of Gibson and Auckland Streets, in the city.
Cturently only students and staff of the Conservatorium of Music can borrow from its Library. This includes Music Education students enrolled on the Callaghan campus.
Further information can be obtained by contacting the Librarian on 294133.
Central Coast Campus Ubrary
The Library has a small but growing collection of books, serials and audiovisualmediawhichsupporlste&ehingprogrammesinArts,Business, Social Sciences and Education.
Further infonnation can be obtained by ringing (043) 622077.
GardIner Ubrary Service
There are lhree separate libraries within the service: the John Hunter Hospital Branch, the Royal Newcastle Hospital Branch and tho.'! Mater
xiv
Hospital Branch. The specific opening hours for these libraries will be published through NEWCA T and the appropriate library guides.
FW1ber information can be obtained by ringing 21 3779.
Borrowing/Identification Cards
Students need an ideotificatioo c.d to borrow. Please remember to
caTy your c.d with you at all times if you wish to borrow CI' use li brary facilities. If books are borrowed 00 your card by anyone else, you are responsible for them. Report any lost card to the Loans Desk staff immediatelytopreveot unautboriseduse. Replacementcards are available for $5.00 &om the Student Division Office in the Chancellery.
Borrowlq Rtgbts
For the details of loan conditions students should refer to the Library Guide and the various handouts published at the beginning of each year.
Books must be returned to the Library from which they were borrowed. A fineofS2.00per item is levied when material istwodays overdue. The fine will increase by 50 cents per day per item until the material is returned. Borrowingrighls are also withdrawn. Iflibrary material is lost OI"damaged, thereplacernentcost, plus aprocessing fee, will becharged.
Access to Information
Library facilities include the computerised catalogue NEWCA T, which provides direct access to infonnation about materials held in the Auchmuty, Huxley, Conservatorium. Central Coast and Area Health Libraries. The Aucmnuty and Huxley Libraries also hold databases on CD-ROM to enable students and staff to {rod journal articles in their subject areas. The print versions of other indexes are available in the Reference Collection for manual searching. Some are on computerised databases available via telecommunication networks. AARNet, the Australian Academic Network, provides access to others.
Photocopying
Photocopying facilities are available in aU University Libraries. The machines .. e operated by magnetic-strip_cards which can be purchased in the Library. Credit for lhe photocopiers can be added to these cards from a dispenser as many times as needed. Users must observe the relevant Copyright Act provisions which are on display near the photocopiers.
InterLibrary Services
This service is available to academic staff, higher degree and hooours/ final year students. Material not held in the University of Newcastle Libraries may be obtained from other libraries within Australia or overseas. Books and serials readily available within Australia should arrive within two weeks. A Fast Track Service is available, at exira cost, for urgent requests.
Disabled Persons
All libraries provideaccess fOl"disabi ed srudents and staff. 80thAuchmuty and Huxley Libraries provide special services fOl" physically disabled and visually impaired library users. Contact librarians in each Library will help with infonnation about the library, parking, lift keys and other facilities such as the Braille Library, a Kurzweil machine which reads aloud from English printed text and access tolarge-print NEWCAT, the University Libraries' online catalogue. Please phone 215851.
Hours of Opening
AUCHMU1Y LmRARY
Term Hours:
Monday to Thursday
8.30arn to 10.00pm
Semester Breaks:
Monday to Friday
Friday Sarurday & Sunday
8.30arn to 7.00pm 1.00prn to 5.00pm
Sarurday & Sunday
UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES
8.30am to 7.00pm
Long Vacation:
Monday to Friday
8.30am to 5.00pm
Library Closed:
!.00pm Ie 5.00pm
Australia Day, Easter except Easter Monday, CbDstmas to New Year
Library Open:
Easter Monday. Anzac Day, Queen' s Birthday, Show Day. Labour Day
HUXLEY LIBRARY
Term Hours:
Monday to Thursday
8.30am to 9.00pm
Semester Breaks:
Wednesday
9.00am to 7.00pm
Long Vacation:
Monday to Friday
9.00am to 5,00pm
Library Closed:
A1I public holidays
Conservatorlum Library
Friday Saturday & Sunday
8.30am to 5.00pm 1.00prn to 5.00pm
Other Days Weekends
9.00am to 5.00pm Closed
Please contact the Library on 294133
Central Coast Campus Ubrary
Please contact the Library on (043) 622077.
t: \l
SECfION FIVE
CHEM323 BIOINORGANIC COORDINATION CHEMISTRY Scp
Prerequisite CHEM221.
Hours 2 Hours oflectures, 1 hour of tutorials/Workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.
Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/asSignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in Ute laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
ConlenJ
Synthesis of complexes of multidentale and macrocyclic ligands; metal-directed reactions and stereoselectivity; metalloproteins and meta11oenzymes; bioelectrochemistry and redox proteins.
Text
No formal text; material to be advised.
CHEM331 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY lOcp
Prerequisile CHEM231.
HOUTS 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
The central theme of this course will be organic synthesis. A survey of important synthetic reactions for functional group transformations and carbon-carbon bond formation with em phasis on the chemo- and stereo- selectivity and mechanisms of these reactions, Systematic approach to synthesis - the discotu1ection/ synthon method. Examples of syntheses and discussion of some literature classics.
Text
As for CHEM231.
CHEM332 HETEROCYCLIC CHEMISTRY
Prerequisite CHEM231.
Scp
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.
Examination One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
The synthesis, reactions and spectroscopic properties of five and six membered heterocycles containing one or two N, 0 and S atoms and their benzo-analogs.
Text
Davies, D.T. 1992, Aromatic Heterocyclic Chemistry, Oxford University Press.
CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRWflONS
CHEM333 ORGANIC REACTION MECHANISM 5cp
Not available in 1993.
CHEM334 IDENTIFICATION OF NATURAL COMPOUNDS Scp
Prerequisite CHEM231.
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.
Exiuninalion One 1 hour paper. 1belaboratory/assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assessment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
ConJenl
The course explores several case studies from the chemical. literature in which the isolation, purification and identification of bacterial, fungal, plant or marine secondary metabolites are reported. Topics such as chromato- graphic methods, spectroscopy, simple procedures and biosynthesis will be discussed in the context of the identification of small organic compounds such as terpenes, steroids and oligopeptides.
TeXl
No formal text; material to be advised.
CHEM33S ORGANIC SPECTROSCOPY
Prerequisite CHEM231
Scp
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials and 3 Hours of workshops/laboratory each week for half a semester.
Examinalion One I hour paper. The laboratory/workshop work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the SUbject.
Contenl
The course will cover appli calions of ultraviolet/visible, infrared, IH and IlC nuclear magnetic resonance and mass spectrometry in the structural elucidation of organic compounds.
Text
Williams, D.H. and Fleming,!. 1988,Spectroscopic Methods in. Organic Chemistry, 4th edn, McGraw-Hill.
CHEM341 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Prerequisiles CHEM241, MATHI02 (or MATHI12)
lOcp
II ours 2 Hours of lectures, I hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
Electrodics - the metal solution interface and structure of the double layer, rates of charge transfer reactions; determination of charge transf erreaclion mechani sms; electrochemical teclmiques; introduction to corrosion.
75
SECfION FIVE
Molecu~ar and Electronic Structure - the use of quantum mechanics and molecular group theory in chemistry; malter waves; free electron and particle in a box; atomic and molecular Schr~ger equation and solutions thereof; symmetry elements and ~Oln.t groups of molecules; symmetry adapted linear combmation of atomic orbitals; HUckel molecular orbital theory. Text
No fannal text; material to be advised.
CHEM342 ELECTROCHEMICAL SOLAR ENERGY CONVERSION Scp
Prerequisites CHEM241, MATHI02 (or MATHI12)
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.
Examination One 1 hour paper. Thelaboratory/assignment work will count for. 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the la~ra1ory/asslgnment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
Electroni~ ~cture of solids; semioonductor/solution interfaces; ~hotoexCUaIJon and charge transfer at semioonductor solution mterfaces;electrochemicalphotogalvanicceUsandelectrochemical photovoltaic cells.
Text
No formal text; material to be advised,
CHEM343 MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY Scp Prerequisite CHEM241.
Hours 2 Hours of lectures, 1 hour of tutorials/workshops and 3 Hours of laboratory work/assignments each week for half a semester.
~ination One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/assignment work will count for. 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the Ja~ory/asslgnment work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
Content
At~m~c and Laser Spectroscopy - spontaneous emission of radlauon; measurement of radiative lifetimes of atoms and molecules; population inversion mechanism in gas lasers.
Photoelectron Spectroscopy - resonant multi photon ionisation photoelectron spectroscopy; He! and Hell photoelectron spectroscopy of diatomic molecules.
Text
No formal text; material to be advised.
CHEM361 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY Prerequisite CHEM261.
lOcp
Hours 2 Hours of lectures. I hour of tutorials, and 3 Hours of laboratorynibrary/workshop/site visits each week for one semester.
76
CHEMISTRY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Exami'~lio? One 2hourpaper. Thelaboralory/library/workshop/ S1~ VISitS ~ count for 20% of the final assessment buta passin thIS work IS a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.
ContenJ
Prin~ples laid down in CHEM261 will be expanded into a more detailed treatment of the chemistry of the hydrosphere, the ~m~sptte:e •. and the geosphere. Specific topics include gas. liqwd-solid mteractions in water chemistry; waler treatment meth~; environmental chemis':r'Y of the geosphere; particulate matter m the almos~here; orgaruc pollutants in the atmosphere and geosphere; envrronmental toxicology; the nature, sources, and chemistry of hazardous wastes.
Text
Manahan, S.E. 1990, Environmental Chemistry, 4th edn, Lewis.
SECfION FIVE
Environmental Science Subject Descriptions seEN subjects are available only to candidates enrolled in the Bachelor of Environmental Science degree.
SCENIOI ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS I IOcp
Hours 3 hours per week for two semesters.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of semester 2-
Content
A case study approach. utilizing the basic sciences to solve introductory environmental problems associated with human activity.
Text
Kupchella.. C.E. and Hyland, M.C. 1989,EnvironmenJai Science AUyn and Bacon, Sydney.
SCEN201 ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGA TlONS II IOcp
Prerequisite SCENIOI.
Hours 3 hours per week for two semesters.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour eXamination at the end of semester 2.
ConJent
A field based study, utilizing analytical techniques from a range of scientific disciplines to investigate and provide solutions to environmental problems associated with human activity.
Text To be advised.
SCEN202 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING AND POLLUTION CONTROL IOcp
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, field work.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Contem
This course examines the environmental planning and development control system in N.S. W. Reference is also made to current pollution control legislation. The emphasis in this course is to understand the system which controls development and the various requirements forenvironmentai assessment for different types of development. A number of local and regional case studies will be examined to illustrate the various legislative requirements.
Text
Farrier, 0.1988, Environmental Law Handbook: Planning and Landuse inN.S.W. Redfern LegaJ Centre, Redfern.
SCEN203 WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT lOcp
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester, 3 days field work.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Content
TItis course examines many of the major environmental issues associated with water resources development in Australia Following an introduction to hydrology and water qUality in the catchment ecosystem, issues covered include reservoir management, eutrophication, dredging, channelization, wetland and floodplain management, irrigation/salinisation and wastewater disposal. Catchment management is introduced as the basis for water resources planning and management.
Text To be advised.
SCEN301 ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECT IOcp
Prerequisite SCEN20t.
Content
An investigation and report of an environmental problem of interest to the student utilizing scientific methodology.
SCEN302 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT TECHNIQUES IOcp
Prerequisite SCEN202.
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2hour paper al the end of the semester.
Content
This course will examine the rationale and methodology of environmental impact assessment (EIA) and wi11look at anumber of impact assessmem techniques in practice. The phenomenon of EIA will bediscussedand current developments inenvironmental management will be examined. Reference will also be made to environmental documentation prepared for various developments.
Texts
Wathem. P.(ed) 1988,Environmentallmpact Assessment, Unwin Hyman.
Beder, S. (ed) 1990. Environmental Impact StatemenlS, Selected Readings. Environmental Education Project. University of Sydney.
Other subjects undertaken in this degree are outlined in the Approved Subjects - Schedule - Bachelor of Environmental Science
77
SEcrION FIVE
Geography Subject Descriptions
GEOGlOI INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY IOcp
Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOG101 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and Science, and for Geography Honours GEQG401 and GEOG402.
HoW's 2 Hours lectures and 2 Hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one day field excursion.
ExaminaJion Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
An introduction to physical geography including meteorology and climate; the influence of geomotphic processes on landforms; weathering, rivers, ice, frost, wind and the sea; the physical, chemical and biological characteristics of the soil and the development of soil profiles; environmental and historical factors that influence plant distribution.
Practical work includes an introduction to the study of climatic data and maps, and the use of topographic maps and aerial photographs for landform analysis.
Tex'
Briggs, D. & Smithson, P. 1985, FundamenJals of Physical Geography paperback Hutchinson.
GEOGI02 INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN GEOGRAPHY IOcp
Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOGI01 and GEOOI02 are prerequisites for the Geography Majorin Arts and Science, and for Geography Honours GE0G401 and GEOG402.
HoW's 2 Hours lectures and 2 Hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one day field excursion.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
An introduction to hUman geography including cultural, population, economic, development and urban geography.
Practical work includes an introduction to elementary statistical data and its presentation by thematic maps in human geography.
GEOG201 METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY
Prerequisite GEOGI01.
HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment.
Content
IOcp
An introduction to statistics and computing for Physical Geography. StUdy of cartographic, photographic and aerial photographic methods in geography.
78
GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
GEOG202 METHODS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY IOcp
Prerequisite GEOGI02.
HoW's 4 Hours perweekforonesemester, up to 2daysfield work.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
Introductory methods appropriate to Human Geography descriptive and inferential statistics will be emphasised and there will bean introduction to computing, survey analysis and research. design.
GEOG203 BIOGEOGRAPHY AND CLIMATOLOGY
Prerequisite GEOG101. IOcp
HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work:.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
COnJent
An introduction to biogeography. Definition and scope of the subject is examined and its interdisciplinary nature emphasised. Ways of describing and analysing the ranges of organisms in space and time are explored. Some emphasis is placed on rainforest for the illustration of principles and for the gaining of field experience.
An introduction to climatology on a synoptic and meso-scale including radiation and heat budgets; precipitation processes; general circulation; agricultural climatology; applied climatology.
Texts
Linacre, E. & Hobbs, 1. 1983, The Australian Climatic Environment, paperback Wiley.
Pears, N. 1985, Basic Biogeography, 2nd edn, Longman.
Williams, I.B. Harden, GJ. et al1984, Trees and shrubs in rainJorestsoJNSW andSoUlhernQueensland University of New England.
Reference
Attenborough, D. 1981, Life on Earth Fontana/Collins.
GEOG204 GEOMORPHOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA
Prerequisite GEOGIOI.
IOcp
/loW's 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work:.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
Rocks and their weathering, structural landforms, soils, slope development and mass movements, fluvial, aeolian and coastal processes and landforms, glacial and periglacial processes and landforms.
SEcrION FIVE
GEOG207 POPULATION, CULTURE AND RESOURCES
Prerequisite GEOGI02.
IOcp
HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of Ute semester.
Conten!
The course examines three themes: popUlation and migration; culture and technology; resource use. These themes are illustrated by historical and contemporary case studies at a variety of spatial sca1es.
Topicsinclude: world and regional population growth; migration, population growth and settlement; culture, plural societies and development; culture, technology and resource use; agricultural origins, diffusion and practices.
GEOG208 CITIES AND REGIONS
Prerequisite GEOG102.
IOcp
HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester 2 days field work.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
The course examines the changing nature and distribution of fundamental aspects of human geography: urban settlement and the mode of production. These themes are iUustrated by case studies of cities, industries, regions and communities.
Topics include: regional growth and industrial development; processes of urban andregional change; urban hierarchies; internal structure of the city; social impact of change; policy and planning.
GEOG301 ADVANCED METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY IOcp
Prerequisites GEOG201 plus either GEOG203 or GEOG204.
This course consists of a 6-day field excursion (i.e. 48 Hours of the 56-hour course) together with 2 Hours per week for 4 weeks).
Examination Progressive assessment.
Con!ent
The course mainly involves a field excursion to demonstrate methods of undertaking research in biogeography and soils in a specific area. The remaining time will bedevoted to methodology and analysis related to the field trip. The field trip will take place between first and second semesters.
GEOG302 ADVANCED METHODS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY IOcp
Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206.
This course mainly involves a major field excursion.
Examination Progressive assessment.
Content
This course involves a major field excursion to investigate a contemporary human geography issue. Methods include survey
GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
design, questionnaire construction, social analysis, computer aided mapping and geographic information systems.
"'NB The field trip is scheduled prior to the beginning of first semester. Please contact the Geography Department as soon as possible.
GEOG304 THE BIOSPHERE AND CONSERVATION
Prerequisite GEOG203.
IOcp
HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester 4 days fieldworL
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2hourpaper at the end of the semester.
ConJen!
Biogeography: Emphasis on plant geography, with examination of both the ecological and historical aspects of the subject. A small herbarium coUection is required of each student.
Biological Conservation: An introduction to the subject, in which the importance of a genetically-based approach is emphasised.
Soils: Processes of soil erosion, soil conservation issues and methods.
Tex.ts
Morgan, R.P.C. 1986,SoilErosionandConservation Longman.
Smith, David 1990, Con!inen! in crisis Penguin.
Williams, J.B. and Harden, G.l. 1980, Rainforest Climbing Plants University of New England.
Reference
Kellman, M.C. 1980, Plant Geography, 2nd edn, Methuen.
GEOG30S CLIMATIC PROBLEMS IOcp
Prerequisite GEOG203 or permission of Head of Department.
HoW's 4 Hours per week for one semester 1 day fieldwork.
Examination Progressive assessment and one2hourpaperatlhe end of the semester.
ConJent
Introduces palaeoclimates in the Pleistocene and Holocene, and the reasons behind climate changes overthose periods. Describes anthropogenic impacts on climate, through air pollution, on local, regional and global scales. Evaluates near-future possible climate variations over the next century.
Text
Bridgman, B.A. 1990, Global Air Pollution Problems Jar the 1990s paperback Belhaven Press.
Recommended Reading
Bradley, R.S. 1985. Quaternary Paleaoclimatology Allen & Unwin.
GEOG306 GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIA AN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE IOcp
Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOO206.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work:.
79
SECTION FIVE
Exmninalion Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
Selected aspects of the population, settlement and land use patterns of Australia. Topics to be studied inc1ude exploratory images, image-makers and distorters, and visions of Australia before 1900; migrationtotheNewWorld;populationof Austtalia 1788-1981; wbanisalion in Australia; agricultumlland use 1788 101914.
GEOG309 SOCIETY & SPACE IOcp
Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork/ project work.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2haur paper at the end of the semester.
Con/em
This course examines the interaction of social groups with each other and with the urban environment. A variety of social groups defined by ethnic and socia-economic status, family structure and gender will be studied. The course will use a variety of methodological approaches to socio-spatial behaviour.
GEOG310 DIRECTED STUDIES IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY 10cp
Prerequisites GROO202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork! project work.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2hour paper at the end of the semester,
Content
This course will nonnally be given by a visiting lecturer - the subject to be advised.
GEOG311 HYDROLOGY
Prerequisites GEOG201 , GEOJ203,
IOcp
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester 2 days fieldwork.
Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
ContenJ
The course examines the distribution of waterin the environment. Most attention will be given to atmospheric moisture, the hydrologic cycle, catchments, runoff, sediment and solute transport and soil water. Water resources are also considered
Texl
Ward, R.C.and Robinson, M. 1989,Principleso/Hydrology, 3rd edn, McGraw-Hill.
GEOG31S PRODUCTION, WORK AND TERRITORY 10 cp
Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206.
Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester 2 days fieldwork.
80
GEOORAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
ExaminaJion Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
The course examines contemporary changes in production, distribution and consumption, by referring to agriculture, manufacturing and seJVices. It focuses on the geography of employment and industrial change; and the evolution of food supply systems.
Topicsinclude: the territorial organisation of production, the role of large corporations, agribusiness, technological change, the farm problem, divisions of labour and the changing nature of work. and the changing role of the stale.
Case studies of impacts of economic change on people and communities are drawn from the Asia-Pacific basin, and from site visits in the Hunter.
Texts
Dicken, P. 1992, Global Shift. 2nd edn, Paul Chapman.
Lawrence, G. 1988, Capitalism and the Countryside, Pluto Press.
GEOG316 DIRECTED STUDIES IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY
Not offered in 1993.
IOcp
SECfION FIVE
Geology Subject Descriptions
GEOLIOI THE ENVIRONMENT IOcp
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures, practicals and field excursions. The course is repeated in the evening in Semester I
ExaminaJion One 3 hour paper, assignments 'and laboratory
practicals
Contem
A lecture, field and practical course which examines in the widest context the evolution of our planet and man's environment. Specific topics are the Earth in space; evolution and dynamics of the planet Earth; evolution of the atmosphere. hydrosphere, biosphere and life; the impact of climatic change; structures produced as a result of plate collision.
Texts Consult lecturers concerned
GEOLI02 EARTH MATERIALS lOcp
Prerequisite GEOL10t The Environment
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures,
practicals and excursions
Examination One 3 hour paper, assignments and practical
examinations.
Content
A course dealing with the features and internal structure of rock forming minerals, the characteristics of volcanoes and their prodUcts, weathering processes and deposi~on~ environmcn~s of sediments. The metamorphism of rocks m dIfferent tectornc settings. energy resources and ore deposits of different origins are
also discussed,
Texts
Press, F. & Siever, R. 1986. Earth, 4th edn, Freeman.
Whitten, D.G.A, 1973,..4 Dictionary a/Geology. Penguin.
GEOL21l OPTICAL MINERALOGY
Prerequisite GEOLt02
Not to count for credit with GEOL201
Scp
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures,
practicals and class assignments
Examination One 2 hour paper and practical examinations
Content
A basic course in crystallography, optical mineralogy and rock
forming minerals.
Texl
Gribble, C.D. and Hall, A.J. 1985, A practical inJroduction to
optical mimraiogy, Allen & Unwin.
GEOL212 INTRODUCTORY PETROLOGY
Prerequisite GEOL211
Advisory prerequisite CHEMt 02
lOcp
GEOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Not to count for credit with GEOL202
Hours 6 Hours per week forone semester, including lectures and practicals
Examinations One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical
examinations
ConJem
An introduction to the petrography and petrology of igneous and sedimentary rocks,
Texi Gribble, CD. & Hall. A.J. 1985, A practical introduction 10
optical mimralogy, Allen & Unwin,
GEOL213 ANCIENT ENVIRONMENTS AND ORGANISMS IOcp
Prerequisite GEOLI02
Not to count for credit with GEOL203
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester, including lectures,
practica1s and field excursions
Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments and practical
examinations
Conlent
A course integrating ancient sedimentary environments with the evolution and morphology of ancient life, stratigraphic relationships and time, The course will be supported by field
excursions in the local area.
Texts Consult lecturers concerned
GEOL214 GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURES AND RESOURCES IOcp
Prerequisite GEOLI02
Not to count for credit with GEOL204
/lours 6 Hours per week for one semester
Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments, practical.
examination
ConJent
A course dealing with geological structures and economic
resources,
Texts
Park, R.G. 1988, Foundations of Structural Geology, 2nd edn,
Blackie.
McClay, K. 1987, The Mapping of Geological Structures Open Univ. Press,
GEOL21S GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE Ilkp
Prerequisite GEOLl02
Not to counl for credit with GEOL205, GEOL206
Hours 14 days field work in two 7 day sessions forane semester (February, week before Semester I, Easter break)
Examination By report
81
SECfION FIVE
Conlenl
(i) Analysis of the southern margin of the Sydney Basin, igneous and metamorphic rocks of the Southern Lachlan Fold Bell. and mapping of a composite pluton. Preparation of reports and supporting tutorials. and lectures.
(ii) Mapping of metamorphosed sheH and trench sequences of the Southern Lachlan Fold Belt; integration and presentation in a report.
Text
McQay. K. 1987. The Mapping a/Geological StructUTes Open Univ.Press.
GEOL216 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE
Prerequisite GEOL215
Not to count for credit with GEOL207
5cp
HOUTS 7 days field work for one semester (September break)
Examination By report
Conlenl
Mapping of low grade metamorphic rocks of the Cobar area; structural and stratigraphic interpretation; relationship of suJ prude rocks to sUUcture and stratigraphy; presentation of results and interpretation in a report.
Text
McQay. K. 1987. The Mapping a/Geological Structures, Open Univ. Press.
GEOL311 IGNEOUS PETROLOGY AND CRUSTAL EVOLUTION IOcp
Prerequisite GE0L312
Not to count for credit with GE0L303, GE0L306
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester
Examination One 3 hour paper and class assignments
Conlenl
Igneous Petrology
Petrology of igneous rocks in relation to the tectonic environment. Changes in igneous petrogenesis throughout time.
Crustal Evolution
Geological evolution of selected Archaean and Proterozoic terrains in Australia: comparisons and contrasts with modem tectonic environments to assess the processes of continental growth throughout geological time.
Text
Wilson, M. 1989, Igneous Petrogenesis, A global tectonic approach., Unwin & Hyman.
GEOL312 METAMORPHIC PETROLOGY IOcp
Prerequisite GEOL212
Not to count for credit with GE0L303, GE0L306
HOUTS 6 Hours per week for one semester
Exmnination One 3 hour paper, c1ass assignments
82
GEOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Conlenl
Petrogenesis of metamorphic rocks; interpretation oftexwres of rocks fanned during prograde metamorphism, ductile shearing and accretion-subduction; processes involved in the production of grain shapes. intergranular and intragranular features.
Texts
Yardley. B.W.D. 1989, An introduction to Metamorphic Petrology, Longman.
Yardley, B.W.D., W.S. MacKenzie et al 1990. Atlas 0/ metamorphic rocks and their texlUTes , Longman.
Yardley, B.W.D., W.S. MacKenzie et all990, Inlroduction to Metamorphic Textures and Microstructures, Edward Arnold Australia
GEOL313 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICS IOcp
Prerequisite GEOL214
Not to count forcredil with GEOL301, GEOL302.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester
Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments
Conlenl
Structural Geology
Geometrical analysis of multiply -defonned terrains; ductile shear zones, kinematic indicators and analysis, strike slip faulting, thrust and extensional tectonics.
Exploration Geophysics
Geophysical techniques - their interpretation and application.
Text
Park, R.G. 1988, Foundations o/Structural Geology, 2nd edn, Blackie.
GEOL314 STRATIGRAPHIC METHODS IOcp
Prerequisite GEOL213
Not to count for credit with GEOL304, GEOL305
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester
Examination One 3 hour paper, and class assignments
Content
Stratigraphic Methods
SLTatigraphic nomenclature; biostratigraphic zones; factors in lithostratigraphy; sLratigraphic breaks; stratigraphic facies changes; catastrophic stratigraphy versus unifonnitarianism; correlation; sLTatigraphic paJaeontology. Types of stratigraphic maps and sections; numerical anaJysis of data strings; numerical map analysis.
Micropalaeontology
Microfossils; their morphology, stratigraphiC dispersal and economic importance.
Geochronology and World Stratigraphy
Principles of age dating; regional geological patterns of selected provinces of the world.
SECTION FIVE
Texts Consult lecturer concerned.
GEOL3IS SEDIMENTOLOGY
Prerequisites GEOL212, GEOL213
Not to count for credit with GEOL305
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester
Examination One three hour paper. class assignments
Content
IOcp
Lithologic associations in relation to the depositional facies of their ancient and recent environments off onnation with emphasis on the genetic connection between the geological setting of a depositional area and its sedimentary flll (basin analysis).
Texts
Reading, H.G. 1986, Sedimenlary environments and/acies ,2nd eOO, Blackwell Scientiflc Publications.
Walker, R.G. 1984, Facies Models, Geoscience Canada Reprint Series I, 2nd edn.
GEOL316 GEOLOGY OF FUELS
Prerequisite GEOL213
Not to count for credit with GEOL305
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester
Examination One 3 hour paper, c1ass assignments
Conlenl
Coal Geology
IOcp
Origin. distribution, clasSification and economic potential of coal.
Petroleum Geology
Origin, source, migration, entrapment and distribution of petroleum and gas; the exploration and exploitation techniques of its detection, evaluation and recovery.
Texts ConSUlt lecturers concerned
GEOL317 RESOURCE AND EXPLORATION GEOLOGY IOcp
Prerequisites GEOL212, GEOL214
Not to count for credit with GE0L301, GEOL306
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester
Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments
Contenl
This course presents fundamental criteria for the f<'nnation and characteristics of metallic ore deposits. An emphasis is placed on an understanding of ore-forming processes in magmatic hydrothermal and metamorphic settings. Laboratory study of material from world- class ore deposits complements the lecture course.
Texts
Evans. A.M. 1987, An Introduction to Ore Geology, 2nd edn, Blackwell.
GEOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Roberts, R.G. & Sheahan, P.A. 1988, Ore Deposit Models Geol.Ass.Canada.
GEOL3IS GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE
Prerequisite GEOL213
5cp
Hours 7 days fleldwork (February. week before Semester 1)
Examination By report
Content
A fleldcourse including core logging, section work, interpretation of data and basin analysis.
GEOL319 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE
Prerequisites GEOL216, GEOL313
HOUTS 10 days fieldwork (July break)
Examination By report
Conlenl
5cp
Structural analysis 0 fa multiply -deformed structural/metamorphic terrain (Broken Hill Block). Evaluation of P-T -t histories in the terrain and integration with tectonic models.
Texts
Consult lecturers concerned
GEOL320 GEOLOGY OF QUATERNARY IOcp ENVIRONMENTS
Prerequisites GEOL213 or GEOG204
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester
Examination One 3 hour paper, class assignments
Conlent
This course will examine the historical basis for contemporary environmental change. The relation of present day environmental processes and resultant changes to the longer, Quaternary record will be examined critically. Topics covered include an overview of the general characteristics of the Pleistocene and Holocene, oceanic and terrestrial palaeoclimatic records, the fossil record and Pleistocene faunal extinctions. Quaternary dating methods, sea-level change and coastal evolution, glaciation, aridity, Malysis of Quaternary sediments, stratigraphic nomenclature and the archaeological record.
Texts Consult lecturer concerned
83
SECfION FIVE
Mathematics Subject Descriptions LEVEL 100 MATHEMATICS SEMESTER SUBJECTS
The usual route for study of Mathematics beyond first year - for example, to obtain a "Major in Mathematics" starts with MATHI02 in first semester, followed by MATHI03 in second semester. However, entry at this point requires an adequate level of knowledge and skill: The minimum level is a mark of at least 120 out of 150 in 3-unit Mathematics at the New South Wales H.S.C. examination.
Any student with less than this level of knowledge or skill has availableMATH111, followed by MATHI12. This combination allows entry to seven of the seventeen level-200 subjects in Mathematics. Such a student could take MA THI03 in alater year to meet the prerequisites for further mathematics subjects.
Note that MATHl11 is not appropriate for a student who has performed substantially above the minimum level for entry to MATHI02/103.
MATH111 MATHEMATICS 111
Prerequisite 2U mathematics at HSC level or equivalent.
Not to count for credit with MATHI0l.
IOcp
Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one semester. The subject is repealed in each semester.
Examination One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment.
Content
Elementary algebra. trigonometry and geometry with applications. Calculus with applications of differentiation and integration. Newton's method. Trapezium and Simpson's Rules. Vector geometry, and its applications.
Texts
University of Newcastle 1993, Maliwmalics 111 TutorialNotes.
Stewart, J. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn. Brooks/Cole.
(This book will also be a useful reference for MATH112, MATH201 and MATH203).
References
Ash, C. and Ash, R.B. 1987. TIu! Calculus Tutoring Book ,IEEE Press.
Dobson, Annette J. & Stokoe, Janet. 1986, Self-Paced 1ntroductory Matlu!matics 3rd edn, ANU Press.
MATH112 MATHEMATICS 112
Prerequisites MATHl11.
Not to count for credit with MATHI02.
10cp
Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one semester. The subject is repeated in each semester.
Examination One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment.
Content
Teclmiques of integration with applications. Differential equations and applications. Calculus of several variables together with applications. Taylor Series expansions. Complex numbers and their applications. Matrix algebra Eigenvalues, eigenvectors.
84
MA TIlEMA TICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Texts
University of Newcastle 1993, TUlorial Notes for MATH 112.
Stewart. 1. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn, Brooks!Cole.
(This book will also be a useful reference for MATH201 and MATH203).
References
Ash, C. and Ash, RB. 1987, The Calculus TUloring Book ,IEEE Press.
Stein, S.K. 1982, Calculus and Analytical Geometry, 3rd edn, McGraw-Hilt
MATHl02 MATHEMATICS 102 IOcp Prerequisites Either a performance of at least 120 out of 150 in 3 U Mathematics at the NSW HSC or equivalent or MATHl11.
Not to count for credit with MATH112.
Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 3 hour paper.
Content
Calculus of functions of a single variable. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Taylor's series. Complex numbers. Differential equalions. An introduC1ion to the calculus OffWlCtiOns of two variables. Vectors. Matrix algebra. Eigenvalues, eigenvectors.
TexiS
University of Newcastle 1993, Tutorial Notesfor MATH1D2.
Edwards, c.H. & Penney. D.E. 1990. Calculus and Analytical Geometry 3rd edn, Prentice-Hall.
Advisory T exJ
Munro, G.P. 1991, Proofs & Problems in Calculus, 2nd edn, Carslaw.
References
Ayres, F. 1974. Calculus Schaum.
Anton, H. 1987. Elementary Linear Algebra, 5th edn, Wiley.
Farrand, S. & Poxton, N.J. 1984, Calculus Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Stein, S.K., 1982, CaLculus and Analytical Geometry, 3rd edn, McGraw-Hill.
Walters, FR.F.C. & Wehrhahn, K. 1989, Calculus 1, 2nd edn Carslaw.
MATHI03 MATHEMATICS 103 IOcp Prerequisites Either a performance of at least 120 out of 150 in 3 unit Mathematics at the NSW Higher School Certificate or "'luivalenlor MATHI02 or MATHIII and MATHII2.
Hours 4 lecture Hours and 2 tutorial Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 3 hour paper.
ConLent
An introduction to numerical mathematics and computing. Vector
SECTION FIVE
geometry and linear algebra: vectorspaces,linear maps. Analysis of the convergence of sequences and series. Power Series. Elementary Theorems of Mathematical Analysis.
Counting, probability, and an introduction to finite mathematical structures.
Text
University of Newcastle 1993, Tutorial notes/or MATH1D3.
Advisory TexJ
Munro, G.P. 1991, Proofs & Problems in Calculus, 2nd edn, Carslaw.
References
Binmore, K.G.1985, Mathematical Analysis, CUP.
Brisley, W. Notes for Linear Algebra Lecture notes in Mathematics, University of Newcastle, No.5.
or A Basis for Linear Algebra.
Chapman, C.RJ. 1973,lntroduction to Mathematical Analysis, Routledge & Kegan Paul.
Giles, J .RReaIAnalysis: An Introductory Course. Lecture notes in Mathematics, Univ.Newcastle, No.6.
Grimaldi, R.P. 1985, Discrete and Combinatorial Matiwmatics, Addison-Wesley.
LEVEL 200 MATHEMATICS SEMESTER SUBJECTS
MATH201 MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS Scp
Prerequisite Both MATH111 and MATH112, or both MATHI02 and MATHI03, or MATHI02 and Permission of Head of Department.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Partial derivatives, Vector operators, Taylor's Theorem, Line integrals,
Multipleandsurface integrals, Gauss, Green, Stokes' Theorems.
Text
University of Newcastle 1993, Mathematics /I Tutorial Noles.
Stewart, J. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn ,Brooks/Cole.
or
Edwards, c.H. & Penney, D.E. 1990, Calculus and Analytical Geometry, 3rd edn, Prentice-Hall.
References
Adams, R.A. 1987, Calculus of Several Variables, Addison Wesley.
Curjel, C.R. 1990, Exercises in Multivarjable and Vector Calculus, McGraw-Hill.
Greenberg, M.D. 1988, Advanced Engineering MathemaJics Prentice-Hall.
Grossman, S.I. & Denick, W.R. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathematics Harper & Row.
Kreyszig, E.1988.Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 6thedn,
MA 1HEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
paperback Wiley, earlier editions are acceptable.
Piskunov.N. 1981, Dif/erentialand Integral Calculus. Vol.Iand n, 2nd edn, Mir.
Spiegel,M.R.1974.Tlu!oryandProblemsofAdvancedCalcwlus , Schaum.
Widder, D.V. 1989. AdvancedCalcubu, Dover.
MA TH202 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 1
Prerequisite MA TH201.
Corequisite MATH203.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
ExaminaJion One 2 hour paper.
ConLenl
Orthogonality. Sturm-Liouville systems and genemlisations, Series of Orthogonal functions, Fourier Series, Separation of variables, The classical partial differential equations (heat/ diffusion, wave, Laplace, Poisson).
Tal
University of Newcastle, 1993, MathemaJics 1/ Tutoruu Notes.
References
Broman, A. 1989. An Introduction to Partial Differential Equations Dover.
Churchill, R V. &Brown,J .W. 1978,F ourier SeriesandBoundary Value Problems McGraw-Hill.
Greenberg, M.D. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathematics Prentice-Hall.
Grossman, 5.1. & Derrick, W.R. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathemalics Harper & Row.
Kreyszig, E. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 6th edo. paperback Wiley, earlier editions are acceptable.
MATH203 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 1 5<p
Prerequisite BothMATH111 andMATH1120rboth MA THI02 and MA 11-1103, or MATH102 and Permission of the Head of Department.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Linear differential equations with constant coefficients, Linear differential equations - general case, Series solutions- special functions, Laplace transfoms, Applications.
Texis
University of Newcastle 1993, Mathematics 1/ Tutorial Notes.
Stewart, J. 1991, Calculus, 2nd edn, Brooks/Cole.
or
Edwards, C.H. & Penney, D.E. 1990, Calculus and AI141ytical Geometry, 3rd edn, Prentice-Hall.
85
SEcnONFIVE
References
Boyce, W.E. & Di Prima. R.C. 1986, Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems Wiley.
Burghes, D. & Barrie, M. 1981. Modelling into Differential Equations Ellis---Horwood.
Grossman, 5.1. & Derrick. W.R. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathemalics Harper & Row.
Hochstadt, H, DijferenJial Equations Dover.
Kreyszig, E. 1988,Advanced Enginuring MalhemaJics, 6th edn, paperback Wiley ,.earlier editions are acceptable.
Martin, W. T. & Reissner, Elementary DijJerenJial Equations Dover.
Sanchez, D.A., Allen, R.c. et a11988, DijferenJial Equations. 2nd edn, Addison Wesley.
MATH204 REAL ANALYSIS Scp
Prerequisite (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATH111 and MATHI 12 and MATHI03).
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Study in an axiomatic way of the properties of the real number system and functions defined on the real numbers and on the Euclidean plane.
Properties of the real number system: the Supremum Axiom, completeness and compactness.
Convergence of sequences and series in the Euclidean plane.
Limits of functions and algebra of limits, continuity and algebra of continuous functions.
Properties of continuous functions: connectedness, compactness and unifonn continuity.
Properties of differentiable functions: Mean Value Theorems and Taylor polynomial approximation for functions on the real numbers and the Euclidean plane.
The theory of Riemann integration for functions on the real numbers, the study of class of integrable functions.
The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus for functions on the real numbers relating differential and integral calculus.
Text
Giles,J.R. RealAnalysis:an introductory course Lecture Notes in Mathematics. Univ.Newcastle, No.6.
References
Binmore, K. G. 1985, Mathematical Analysis CUP.
Clapham, C.R.J. 1973, Introduction to Mathematical Analysis Routledge & Kegan Paul.
Clark, C.W. 1982, Elementary Mathematical Analysis Wadsworth-Brooks.
Spivak, M. 1967, Calculus Benjamin.
86
MA lHEMA TICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
MATH20S ANALYSIS OF METRIC SPACES 5cp
PrerequisiJe MA TH204.
HoUTS 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examinalion One 2 hour paper.
Conlenl
Studyinan axiomatic way of the analysis of more abstract spaces: metric and normed linear spaces.
Convergence of sequences and series in Rn with Euclidean and other nanns.
Convergence of sequences and series in function spaces with uniform and integral norms, the three fundamental theorems on uniform convergence involving continuity, integration and differentiation and application to power series.
Completeness, closed ness and density in metric spaces;
Banach Fixed Point Theorem and its application to functions on the real line and to the solution of integral equations.
Local and global continuity of mappings on metric spaces and topological characterisations.
Sequential compactness and application in approximation theory.
Text
Giles, J.R. 1989,Inlroduction to the Analysis of Metric Spaces CUP.
References
Bartle, R.G. 1976. The Elemenls of Real Analysis Wiley.
Giles,J.R.ReaIAnalysis: An Introductory Course Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Univ.Newcastle, No.6.
Goldberg, R.R. 1964. Methods of Real Analysis, Ginn Blaisdel.
Simmons. G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw-HilI.
White, A.I. 1968, Real Analysis Addison-Wesley.
MATH206 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 1 Scp
Prerequisite Both MA THIll and MATH112orboth MATH1 02 and MATH103, or MATH102 and Permission of the Head of Department.
Corequisite MATH201.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Conlenl
Complex numbers, Cartesian and polar fonns, geometry of the complex plane, solutions of polynomial equations. Complex functions, mapping theory, limits and continuity . Differentiation, the Cauchy-Riemann Theorem. Elementary functions, exponential,logarithmic,trigonometricandhyperbolicfunctions. Integration, the Cauchy-Goursat Theorem. Cauchy's integral formulae. Liouville's Theorem and the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra.
References
Churchill, R.V., Brown, I.W. etal.1984,Complex Variables and Applications McGraw-Hill.
SEcrION FIVE
Grove.E.A.&Ladas,G.I974,lntroductiontoComplexVariables , Houghton Mifflin.
Kreysig, E. 1979, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley.
Levinson, N. & Redheffer, R.M. 1970, Complex Variables, Holden-Day.
O'Neill, P.V. 1983, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wadsworth.
Spiegel, M.R. 1964, Theoryand Problems of Complex Variables , McGraw-Hill.
Tall, D.O. 1970, Functions of a Complex Variable I and fl. Routledge & Kegan Paul.
MATH207 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 2
Prerequisite MATH206 and MATHI03.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Scp
Taylor and Laurent series, analytic continuation. Residue theory, evaluation of some rea] integrals and series, the Argument Principle and Rouche's Theorem, Conformal mapping and applications. Further examination of multivalued functions; branch cuts, Riemann surfaces.
References
Churchill, R.V., Brown,J.W. etal. 1984.Complex Variables and Applications, McGraw-Hill.
Grove, E.A. & Ladas, G. 1974.1nlroductionto Complex Variables. Houghton Mifflin.
Kreysig, E. 1979, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley.
Levinson, N. & Redheffer, R.M. 1970, Complex Variables, Holden-Day.
O'Neill, P. V. 1983, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wadsworth.
Spiegel, M.R. 1 %4, Theory and Problems of Complex Variables , McGraw-Hili.
Tall, D.O. 1970, Functions of a Complex Variable I and /[ , Routledge & Kegan Paul.
MATH209 ALGEBRA
Prerequisite MATH218.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Comen!
Scp
An introduction to algebraic structures. Groups, rings, algebras, fields. Applications.
References
Hillman, A.P. & Alexanderson,G.L. 1983,Ajirst uruiergraduate course in abstract algebra, Wadsworth.
Jones, A., Morris, S.A. et al1991, Abstract algebra aruifamous impossibilities Springer-Verla.
MA l1-1EMATICS SUBJECf DESCIUP110NS
MATHlIO GEOMETRY 1 Scp
Prerequisite (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATHlll and MATH112 and MATHl03).
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examin4lion One 2 hour paper.
Content
An elementary approach, using models, touching Euclidean plane geometry, Hyperbolic plane geometry, Projective geometry, and their relationship to one another.
Text
Notes for Geometry, Mathematics Department, 1993.
References
Blumehtnal, L.M. 1970, Studies in Geometry, Freeman.
Eves, H. A. 1972, A Survey oj Geometry, Allyn & Bacon.
Gamer, L.E. 1981, An Outline of Projective Geometry, North Holland.
Greenberg, M.I. 1980, Euclidean and non-Euclidean Geometry, North Holland.
MATH2I1 GROUP THEORY Scp
Prerequisite (MATH102 and MATH103) or (MATHlll and MATH1l2and MATHI03).
HoUTS 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Con!enl
Groups, subgroups, isomorphism. Permutation groups, groups of linear transformations and matrices, isometries, sy mmetry groups of regular polygons and polyhedra. Cosets, Lagrange's theorem, normal subgroups, isomorphism theorems.
Text
Ledermann, W. 1976, Introduction to Group Theory Longman.
References
Baumslag. B. & Chandler, B. 1968, Group Theory, Schaum.
Budden, F.J. 1972, The Fascination of Groups CU.
Gardiner, C.F. 1980, A First Course in Group TMory Springer.
Herstein, LN. 1975, Topics in Algebra, 2nd edn ,Wiley.
Weyl, H. 1952, Symmetry Princeton.
MATH212 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 5cp Prerequisites MATH102 or MATH103 or (MATHll1 and MATf1112).
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
An introduction to various aspects of discrete mathematics: Graphs, set theory, relations and functions,logic, counting and recurrence equations.
87
SECTION FIVE
Tal Ross, K.A. & Wright, CR.B. 1988, Discrete MalMmalics, 2nd edn, Prentice-Hall.
References
Alagor. V.S. 1989, Fundamentals a/Computing, Prentice-Hall.
Grimaldi, R.P. 1985, Discrete and Combinatorial Malhi!masics • Addison~Wesley.
Kalmanson, K. 1986, An Introduction to Discrete Malhema1ics and its Applications Addison-Wesley.
Dierker, P.P. & Voxman, W.L. 1986, Discrete Mathematics, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich,.
MATH213 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 5cp
Prerequisites (MA TH102 and MATHI03) or (MATHl11 and MATHl12).
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
This topic is designed to introduce students to the idea of a mathematical model. Several realistic situations will be treated beginning with an analysis ofthenon-mathematical origin of the problem, the formulation of the mathematical model. solution of the mathematical problem and interpretation of the theoretical results. The use of computers is an integral part of this subject.
References
Andrews, J.G. & McClone, R.R. 1976, Mathematical Modelling Butterworth,.
Bender, E.A. 1978,An Introduction to Mathematical Modelling , Wiley,.
Clements, R.R. 1989, Matlumatical Modelling, CUP.
Cross, M. & Moscardini, A.O. 1985, Learning the Art of Matlumatical Modelling Ellis Horwood.
Dym, C.L. & Ivey. E.S. 1980, Principles of Matlumatical Modelling Academic.
Edwards, D. & Hamson, M. 1989, Guide to Mathematical Modelling, Macmillan.
Habennan, R. 1977, Mathematical Models, Prentice·Hall.
Lighthill, J. 1980, Newer Uses of Mathematics, Penguin.
Smith, J.M. 1971, Mathematical Ideas in Biology Cambridge.
Smith, J.M. 1974, Models in Ecology, Cambridge,.
MATH214 MECHANICS 5cp
Prerequisites (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATHll1 and MATH1l2and MATHI03).
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Summary of vector algebra. Velocity and accelerations. Kinematics of a particle. Newton's Law of Motion. Damped and forced oscillations. Projectiles. Central forces. Inverse square
88
MA lliEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
law. The energy equation. Motion of a particle system. Conservation of linear momentum and of angular momentum. Motion with variable mass.
References
Charlton, F. 1963, Textbook of Dynamics Van Nostrand.
Goodman, L.E. 1963, Dynamics Blackie.
Marion, J.B. 1970, Classical Dy1lQmics Academic .
Meirovitch,L.I970,MethodsofAnalyticaIDynamics, McGrawHill.
(See also references for MATH 201, 202, 203).
MATH2I5 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 5cp
Prerequisites MATHI02 or MATH103 or (MATH1l1 and MATH112).
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examinalion One 2 hour paper.
Content
Operations research involves the application of quantitative methods and tools to the analysis of problems involving the operation of systems and its aim is to evaluate the consequences of certain decision choices and to improve the effectiveness ofthe system as a whole.
This subject will cover a number of areas of operations research which have proved successful in business, economics and defence. These include such topics as network analysis and linear programming.
References
Daellenbach, H.G. & George, J.A. 1978, Introduction to Operations Research Techniques, Allyn and Bacon.
Hillier, F.S. & Liebennan, G.J. 1980, Inlroduclion 10 Operations Research, 3rd edn, Holden-Day.
Taha, H.A. 1987, Operations Research, 4th edn, MacMillan.
Hastins, Kevin J. 1989, Inlroduction 10 tlu Matlumatics of Operations Research Marcel Dekker.
MATH216 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 5cp
Prerequisites (MATHI02 and MATHI03) or (MATHl11 and MATHII2and MATHI03) or (MATHIII and MATHII2 and COMPIOI}.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Conlent
Sources of error in computation. Solution of a single nonlinear equation. Interpolation and the Lagrange interpolating polynomial. Finite differences and applications to interpolation. Numerical differentiation and integration including the trapezoidal rule, Simpson's rule and Gaussian integration fonnulae. Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations· Runge-Kutta and predictor-corrector methods. Numerical solution oflinearsystems of algebraic equations. Applications of numerical methods to applied mathematics, engineering and the sciences will be made throughout the course.
SECfION FIVE
Tal
Burden, R.L. & Faires, J.D. 1989,NumericaiAnalysis, 4th edn, Prindle, Weber & Schmidt.
References
Atkinson, K.E. 1984, An Introduction 10 Numerical Analysis Wiley. '
Balfour, A. & Marwick, D.H. 1986, Programming in Standard Fortran 77 Heinemann.
Cherney, W. & Kincaid, D. 1985, Numerical Matlumatics and Computing, 2nd edn, Brooks-Cole.
Cooper, D. & Clancy, M. 1985, Oh! Pascal! Wiley.
Etter, D.M. 1984 et. seq, Problem Solving with Structwed Fortran 77 Benjamin.
Etter, D.M. 1983, Structured Fortran 77 for Engineers and Scientists, Benjamin.
Ge~d,C.F. & Wheatly, P.O. 1984,AppliedNumericalAnalysis, Addison-Wesley.
University of Newcastle Computing Centre Handbookfor V AXI VMS.
University of Newcastle Computing Centre VAX·} J Fortran.
MATH217 LINEAR ALGEBRA I
Prerequisite MATHI02 or (MATH111 and MATHI12).
Not to count for credit with MATH218.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Scp
Matrix representations. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Diagonalizalion. Inner product spaces. Difference and duf erential equations.
References
Anton, H. 1987, Elementary Linear Algebra, 5th edn, Wiley.
Bloom, D.M. 1979, Linear Algebra and Geometry ,Cambridge.
Brisley, W. A. 1973, Basisfor Linear Algebra Wiley.
Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. 1987, Elemenlary Linear Algebra, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Lipschultz, S. 1974, Linear Algebra Schaum.
Roman, S. 1985, An Inlroduction 10 Linear Algebra Saunders.
Rorres, C. & Anton, H. 1979, Applications of Linear Algebra Wiley.
MATH2I8 LINEAR ALGEBRA 2 Scp
Prerequisite (MATH102 and MATH103) or (MATH111 and MATH1l2and MATHI03).
Not to count for credit with MATH217.
Hours 2 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
V eclorspaces and subs paces, Linear Maps, Matrix representations.
MA lliEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Diagonalisation, Difference equations. Inner product spaces, Gram-Schmidt process. Orthogonal, unitary, hermitian and normal matrices.
References
Anton, H. 1987, Elementary LinMU Algebra, 5th edn, Wiley.
Bloom, n.M. 1979, Linear Algebra and Geometry Cambridge.
Bristey, W. 1973, A Basis for Linear Algebra Wiley.
Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. 1987, Ele1Mntary LinMU Alg~bra Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
LipSChutz, S. 1974, Linear Algebra Schaum.
Roman, S. 1985, An Introduction 10 Linear Algebra Saunders.
Rorres, C. & Anton, H. 1979, Applications of Linear Algebra Wiley.
MATH301 LOGIC AND SET THEORY
Not offered in 1993.
MATH302 GENERAL TENSORS AND RELATIVITY
Not offered in 1993.
MATH303 VARIATIONAL METHODS
IOcp
lOcp
AND INTEGRAL EQUATIONS lOcp
Not offered in 1993.
MATH304 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2 lOcp
Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and MATH2I8.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
(An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects).
Existence and Uniqueness of solutions of rust order equations, vector fields, integral curves. Lie groups, infinitesimal transfonnations, invariant functions and path curves. Invariance of equations under a given group and reduction to quadratures. Construction of all equations which admit a given group. Se<:ond and higher order equations, reduction of order and integration.
References
Bluman, GW. & Cole, J.D. 1974, Similarity Methods for Differential Equations Springer.
Hill, J.M. 1982, Solutions of Differential equations by Means of One·parameter Groups Pitman.
MATH30S PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2 lOcp
Prerequisites MATH20l, MATH202, MATH203 and MATH204.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
89
SECTION FIVE
Content
(An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects).
Fim order equatioos: linear equations, Cauchy problems; general solutions; nonlinear equations; Cauchy' s method of characteristics; compatible systems of equatioos; complete integrals; the methods of Charpitand Jacobi. Higherorderequalions: linear equations with constant coefficients; reducible and irreducible equations; second order equations with variable coefficients; characteristics; hypeIbolic, parnholic and elliptic equations. Special meIhods: separation of variables; integral transforms; Green's function. Applications in mathematical physics where appropriate.
References
COlton,D.1988,ParliaIDifferentiaIEquations-anlntroduction Random House.
Courant, R. & Hilbert, D. 1966. Methods of Mathematical Physics Vol.1I Partial Differential Equations Interscience.
Epstein, B. 1962, Partial Differen/ial Equations- an inJroduction McGraw-Hill •.
Haack. W. & Wendland, W. 1972, Lectures on Partial and Phaffian DiJJerenlial Equations Pergamon,.
Smith, M.G. 1967, InJroduction to the Theory of Partial Differential Equations Van Nostrand.
Sneddon, I.N. 1986, Elements of Partial Differential Equations, McGraw-Hill.
MATH306 FLUID MECHANICS lOcp
Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and MATH206.
Advisory PrelCorequisite MATH207.
HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
(An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects)
Basicconcepts: continuum, pressure, viscosity. Derivation of the equations of motion for a real incompressible fluid; Poiseuille and Stokes' boundary layer flow. Dynamical similarity and the Reynolds number. Flow at high Reynolds number, ideal (nonviscous) fluid; simplification of the equations of motion; Bernoulli equations; the case of irrotational flow; Kelvin's circulation theorem. Investigation of simpleirrotationalinviscid flows; twodimensional flows; circulation; axisymmetric flow around a sphere; virtual mass. Generation of vorticity at solid boundaries; boundary layers and their growth in flows which are initially mutational.
References
Batchelor, G.K. 1967, An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics Cambridge.
Chirgwin, B.H. & Plumpton, C. 1967, Elementary Classical Hydrodynamics Pergamon.
Curle, N. & Davies, H.I. 1968, 1971, Modern Fluid Dynamics Vols I & II VanNostrand.
90
MA lHEMA TICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Goldstein, S. (ed) 1965,ModernDevelopments inFluidDynamics Vou I & II Dover.
Milne-Thompson, L.M. 1968, Theoretical Hydrodynamics Macmillan.
Panton, R. 1984,Incompressible Flow, Wiley.
Paterson, A.R. 1983, A First Course in Fluid Dynamics Cambridge.
Robertson,J.H.I965,HydrodynamicsinTheoryandApplicalion. Prentice-Hall.
MATH307 QUANTUM AND STATISTICAL MECHANICS lOcp
Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203 and MATH206.
HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
(An essay: seenoteat the end of the listing for300 level subjects).
Classical Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics, Liouville theorem. Statistical Mechanics: basic postulate; microcanonical ensemble; equipartition; classical ideal gas; canonical ensemble; energy fluctuations; grand canonical ensemble; density fluctuations; quantum statistical mechanics; density matrix, ideal Bose gas; ideal Fermi gas; white dwarf stars; Bose-Einstein condensation; superconductivity.
Quantum mechanics: the wave-particle duality, concept of probability; development, solution and interpretation of Schrodinger's equations in one. two and three dimensions; degeneracy; Heisenberg uncertainty; molecular structure.
References
Croxton, C.A. 1975, Introductory Eigenphysics Wiley.
Fong. P. 1968, Elementary Quantum Mechanics AddisonWesley.
Huang, K. 1963, Statistical Mechanics, Wiley.
Landau, L.D.& Lifshitz, H.M. 1968, Statistical Physics
Pergamon,.
MATH308 GEOMETRY 2 lOcp
Prerequisites 20 credit points from 200 level Mathematics, including at least one of MATH209, 211, 218.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
(An essay: see note at the end of the listingfor300 level subjects).
Calculus on Rn: directional derivatives, curves tangent vectors, mappings, vector fields and integral curves.
Affine spaces: calculus on affme spaces, the geometry of curves and surfaces. Parallelism and covariant derivatives. Shape operators, Gaussian curvature.
Introduction to Riemannian manifolds.
SECTION FIVE
Reference
Thorpe, J.A. 1979. Elementary Topics in Differential Geometry Springer.
MATH309 COMBINATORICS
Not offered in 1993.
MA TlDIO FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS
Prerequisite MA TH205.
Hours 1 1/2 hours per week for full year
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
lOcp
lOcp
(An essay: seenote at the end of the listing for300 level subjects.)
Nonned linear spaces, finite dimenSional spaces, iJUler product spaces. Linear mappings, continuity, topological and isometric isomorphisms. Dual spaces, the Hahn-Banach Theorem and reflexivity. Conjugate mappings, operators on Hilbert space, adjoint operators and projection operators.
Texis
Giles.J.R. 1987 ,Introduction to Analysis of Metric Spaces CUP.
Giles, J.R. 1988. Introduction to Analysis of Normed Linear Spaces Univ. Newcastle Lecture Notes.
References
Bachman, G. & Narici, L 1966. Functional Analysis Academic.
Banach, S. 1988, Tlu!orie des Operations Lineaires, 2nd edn. Chelsea.
Brown, A.L & Page, A 1970. Elements of Functional Analysis VanNostrand.
Jameson, G.J.O. 1974. T opologyandNormed Spaces, ChapmanHall.
Kolmogorov, A.N. & Fomin, S. V. 1957, Elements of the Theory of Functions and Functional Analysis VoU Grayloch.
Kreysig, E. 1978, Introductory Functional Analysis with Applications, Wiley.
Liustemik, LA. & Sobolev, UJ. 1961. Elements ofFunctt'onal Analysis Frederick Unger.
Simmons, G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw-Hill.
Taylor, A.E. and Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction to Functional Analysis, 2nd edn, Wiley •.
Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis, Blaisdell.
Young, N. 1988, An inlroduction to Hilbert space CUP.
MATH311 MEASURE THEORY & INTEGRA nON
Not offered in 1993.
lOcp
MATH3I2 ALGEBRA lOcp
Prerequisites MATH218 and at least one of MATH209, MATH21D or MATH211.
MA lliEMA TICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
ExaminaJion One 2 hour paper.
Content
(An essay: see note at the end ofthelisting for300 level subjects).
In this topic the solution of polynomial equations and their relationships with classical geometrical problems such as duplication of the cube and trisection of angles will be studied. It will further examine the relations between the roots and coefficients of equations, relations which gave rise to Galois theory and the theory of extension fields. Why equations of degree 5 and higher cannot be solved by radicals will be investigated.
References
Birkhoff, G.D. & MacLane, S. A Survey of Modern Algebra Macmillan, 1953.
Edwards, H.M. Galois Theory Springer, 1984.
Herstein, LN. Topics in Algebra Wiley, 1975.
Kaplansky,I. Fields and Rings Chicago,I969.
Stewart, I. Galois Theory Chapman & Hall, 1973.
MATH3I3 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS (THEORY) lOcp
Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and MATH218. Programming ability (high-level language) is assumed.
HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Conlent
(An essay: seenote at the end of the listing for300 level subjects).
Solution of linear systems of algebraic equations by direct and linear iterative methods; particular attention will be given to the influence of various types of errors on the numerical result, to the general theory of convergence of the latter class of methods and to the concept of "condition" of a system. Solution by both one step and multistep methods of initial value problems involving ordinary differential equations. Investigation of stability of linear marching schemes. Boundary value problems. Finite-difference (and finite-element methods) of solution of partial differential equations. If time pennits, other numerical analysis problems such as integration, solution of non-linear equations etc. will be treated.
Text
Burden, R.L. & Faires. J.D. 1989, NumericalAnalysis, 4th edn, Prindle,Weber & Schmidt.
References
AtJdnson. K.E. 1978, An Introduction to Numerical Analysis, Wiley.
Ames, W.F. 1969, Numerical Methodsfor Partial Differential Equations Nelson.
Cohen, A.M. et aI. 1973, Numerical Analysis, McGraw-Hill.
Conte.S.D. &deBoor,C.1980,ElementaryNumericaIAnalysis.
91
SECfION FIVE
3rd edn, McGraw.Hill.
Forsythe, G.E., Malcolm, M.A. et alI977, CompUler Metlwdsfor Mathematical Computations. Prentice-Hall.
Isaacson, E. & Keller, H.M.I966,AnalysisofNumerical Metlwds , Wiley.
Lambert, J.D. & Wait, R. 1973, Computational Methods in Ordinary Differential Equations. Wiley.
Mitchell, A.R. & Wait, R. 1977, The FiniJe Element Method in Partial Differential Equations, Wiley.
Pizer, S.M. & Wallace, V.L 1983, To Compute Numerically: Concepts and Strategies Little, Brown.
Smith. G.D. 1978. Numerical SolUlion of Partial Differemial Equations: Finite Difference Methods, Oxford.
MATH314 OPTIMIZATION
Prerequisites MATH201 and MATH218.
Hours 1 1{2 Hours per week for full year
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
IOcp
(An essay: see noleat the end of the listing for300 level subjects).
Many situations in Economics, Engineering. Experimental and Pure Science are reducible to questions of Optimization. The course is introduced by considering some simple examples of this. The basic analysis and theory of convex sets and convex functions underlying optimization are then developed. The theory of linear programming, including Bland's anticycling rule and duality, is examined. Constrained nonlinear optimization in both the convex and the smooth case are developed from a common separation argument. Ekeland's variational principle, descent methods and the one dimensional Fibonacci search for unconstrained problems fonn the final section of the course.
Text
University of Newcastle 1990, Lecture Notes, "Optimization".
References
Greig, DM. 1980, Optimization Longman,
Hestenes, M.R. 1975. Optimization Theory: The Finite Dimensional Case Wiley.
Holmes, R.B. 1972, A Course on Optimization and Best Approximation Springer.
Luenberger, D.G. 1969, Optimization by Vector Space Methods , Wiley.
Luenberger, D.G. 1973, Introduction to Linear and Nonlinear Programming Addison-Wesley.
Ponstein, J. 1980, Approaches to the Theory of Optimization, Cambridge Univ.Press.
Roberts, R.W. & Vanberg, D.E. 1973, Convex Functions , Academic Press.
Werner, J. 1984, Optimization Theory and Application, Friedr. Vi.Sohn.
92
MA lHEMA TICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
MATH315 MATHEMATICAL BIOLOGY IOcp
Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203 and MATH213.
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
(An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects).
This subject will show theuse of mathematical models to advance the understanding of certain biological phenomena. A number of biological situations will be investigated and students will be expected to use both analytical and computational techniques to obtain results which can be compared with experimental findings.
References:
Edelstein-Keshet, L. 1987, Mathematical Models in Biology, Random-House.
Jones, D.S, & Sleeman, B.D. 1983, Differential Equations and Mathematical Biology Allen & Unwin.
Murray, J.D. 1989, Mathematical Biology, Springer.
Segel, L.A. 1984, Modeling Dynamic Phenomena in Molecular and Cellular Biology Cambridge.
MATH316 INDUSTRIAL MODELLING
Not offered in 1993.
MATH317 NUMBER THEORY
Not offered in 1993.
MATH318 TOPOLOGY
Prerequisites MATH2040rMATH205.
Hours 3 Hours per week in one semester.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
IOcp
IOcp
IOcp
(An essay: see note at theendofthelistingfor300level subjects).
General topology: continuous functions and open sets; topologies and topological spaces; compactness, connectedness and separation properties~ product spaces. Introduction to algebraic topology: homotopies, covering spaces and the fundamental group.
References
Brown, R.L. 1988, Topology. Ellis Horwood.
Christie, D.E. 1976,Basic Topology, Macmillan.
Mendelson, B. 1975,lntroductiontoTopology , 3rd edition Allyn & Bacon.
Simmons, G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw-Hill.
Notes on Mathematics Level 300 Essay Assignment
Students enrolled in Level 300 Mathematics semester subjects will be required to complete an essay in an approved topic chosen from the history or philosophy of Mathematics.
L
SECfION FIVE
The essay is arequirement forthe satisfactory completion of one ofthe level 300 mathematics subjects taken by a student normally in the Irrst semester of the student's 300 level program.
Two copies of the essay are to be submitted by the 10th week of the semester of which one will be returned to the student after assessment.
Subject provided by the Division of Quantitative Methods
MAQM214 QUANTITATIVE METHODS IOcp
Prerequisite INFOI0l and STATI 01.
Not to count for credit with MATH215.
Hours 4 Hours per week: for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment based on tutorials and assignments plus a 2 hour final examination.
Content
The subject addresses the application of elementary quantitative techniques to decision making and optimisation in a business setting. Topicsiocludeaspectsofforecasting, machine scheduling, linear programming, decision theory, networks, critical path method and inventory control. Use will be made of appropriate computer packages.
Reference
Levin, Richard I. et al 1989, Quantitative ApproacMs to Managemenl ,7th edn, N. Y. McGraw·l-hll.
A list of subjects provided by the Division of Quantitative Methods to B.Ed courses in the Faculty of Education in 1993
The proposed new subject codes have MAQM as prefix. The previous code is given in parentheses.
These subjects are available only to Bachelor of Education students.
BEd (MA lHEMA TICS EDUCATION) SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
B.Ed (Mathematics Education)
MAQMI35 MATHEMATICS lA (MAI35Q)
Hours 4 Hours per week for a year.
COnUnJ
20cp
Differential and integral calculus offunctions of a single variable; Applications of Calculus including mechanics,
MAQMI36 MATHEMATICS IB (MAI36Q)
Hours 4 Hours per week for a year.
Conten/
20cp
Algebra: binomial theorem, mathematical induction, complex numbers, matrix algebra Geometry: Euclidean and Analytic. Computing: an introduction to microcomputers.
MAQM235 MATHEMATICS IIA (MA235Q)
Prerequisite MAQM135.
Hours 4 Hours per week for a year.
Content
20cp
Calculus ofseveral variables, vector calculus. Taylor and Fourier series. An analysis of real numbers, sequences, series and functions.
MAQM236 MATHEMATICS lIB (MA236Q)
Hours 2 Hours per week for a year.
Content
IOcp
Vector spaces, linear dependence and independence. linear mappings, kernel and image, matrices. Linear programming, the Simplex Algorithm, Duality. Applications to transportation, assignment, flow and game theory.
MAQM237 MATHEMATICSIIC (MA237Q)
Hours 2 Hours per week for a year.
COnlent
IOcp
A study of spherical trigonometry andits application to navigation, together with the celestial sphere, sideraltimeand solar time. The development of problem solving skills and structured programming concepts associated with the implementation of computer based solutions to mathematical problems.
MAQM335 MATHEMATICS IlIA (MA335Q)
Prerequisite MAQM235.
Hours 4 Hours per week for a year.
Con/em
20cp
Real variables, differentiability, the mean value theorem, Riemann integration and U1e Fundamental theorem of theCalculus. Complex
93
SECTION FIVE BEd (pRlMAR Y EDUCATION AND EARLY CHILDHOOD) SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
variables, Cauchy's theorem, power and Laurent series, singularities, residues and poles, confonnal mappings.
Linear Algebra, imler product spaces, eigenspaces, diagonalisation of a quadratic form and a variety of applications. Ordinary differential equations of the first degree. Solution by series. The methods of Frobenius, Bessell and Legendre.
MAQM336 MATHEMATICS II1B (MA336Q)
HOUTS 3 Hours per week for a year.
Con/em
15cp
Sets and classes of sets, sigma rings and sigma algebras construction of the rationals and reals. An introduction to mathematical logic. Elementary group theory. Transformation geometry and non-euclidean geometry.
MAQM337 MATHEMATICSIIIC (MA337Q)
HOUTS 3 Hours per week for a year.
Con/em
15cp
Probability distributions, sampling distributions, hypothesis testing. Topics in operations research including project scheduling, job sequencing, queueing theory, dynamic programming and decision theory. Computer applications to the above topics and to development in computer aided leaming.
MAQM435 MATHEMATICS IV A (MA435Q)
Available only to Bachelor of Education students.
HOUTS 2 Hours per week for a year.
Con/ent
IOcp
Combinatorics, block designs, finite geometries, latin squares, magic squares and Hadamard matrices. Groups, rings, ideals, integral domains and fields.
MAQM436 MATHEMATICS IVB (MA436Q)
Available only to Bachelor of Education students.
HOUTS 2 Hours per week for a year.
Content
10cp
Number theory, prime numbers, congruences, Diophentine equations, Gaussian integers. The historical development of mathematics - selected topics.
MAQM437 MATHEMATICS IVC (MA437Q)
Available only to Bachelor of Education students.
HOUTS 2 Hours per week for a year.
Content
10cp
Numerical Analysis, solution of systems of equations, numerical differentiation and integration, application to ordinary differential equations. Microcomputing using package software and programming to solve course- related problems.
94
B.Ed(Primary Education)
MAQMI46 FOUNDATION STUDIES IN (pRI36Q) ELEMENTARY MATHEMATICS IScp
Available only to Bachelor of Education students
HOUTS 3 Hours per week for a year
Content
This subject provides a background of mathematical content and skills needed by teachers of elementary mathematics. The content covers sets, elementary number theory, geometry, measurement and probability.
B.Ed (Early Childhood)
MAQMI47 MATHEMATICSIEC (ECI38Q)
Available only to Bachelor of Education students
HOUTS 4 Hours per week for one semester.
Content
IOcp
This subject provides a background of mathematical content and skills needed by teachers in the Early Childhood field. Topics include astudy of elementary set theory ,natural numbers integers and rational numbers, non decimal systems, number patterns. elementary geometry, measurement and probability.
SECfION FIVE
Physics Subject Descriptions
PHYSIOI PHYSICS 101 lOcp
Assumed Knowledge HSC 2 unit Mathematics with aresu]t in the top 30% of the candidature or equivalent.
HOUTS 6 Hours per week: for one semester
Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and one three hour paper at the end of the semester
Conlem
This is an introductory course in physics concentrating primarily on the core topiCS of classical physics. The lecture course consists of three main strands:
(I) Mechanics
(2) Electromagnetism
(3) Waves, optics and thermal physics.
There will also be 3 hrs/week of laboratory and tutorial work.
Text
Serway & Faugtm 1989, College Physics, 2nd International eOO, ISBN 0-03-029798-2 Saunders College.
Reference
Gordon & Serway I989,Study Guide with Computer Exercises to Accompany College Physics, 2nd edn ISBN 0-03-023474-3 Saunders College.
PHYSI02 PHYSICS 102 10cp
Prerequisites PHYSIOl or Assumed knowledge of HSC 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science (with a result in the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC 3 unit Mathematics (with a mark of at least 110/150) or MATHIOI.
HOUTS 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment during the semester, and one 3 hOUT paper at the end of the semester.
Contenl
A unifying theme of the lecture course will be 'The Earth in the Universe'.
The following topics will be studied
Gravity and satellite motion; cosmology; nuclear physics and its applications; heat and heat engines; the Earth as a heat engine; atomic physics, optical instruments, electronic devices, radiation detection and safety.
There will also be 3 Hours per week associated with laboratory and tutorial work.
Text
R.A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers, with modern physics,3rd Edn.Saunders College, 1990, ISBN 0-03-032409-2.
References
Study guide to accompany above text.
PHYSI03 PHYSICS 103 10cp
Prerequisite PHYSI02.
PHYSICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment during the semester and one 3 hour paper at the end of the semester.
Content
Advanced mechanics, electromagnetism, atomic physics, waves, optics and thennal physics will be treated in a rigorous way, utilising calculus and stressing the unifying principles in the development of the physical concepts. There will also be a total of 3 Hours per week associated with laboratory and tutorials.
Texts
As for PHYSI02.
PHYS201 QUANTUM MECHANICS AND ELECTROMAGNETISM IOcp
Prerequisites Recommended entry is from PHYS 1 03 and MATH 1 03, but perfonnance to acceptable standard in PHYS 1 01 and PHYSI02 may substitute for PHYS103, and/or MATH1!1 and MATH112 may substitute for MATH103, with approval of the Head of Department.
Hours 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment during semester, and one 2 hour paper at end of semester.
Content
Basic principles of modem quantum mechanics, and electromagnetic theory. Laboratory, computational and tutorial work in these areas.
TeXIS
See the Physics 200 Notice Board.
References
To be advised.
I'HYS202 MECHANICS AND THERMAL PHYSICS 10cp
Prerequisites MATHI02 and PHYSI03 or PHYS101 and PHYSI02 with credits or better and the approval of the Head of Department.
Hours Up 10 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 hour paper at end of semester.
Content
Thermal physics, advanced classical mechanics and an introduction to relativity theory.
Texts
See the Physics 200 Notice Board.
References
To be advised.
PHYS203 SOLID STATE AND ATOMIC PHYSICS
Prerequisite PHYS201.
IOcp
95
SECI'ION FIVE
Hours Up to 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 hour paper at end of semester
Content
Solid stale physics and applications, atomic physics and specttoscopy, optics and laser physics.
Texts
See the Physics 200 Notice Board.
References
To be advised.
PHYS20S SCIENTIFIC MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLES, PROCESSES AND APPLICATIONS
Prerequisite PHYSI02.
IOcp
Hours Up to 6 Hours per week for one semester.
Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 hour paper at end of semester.
Content
Introductory course in analog and digital instrumentation, signal processing principles and computer applications. Emphasis will be on laboratory and environmental applications.
This subject is recommended for students in all areas of science wishing to gain an understanding of the principles and applications of basic electronic instrumentation and computer techniques
Texts
See the Physics 200 Notice Board.
References
To be advised.
PHYS301 MATHEMATICAL METHODS AND QUANTUM MECHANICS IOcp
Prerequisites PHYS201, MATH201 and MATH203.
Hours21ectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial per week forone
semester.
Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3
Hours examination.
ConJent
Mathematical methods. Quantum mechanics.
Texts and References
Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board.
Students should retain their Physics 200 texts.
PHYS302 ELECTROMAGNETISM AND ELECTRONICS IOcp
Prerequisites PHYS201 and MATH201.
Hours2lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone
semester.
Examination Exarnination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3
Hours examination.
96
PHYSICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Conlenl
Electromagnetism. Electronics.
Texis and References
Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board.
Students should retain their Physics 200 texts.
PHYS303 ATOMIC, MOLECULAR AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS IOcp
Prerequisites PHYS203 and PHYS301.
Hours 2lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone
semester.
Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3
Hours examination.
Content
Atomic and molecular physics. Solid state physics.
TexJs and References
Refer 10 the Physics 300 notice board.
Students should retain their Physics 200 texts.
PHYS304 STATISTICAL PHYSICS AND RELATIVITY
Prerequisites PHYS202 and MATH201.
IOcp
HOUTS 2 lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial perweekforone
semester.
Examinalion Examinations(s) and assessment equivalent to 3
Hours examination.
Con/em
Statistical physics. Relativity.
Texts and References
Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board.
Students should retain their Physics 200 texts.
PHYS30S NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETISM IOcp
Prerequisite PHYS302.
Hours2lectures and 4 Hours laboratory/tutorial per week for one
semester.
Examination Examination(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 Hours examination.
Content
Nuclear physics. Advanced Electromagnetism.
Texts and References
Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board.
Students should retain their Physics 200 texts.
L
SECI'ION FIVE
Psychology Subject Descriptions
PSYCIOI PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION I IOcp
Hours 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hours per week lectures, 2 hours per week laboratory)
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Three written reports. Laboratory work. Introductory Methodology and Statistics, Biological Foundations; Perception and Learning.
Texts
General.
Bootzin, R.R. et al. 1991, Psychology today. An introduction., 7thedn, McGraw-Hill.
For Methodology and Statistics
Howell, D.C. 1985, Fundamental statistics for the behavioural sciences., Duxbury Press.
Martin, D.W. 1991, Doing psychology experiments., 3rd edn,. Brooks/Cole.
Other texts to be advised.
PSYCI02 PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION II IOcp
Prerequisite PSYCIOI
Hours 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hours per week lectures, 2 hours per week laboratory)
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ContenJ
Three written reports. Laboratory work. Development, Cognition, Social Psychology.
Texts
General
Bootzin, R.R. et aI. 1991, Psychology today. An introduction., 7th eOO, McGraw-Hill.
Other texts to be advised.
PSYC201 FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY IOcp
Prerequisite PSYCI02
Hours 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with laboratory work.
Examination Students will be assessed by continuous assessment throughout the semester.
Conlenl
(i) a selection of topiCS in experimental design, parametric tests, introduction to analysis variance and related topics, and
ii) arangeoftopics aimedat elucidating the anatomy ,physiology and biochemistry of the brain. The unit will be accompanied by
(a) a tutorial series in which practical experience will be given in the application of statistical methods using computer-assisted statistical packages and
PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
(b) a laboratory component which will mainly deal with neuroanatomy.
Texts to be advised.
References To be advised.
PSYC202 BASIC PROCESSES
Prerequisite PSYC102
Corequisite PSYC20t
IOcp
HOUTS 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with laboratory work.
Examination One 2 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises.
ConlenJ
This subject will examine basic processes in Psychology such as perception, cognition, and learning. Both animal and human models may be considered.
The Cognition topiC will examine the experimental evidence supporting various models for human memory. Emphasis will be placed on applied aspects of cognition and memory especially in psychological dysfunction.
The Perception section will deal primarily with audition. The following topics will be covered; structure of the auditory system, SUbjective dimensions of sound, sound localisation, elementary aspects of speech perception.
The learning topic will explore ideas about the nature and mechanism of associative learning. The conditions under which learning occurs, the nature of the representations underlying learning will be described. The implications of these ideas forthe application ofleaming theory to issues such as drug tolerance and addiction will be considered.
Texts
Goldstein, H.B. 1984, Sensation & perception,. Belmont Cal.
Wadsworth. (or other general perception text dealing with audition).
References
Baddeley, A. 1983, Your memory: A user's guide., Penguin Books.
Baddeley, A. 1990,Humanmemory: Theory and practise. Hove, UK: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
S1. James,J. & Schneider, W. 1991, MEL LAB: Experiments in perception, cognition, social psychology and human factors. Pittsburg, PA: Psychology Software Tools.
Schwartz, B. 1990. Psychology of learning and behaviour, 3rd cdn, New York, W.W. Norton.
PSYC203 DEVELOPMENTAL AND SOCIAL PROCESSES IOcp
Prerequisite PSYCI02
Corequisile PSYC201
Hours 2hours per weekforone semester together with laboratory work.
Examination One 2 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises.
97
SECfION FIVE
Content
This subject will cover such topics as Social Cognition, Interpersonal Relationships and Developmental Themes.
The Social Cognition topic will continue from the study of social behaviours in PSY Cl 02 and will examine the cognitive processes underlying these behaviours, fOCUSsing on attributions f orevents and understanding of social situations, and attitude structures and change.
The Interpersonal Relationships topic win introduce basic processes in group dynamics.
The Cognitive Development topic will introduce students to the experimental study of developmental change in perception, memory, categorisation and problem solving.
TexI
Small, M. Y. 1990,. Cognitivedevelopment. San Diego, Harcourt, Brace & Jovanovich.
References To be advised.
PSYC204 INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES Ukp
Prerequisite PSYC102
Corequisite PSYC201
HoUTS 2hours perweekforone semester together with laboratory work.
Examination One 2 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises.
Content
This subject examines the ways in which individuals differ through a study of such topics as models of personality. patterns of abnormal behaviour, methods of assessing these differences.
Abnormal Behaviour: !tis intended that this topic should introduce the student to some of the main approaches to the understanding of abnormal behaviour.
The student should be able to demonstrate understanding of (a) the historical background of mental illness (b) the basic diagnostic categories of psychiatric disorder ( c) approaches to mental health care.
Personality: The topic will examine a number of prominent approaches to personality theory, research, and assessment. Students will be expected to read assigned sections of the recommended text, and to complete simple exercises and present material in seminar sessions from time to time.
Text
Hall, C.S., & Lindzey, G. 1985, Imroduction to theories of personality. Wiley.
or
Potkay, C.R. & Allen, B.P. 1986, Personality lheory, research and application. Brooks/Cole.
References
Diagnoslic and statislical manual of mental disorders (DSM-IIIR).
(Available on short loan in the Library).
98
PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Students are encouraged to read widely in any chapters on abnormal behaviour in post 1987 texts.
PSYC301 ADVANCED FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY IOcp
Prerequisites PSYC201 , PSYC202 and PSYC203
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 3 hour exam paper.
Content
TIris course consists of the following topics:
(a) Experimental design principles in psychologyrangingfrom natura1istic observation to experimental and quasiexperimental designs. including single-case studies.
(b) Practical computation techniques for the analysis of experimental designs in psychological research, using MlNIT AB, BMDP and SPSSJX.
(c) Introduction to multivariate statistical techniques such as Multiple Linear Regression, Discriminant Analysis and Cluster Analysis.
(d) The MEL laboratory programs will be used to collect data in the tutorial periods.
References
Christensen, L.B. 1988, Experimenl(ll methodology. Boston: All yn & Bacon.
Keppel, G. & Zedeck, S. 1989. Data analysis for research designs. New York: W.H. Freeman & Co.
Howell, D.C. 1987, Statistical methods for psychology. Boston:Duxburg Press.
Winer, B.J .• Brown, D.R. & Michels, K.M. 1991,.Slatistical principles in experimenl(li design .• New York.: McGraw-Hill, Inc.
St. James, J. & Schneider, W. 1991, MEL LAB: Experiments in perception, cognition, social psychology and human factors. Pittsburgh,PA: Psychology Software Tools.
PSYC302 INDEPENDENT PROJECT IOcp Prerequisite PSYC201
Corequisite PSYC301
Hours 2 hours per week for the full year.
Examination Submission of a written report containing introduction, methods, results and discussion not more than unrty pages in length due early October.
Comem
The project consists of an experiment or series of experiments, surveys or tests designed to explore a hypothesis. Each student will be supervised by an academic staff member of the Department of Psychology. The list of research areas will be available at the beginning of the academic year. Students are advised that this subject is a prerequisite for entry into an Honours year in Psychology.
SECfION FIVE
References
Students are expected to read a wide ranee of cunent literature in the area chosen for the research project.
PSYC303 BASIC PROCESSES I IOcp Prerequisite PSYC201
Corequisile PSYC301
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour exam paper and a laboratory report.
Content
TIris subject will examine basic processes in Psychology such as perception, cognition, memory and learning and the effects of early experience. Topics not covered in this subject will be dealt with in PSYC304. Both animal and human models will be considered. The subject will be supplemented with a laboratory program which will run over 4-5 weeks.
References
Baddeley, A. (1990). Human memory theory and practice. Erlbaum.
Frisby, J. (1979). Seeing. Oxford Univ. Press.
Semler, R & Blake, R. (1985), Perception. Knopf.
PSYC304 BASIC PROCESSES 2
Prerequisite PSYC201
Corequisite PSYC301
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester.
IOcp
Examination One 2 hour exam paper and an analytical report.
Conlent
This subject will extend the examination of basic processes covered in PSYC303. The subject will be complemented by either a laboratory or workshop progrnm run over about 4-5 weeks.
References
A series of readings will be recommended as the course progresses.
PSYC30S INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES
Prerequisite PSYC201
Corequisite PSYC301
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester.
lOcp
Examination One 2 hour exam paper, and a laboratory report.
Content
This subject will include cognitive development and two themes in social development. The subject will be complemented by a laboratory run over about 4-5 weeks.
References
Small, M.J. (1990). Cognitive development. San Diego: Harcourt, Brace and Jovanovich.
A series of readings will also be recommended as the course progresses.
PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
PSYC306 ADVANCED SOCIAL PROCESSES IOcp Prerequisite PSYC201
Corequisite PSYC301
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester.
Examination By a combination of fonnal examination and practical workshop assignments.
Content
This unit uses the topic of motivation to provide an integration of a wide variety of explanatory models andresearchin psychology, and to put the subject into acontext of philosophical and theoretical development generally. A number of motivational models are studied (biolOgical, learned behaviour, cognition and social ecology) and applied to work and clinical problems. Problem based workshops will be integrated with the lectures and regular assignments will be based on these workshops.
References Readings and references will be available during the lecture series.
PSYC307 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY I IOcp
Prerequisite PSYC201
Corequisite PSYC301
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 hour exam paper plus hurdle requirements.
Content
This unit will examine the theory underlying psychological test construction, and will introduce a range of psychological tests through practicum sessions in which training will be given intest administration and interpretation. The underlying basis of intetviewing as an assessment technique will also be studied and training will be given in inteIViewing techniques.
References
Anastasi. Psychological testing. MacMillan.
Keats. Skilled interviewing. ACER.
PSYC308 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 2
Prerequisite PSYC201
Corequisile PSYC301
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester.
IOcp
Examination Assessment will be by a combination of formal examination, essays and written reports on the practical experience.
Comem
This course will examine a number of different areas in which Psychology is applied. It will examine behavioural health care with particular emphasis on community-based interventions in establishing behavioural change. In addition, topics in psychological pathology, psychotherapy and abnormal psychology will be covered. The unit will be complemented with some practical experience in applied settings.
99
SECTION FIVE
References
King,N. & Remenyi, A. (eds.) (1986).HealthcaJ'e: A beha-v;oural approach. Grone & Slratton.
Additional references will be made available throughout the course.
PSYC309 TOPICS IN NEURAL SCIENCE IOcp
PrerequisiJe PSYC201
Corequisite PSYC301
Hours 4 hours per week for one semester.
Examination One 2 - 3 hour examination and laboratory assessment.
Conlenl
A seriesoftopics at the cellular and molecular level will examine the structural and functional mechanisms responsible for neural processing, synaptic communication, the physiology of neuronal networks and examine how neurons and networks develop and function in the brain.
References
Thg following texts are available on short loan (and in the medical reading room) and in the Auchmuty Library. They can also be ordered from the bookshop. Additional readings will be made known throughout the course.
Kandel, E.R. 1985, Principles of neural science (2nd edn), Elsevier.
Alberts, B., Bray, D., et aI. 1989, Molecular biology of the cell (2nd edn). Garland.
Siegel, G., Agranoff, B., Albers, R., & Molinoff, P. 1989, Basic Neurochemistry, 4th edn, Raven Press.
Kuffler, S.W., Nicholls, J.G., & Martin, A.R., 1984, From Neuron to Brain, 2nd edn,Sinauer Ass. Pub.
PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS) 40cp
Prerequisile A completed BA or BSc or three complete years of aBA(Psych) or BSc(psych) including the subjects PSYCI 01 and PSYCI02, at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level including PSYC201 , and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidates must have obtained alleast a Credit grade or beuerin each offour 300level Psychology subject'including PSYC301 andPSYC302.
Hours 12 hours per week for the full year
Examination To be advised
Content
PSYC401 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students enrol in PSYC402 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402in the second. PSYC40t consists of five seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in Psychology, a choice of two units in mathematical or physiological Psychology, and a choice of two units in applied or social Psychology. Each unit will include seminars at which altendance and participation is
100
PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One seminar may bereplaced witha practical placement andassociated essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403.
Texts and References To be advised.
PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 (THESIS) 40cp
PrerequisiJe A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) including the subjects PSYCI 01 and PSYCI02, at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level including PSYC201 , and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidates must have obtained at least a Credit grade or better in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302.
Corequisite PSYC401
Hours 12 hours per week for the full year
Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by two members of the Department oththan the SupeIVisor.
Conlenl
PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students enrol in PSYC401 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC40t in the first year and PSYC402in the second. PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis is afonnal presentation of this research and must be in APA fonnat. There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supeIVised by a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies must be through official departmental channels.
Texts and References To be advised.
PSYC403 PSYCHOLOGY 403 30cp
Prerequisite Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalent of three full time years of the degree, including passes or above in the subjects PSYCIOI and PSYCI02, at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level including PSYC201, and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301.
Hours 8 hours per week for the full year
Examinalion To be advised
ConJenJ
PSYC403 comprises one third of the final year of the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC404 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC403 consists of three seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in psychology, and a choice of two optional units. Each unit will include seminars at which attendance and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars
, r
L
SECTION FIVE
vary from year to year depending on staff availability. There is some overlap with PSYC401.
Texis and References To be advised.
PSYC404 PSYCHOLOGY 404 50cp
PrerequisiJe Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or BSe (psych) and must have completed the equivalent of three full time years of the degree, including passes or above in the subjects PSYCIOI and PSYCI02. alleas! 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level including PSYC201, and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC301.
Corequisite PSYC403
Hours 16 hours per week for the full year
Examinalion Reports will be assessed by two or more members of the Department. Placement will be assessed on the basis of supeIVisor's report and a student essay.
Content
PSYC404 comprises two-thirds of the fmal year of the BA (Psych) orBSc (psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC403 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC404 consists of two equally-weighted sections a piece of original empirical research,andaplacement. Theresearch project will besupervised by a member of the Psychology Department and must be in an applied area. A report in APA fonnat, of approximately twenty five pages, is required. Candidates are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well in advance. The placement component involves introductory seminars on ethical and professional issues~ supervised experience in a community facility in the Newcastle area; and the submission of an essay relating the practical activities to psychological theory and technique.
Texts and References To be advised.
COMPUTER SCIENCE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Computer Science Subject Descriptions
COMPI0l COMPUTER SCIENCE 1
Entry to this subject by sludenls olMr than Ilwse enrolled in the BCompSc, BE(Computer Engineering) and BlnfSc degree progrtJm3 is limited by quota. See 1M Faculty Secretary lor delails.
Introduction to the following aspects of computer science: 1be design of algorithms. The theory of algorithms. How algorithms are executed as programs by acomputer. The functions of system software (compilers and operating systems). Applications of computers. Social issues raised by computers. An extensive introduction to programming in procedural and functional programming languages.
COMP201 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES 5cp
Basic data structures afl(hd~orithms are investigated. Topics covered will include elementary data structures, abstract data types, hashing. search trees, heaps, and sorting. If time permits, more advanced topics in analysis of algorithms will also be covered.
COMP202 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 5cp
This SUbject covers the fundamental principles of computer system organisation and architecture. Topicscovered will include instruction-set design, CPU components, microprogramming, memory hierarchy, memory management, lID, concurrency and pipelining and an introduction to parallel architectures. A selection of architecture case studies will also be discussed.
COMP203 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
The course isdivided into two sections. The first section provides an introduction to computer organisation and assembly language programming. Topics covered include data representation, computer structures, registers, addressing modes, instruction sets, subroutines and the use of stacks. The second section of the course is an introduction to operating system principles. Topics covered include process management synchronisation and resource allocation.
COMP204 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE 5cp SEMANTICS
Examination of the major concepts which underlie modem programming languages. A variety of programming styles will be compared, including imperative, object-oriented, functional, and logic programming. Representative languages will be introduced to iIlustrate the concepts behind each style. Programming design issues such as data encapsulation, inC onnation hiding, and inheritance will also be studied. Languages studied chosen from C, C++. Lisp, Modula-2, Pascal, Prolog, Scheme, Smalltalk:, Ada.
COMP205 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING Scp
Systems programming for those already proficient in Pascal. Elementary Unix system calls and interfaces to other languages such as Pascal and Assembly Language. Use of UNIX software system tools such as "make", "lint" and "indent".
10)
SECTION FIVE
COMPl06 THEORY OF COMPUTATION Scp
Anintroductioototheoreticalcomputerscience,coveringmaterial in the areas of formal languages, automata theory and computability.
COMPl12 INTRODUCTION TO Scp PROGRAMMING
This subject is not available to candidates for 1M Bachelor of Computer Science degree, or 10 students who have passed or been exemptedjromCOMPlOl.
An introduction to structured programming and the design of algorithms using a procedural language.
COMPl41 COGNITIVE SCIENCE IOcp
An interdisciplinary approach to the examination of models and metaphors of mind, language, knowledge and perception used by various disciplines and the potential applications of those models and metaphors by artificial intelligence researchers, computer scientists and engineers.
COMPl99 PROJECT Scp
A project in computer science for students enrolled in the Diploma of Computer Science program
COMPJOI COMPILER DESIGN IOcp
Introduction tothe theory of grammars. Lexicalanalysers, parsing techniques, object code generation. Global and peephole optimisation. Routine support, error management. Scanner and parser generators.
COMPJ02 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE IOcp
An introductory oveIView to Artificial Intelligence, covering some or all of the following topics: history of AI; game playing; knowledge representation; search techniques; natural language processing; expert systems; automatic deduction; theorem proving; computer vision; computer learning; philosophical, psychological, and social issues.
COMPJOJ COMPUTER NETWORKS IOcp
An introduction to data communication networks. Topics include data transmission, transmission media, network protocols, ISOI OSI, public data networks, local area networks and distributed systems.
COMPJ04 DATABASE DESIGN IOcp
A basic introduction to database systems, with particularemphasis on relational database systems. Topics covered will include: basic concepts and terminology, types of systems (hierarchic, relational, network, inverted list), data design, relational theory, relational algebra, relational calculus, data integrity/recovery, security, concurrency, distributed systems.
COMPJOS ALGORITHM DESIGN AND ANALYSIS
IOcp
Important methods of algorithm design are covered in this subject, including the divide-and-conquer paradigm, dynamic
102
COMPUTER SCIENCE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
programming and greedy algorithms. The analysis of the perfonnance and the correctness of algorithms is emphasised .. Fundamental graph algorithms are also studied, including minimum spanning trees, and shortest paths. A selection oftopics from algorithms for parallel computers. computational geometry. string matching and sorting networks are also covered, as time permits.
COMPJ06 COMPUTER GRAPHICS IOcp
This subject will cover advanced computer graphics topics with relevant mathematical and programming techniques and an overview of graphics hardware design. Topics include: geometrical transformations; 3 D modelling and object hierarchy; standards - OKS, PHIOS; raster algorithms; antialiasing; region filling; CUIVes and patches, hidden surface removal algorithms; shading and texture mapping; diffuse and specular reflection; colour modelling; growth models; fractals and particle systems; animation techniques; graphics hardware architectures.
COMPJ07 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING IOcp PRINCIPLES
The subject comprises lectures in first semester plus a major assignment in second semester. After a brief explanation of the nature and life-cycle of large software systems, the software crisis which they have created, and the desirable properties of well-designed systems, the lectures explore the nature of stable systems in the natural world and in engineering and consider how humans think about, remember and create complex systems. This leads to the re-evaluation ofthe principles and techniques used in the construction of major software systems, offering new insights into the concepts of modularity and hierarchical structure.
COMPJ08 OPERATING SYSTEMS IOcp
An introduction to operating system structure and design. Topics include: advanced synchronisation techniques, deadlock detection, memory management including virtual storage techniques, multiprocessing and file systems. The emphasis will be on practical operating systems, and where possible reference will be made to existing systems currently in use.
COMPJ91 SPECIAL TOPIC I IOcp
A topic of contemporary relevance in computer science.
SECfION FIVE
Information Science Subject Description
INFOIOI INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Hours 3 Lecture hours and two tutorial hours
Examination To be advised
Content
IOcp
Of all the innovations over the last 10-15 years in the public and private sectors, the computerisalion of infonnation systems has arguably had the greatest impact on the organisation and penonnance of work. The computerisalion of such systems began on large and expensive mainframe computers and then moved to smaller and less powerful mini-computers. Today, many comprehensive infonnation systems are available on desktop personal computers. These so-called microcomputers can be found in all organisations irrespective of size, and in large organisations co-exist within the mainframe environment via data communication networks.
Microcomputers are used very differently to the more powerful mainframe and mini-computers. Although in large corporations transaction processing and day-to-day operations are still the domain of the larger computers, micros are becoming increasingl y used in such corporations as aids to decision-making for the tactical and strategic needs of lower, middle and upper management. Small organisations often rely totally on microcomputers for all aspects of their operations. The power of microcomputers is increasing exponentiaU y while their purchase price is decreasing in real tenns. Areas such as retailing, manufacturing, engineering and financial services have experienced enonnous change underthe impact of microcomputer technology.
Computers have made it possible to store and retrieve massive amounts of data, the 'information age' is now a reality. This course introduces the skills and concepts needed to fully exploit the power of computers.
After completion of the subject, students will understand how and why organisations build and use infonnation systems, will be able to document information flow through particular systems, and will be able to use the microcomputer as a personal support tool.
The course provides a solid grounding in computers and their use, which today is important for aU students, irrespective of the discipline which they are studying.
Course Components
INFOlOl comprises four major components
1 Microcomputers as Personal Support Tools (MPST)
2 Information Systems (IS)
3 Computers and the Law (CTL)
4 Behavioural Aspects of Wonnation Systems (BAIS)
Text To be advised
PHILOSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Philosophy Subject Description
PHlL207 SCIENTIFIC KNOWLEDGE AND SCIENTIFIC METHOD IOcp
Prerequisiles For PHIL207 either PHiLIOI or 40 cp in any subjects already passed. For PfDL307, 30 cp at PIDL200 level.
Hours 3 hours per week for one semester and 1 tutorial hour.
Examin4lion Assessment by assignments to be submiUedduring semester and essay to be submitted at the end of semester
Content
What is the logical structure of scientific method? Is it justified? How do theory and method interact in laboralory practice? How is scientific knowledge justified? Is science a unique form of knowledge? What roles, if any, do values play in the construction of scientific knowledge?
An important part of a scientific education is gaining a critical understanding of the nature of scientific method and scientific reasoning. Tltiscourse will introduce studentstoscientificmethod and reasoning by examining several key episodes in the development of science from both a historical and a critical perspective. Case studies typically include the Copernican Revolution in astronomy, the transition from Aristotelean to Galilean-Newtonian science and the Mendelian-Darwinian Revolution. Students will be critically introduced to deductive. inductive and probabilistic reasoning, to the use of models and idealisalions in science and to the complex relations between theory and experiment. (Note: The basic presentation of material will be in elementary theoretical terms and a background in mathematics or physics will not be required. Subsequently. individual students may follow the case studies al amathematical and theoretical depth appropriate to their training. Students with a non-science background will be encouraged to pursue more philosophical issues.)
Texts
Chalmers, A.F. What is this Thing Called Science? Uni of Qld Press, 1976
Clendirmen, F.J. Perspectives of Scientific Explanation
References
Feyerabend, P.K. Against Method Verso, London, 1978
Giere, R.N. Understanding Scienlific Reasoning Holt, Reinhart and Winston, New York, 1984
Toulmin, S., Goodfield, J. The Fabric of lhe Heavens Pelican Books, 1%3
Toulmin, S. and Goodfield, J. The Architecture of Malter Pelican Books, 1965
103
SEctIoN FIVE
Statistics Subject Descriptions
STATIOI INTRODUCTORY STATISTICS IOcp
Not to count for credit with STATI03.
Prerequisites 'This course does not assume knowledge of calculus
or matrix algebra
HOUTS 3 lecture Hours, I laboratory hour and I tutorial hour per week. The course is offered in Semester I and Semester 2
PW'pose To introduce students to Ute principles of study design, data analysis and interpretation; Ute statistical computing program MINIT AB will be used extensively
Content Study design, including surveys and controlled experiments. Sampling and randomization. Scales of measurement. Descriptive and exploratory data analysis. Probability. Statistical inference: sampling distributions, confidence intervals and hypo~esiS t~sts for means and proportions. Correlation and regresSlon. Time series analysis. Chi·square tests for frequency tables.
Text
Moore, 0.5. & McCabe, G.P.
Introduction to the Practice of Statistics Freeman, 1989
References Freedman, D., Pisani, R., et al. Statistics 2nd Edn Norton, 1991
Staudte, R. Seeing, Through Statistics Prentice-Hall, 1990
Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. et al MINrrAB Handbook 2nd edn
Duxbury. 1985
Miller, R.B. MINrrAB Handbookfor Businl!ssand Economics. PWS-Kent, Boston, 1988)
Wonnacott, T.H, & Wonnacott, R.J. Introductory Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn Wiley. 1990
STATI03 INTRODUCTORY MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS IOcp
Not to count for credit with STA not. Adllisory Prerequisite or corequisites MA THI 02 or MA THI 03
HoW's 3 lecture hours, 1 laboratory hour and 1 tutorial hour per
week for one semester.
PW'pose To introduce more mathematically interested students to probability and statistical inference, including th~ P?nciples of study design, data anal ysis and interpretation of stabsbcal results.
Contenl
Scales of measurement; summarising data
Probability laws; condiLional probability
Probability distributions and sample statistics
The centra11imit theorem and applications
Study design; surveys and randomised experiments
Confidence intervals and hypothesis tests
Correlation and regression; least squares
Interences from contingency tables.
104
STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Text Freund,J.E. &Simon,G.A. 1992.ModernElemenlaryStatistics,
(8th edn), Prentice-Hall.
References Bhattachanya, A.K. & Johnson, R.1977 ,Statistics,Principles&
Methods. Wiley.
Freedman,D., Pisani, R. et al, 1991 Statistics 2nd edn, Norton.
Meyer, P.L. 1977 Introductory Probability and Statistical Applications, 2nd edn, Addison-Wesley.
STATlOI MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS IOcp
Prerequisites Either MA TH103 or STAT1 01 and MA THI12 (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MATHI12)
HoW's3 lecture Hours and 1 laboratory!tutorial hourperweek for
one semester
Content Random variables, probability, density and distribution functions, expectation. Likelihood, point and interval estimation. Tests of
significance.
TexJ Hogg. R.V. & Tams, EA. 1988, Probability and Statistical
Inferences, Macmillan.
Reference Kalbfleisch, J.G. 1985, Probability and Statistical Inference Volumes I and II, 2nd edn Springer.
Larsen, R.I. and Marx, M.L. 1986, An Introduction to Mathematical Statistics and its Applications, 2nd edn, Prentice
Hall.
STAT202 REGRESSION ANALYSIS IOcp
Prerequisites STATIOl or STATIO 1 and MATH112 (or
equivalent)
HoW's 2 lecture Hours. 1 laboratory and 1 tutorial hour per week
for one semester
Conlent This course covers the practical and Uteoretical aspects of multiple regression analysis, including the assumptions underlying ~ormal linear models, use of matrix notation, prediction and confidence intervals, stepwise methods,and examination of the adequacy of models. The statistical computer packages MINIT AB and SAS
are used.
Text Neter, I. , Wasserman W, and Kutner. M.H. 1990,AppliedLinear Statistical Models, 3rd edn, Irwin.
References Bowerman, B.L.. O'Connell, R.T. et al1986, Linear statistical models. an applied approach, Duxbury.
Draper, N.R. and Smith, H. 1981, Applied Regression Analysis,
Wiley.
Ryan, B.F., Joiner, B.L. and Ryan. T.A. 1985, MINlTAB Handbook, 2nd edn, Duxbury.
J
,
SECTION FIVE
SAS Institute Inc. 1985. SAS Introductory Guide, 3rd edn, SAS Inst, Cary NC.
Weisberg, S. 1985, Applied Linear Regression, 2nd edn, Wiley.
STAT203 QUEUES & SIMULATION 5cp
Prerequisite MA TH112 or equiValent
For the BSc degree STA T204 would also have to be taken. This course covers topiCS specifically required for Computer Science but is also relevant for Statistics and other disciplines.
HoW's 2lecture/tutorial Hours per week for one semester
Content
Queues, random number generation, Poisson processes, simulation using MINITAB.
Text
Ross, S.M. 1991,A course in simulation MacMillan.
References
Morgan, B.I.T. 1984, Elements of Simulation, Chapman and Hall.
Stochastic Processes, Wiley.
STAT204 NON-PARAMETRIC STATISTICS 5cp
For theB.Sc. degree STATI03 would also have to be taken.
Prerequisites STAT201 or STATI01 and MATH112 (or equivalent)
HoW's 2lecture/1aboratory Hours per week for one semester
Content
Methods foranal ysing categorical and ranked data Randomization tests.
References
Sprent, P. 1989. AppJied nonparametric statistical methods, Chapman and Hall.
STATl05 ENGINEERING STATISTICS 5cp
Credit cannot be obtained for both STATZOI and STATZ05.
PrerequisiLe MATH112 or MATHI02. This subject is mainly taken by students in Mechanical or Industrial Engineering but is also available to other students
HoW's 21ecture/laboralory Hours per week for one semester
Content
Basic probability theory and principles of statistical inference. Distributions. Error propagation. Quality controL
References
Chatfield, C. 1983, Statistics/or Technology, 3rd edn, Chapman and Hall.
Guttman, I.. Wilks, S.S. and Hunter 1.5. 1982, Introductory Engineering Statistics, 3rd edn, Wiley.
Hogg, R.V. and Ledolter, I. 1987, Engineering Statistics, MaCmillan.
STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
STAT301 STATISTICAL INFERENCE IOcp
PrerequisiJes MalhemaJicalStaJistics (STA T201 )andMA TH201 (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MATH201, i.e. multivariable calculus).
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester
Content
Statistical inference is the drawing of conclusions from data. The course covers likelihood-based estimation, other methods of point and interval estimation,hypothesis testing and introductory Bayesian inference.
References
Larson, H.I. 1982, Introduction 10 Probability Theory and Statislicallnference, 3rd edn, Wiley.
Hogg, R.V. and Craig, A. T. 1989,Inlroduction to Matmmatical Statistics, 4th edn, MacMillan.
Silvey, S.D. 1978, Statistical Inference, Otapman and Hall.
Press, S.I. 1989, Bayesian Statistics. Wiley Interscience.
STAT302 STUDY DESIGN IOcp
Prerequisites Mathematical Statistics (ST A T20 I) and Regression Analysis (STA TI02).
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester
Contenl
This course contrasts two methods for collecting and analysing data: experimental studies and non-experimental studies including surveys. The principles of experimental design are illustrated by studying completely randomised designs, randomised block designs and factorial designs. For surveys the topics include: simple random sampling, stratified and cluster sampling, ratio and regression estimators. Class projects are used to illustrate practical problems and the statistical packages BMDP and SAS are used to carry out analyses.
References
Barnett, V. 1986, EJemenlS of sampling theory, Hodder and Stoughton.
Cochran, W.G. 1977, Sampling Techniques, 3rd edn, Wiley.
Neter,I .• Wassennan, W. etal. 1990, Applied Linear Statistical Models, 3rd edn, Irwin.
Cochran. W.G. and Cox. G.M. 1964, Experimenlal Designs, Wiley.
Box, G.E.P .• Hunter, W.G. et al. 1978.Statisticsfor Experimenters: an introduction to design, data analysis and model building , Wiley.
STATJ03 GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS IOcp
Prerequisite MathematicalStatistics (STA T201) and Regression Analysis (ST A T202). In addition itis strongly recommended that students have passed Statistical Inference (STA n01).
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester
Content
The course covers the theory of generalized linear models and illustrates the ways in which methods for analysing continuous.
!O5
SECTION FIVE
binary. and categorical data fit into this framework. Topics include the exponential family of distributions, maximum likelihood estimation, sampling distributions for goodness-of -fit statistics, linear models for continuous data (regression and analysis of variance), logistic regression. and log-linear models. Students will implement these methods using various computer packages, including GUM.
Texl
Dobson, A.J. 1990, An Introduction to Generalized Linear Modelling, Chapman & HaIl
References
McCullagh. P. and Neider J.A. 1989, Generalized Linear Models, 2nd edn, Chapman & Hall.
Aitkin, M. et al. 1989, Statistical Modelling in GUM, Oxford Science Publications.
Healy. M.J.R. 1988, GUM: an introduction, Clarendon.
ST AT304 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS IOcp
Prerequisite Malhemalical Statistics (ST A T201 land Regression Analysis (ST A T202). In addition it is strongly recommended that students have passed Statistical Inference (STA 1'301).
Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester
Content
This course is about the theory and practice of time series analysis - the analysis of data collected at regular intervals in time (or space). Topics covered include: stationary processes, ARMA models, models for periodic phenomena, analysis using MINIT AB, SAS and other time series packages.
Tex'
Cryer, J.D. 1986, Time Series Analysis, Duxbury Press.
References
Box, G.E.P. and Jenkins, G.M. 1970, Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control, Holden Day.
Fuller, W.A. 1976,/ntroductionloSlalislicalTimeSeries, Wiley.
Newton, H.I. 1988, T1MESLAB, A Time Series Analysis Laboratory, Wadsworth & Brooks/Cole.
STAT310 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT lOcp
Prerequisites MNGT111 and subjects at Level 200 totalling 40 credit points chosen from subjects offered by the Departments of Economics, Management and/or Statistics.
Hours 2 lecture hours per week.
Content
Total Quality Management (TQM) is an all embracing management and employee involvement philosophy directed towards continuous improvement in the production of goods and services. Students who complete this course will learn to understand the fundamental principles of Total Quality Management (TQM), choose appropriate statistical techniques for improving processes and write reports to management describing processes and recommending ways to improve them.
106
STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Specific topics covered include the Deming philosophy, understanding variability through statistical thinking, qUality implementation matrices, qUality function deployment, the seven tools of quality control, quality improvement teams, the POCA cycle, standards, the role of management, basic statistical methods and control charts.
Texts To be advised.
b
SECTION SIX
SOME RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS
Advisory Information Only The choice of subjects now offered by Ute Faculty of Science and Mathematics has expanded morethan two-fold with the advent of semesterisation. In order to provide some guidance to students, each Department has provided one or more possible degree patterns which would lead to a suitable professional qualification in their discipline. The patterns are not prescriptive. except in so far as they meet the requirements of the various degree rules. Students may vary their selection in confonnity with degree rules, and prerequisite and corequisite requirements as detailed in the semester subject tables. All degree courses must aggregate to 240 credit points or 320 points for the four year Bachelor of Science (psychology) degree.
All semester subjects are identified by a code which includes up to four leUers representing the department offering the subject, followed by three numbers, the first of which signifies the level (100, 200, 300, 4(0) at which the subject is being presented.
The following programs have been set out as recommendations for inclusion in the first, second and third calendar years of a pass degree. Some programs include a separate postgraduate fourth year for the Honours degree.
AVIATION Students with Commercial Pilot and Airline Transport Licence will berequired to enrol in all SUbjects, but will be exempted from any sections which they may have completed to the University standard. These exemptions will be decided in consultation with Utelecturer concerned, who may request afonn of assessment on interview. The course is available only by attendance on campus.
Students are advised to consult the Departmental Noticeboard and liaise with the Head of the Department concerning complicated COurse program enquiries.
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES Students wishing to study Biological Sciences are advised to develop capacities in a broad range of the basic sciences, as well as in the Biological Sciences. Additionally, students' interests can change during their University training, and it is advisable to undertake a first-year program which could lead in many directions, depending upon individual experiences and interests developed during the first year at University. Students intending to major in Biology should consider Program A. Those wishing to majorin Biology and another discipline might elect to complete Programs B or C.
Biological Sciences - Program A
Year 1
BIOLIOI, BIOLI02, CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 and either MATHSl11/112 or MATHSI02/103, plus 2 other subjects from Level 100. (For Environmental Biology select GE£XJ101 and GEOGI02).
Years 2 &: 3
The table below indicates the Biological Science subjects which should be studied to enable students to develop expertise in particular specialised areas. The indicated subjects are the minimum which should be studied. Additional subjects in Biological Sciences or other disciplines must be taken to satisfy subject requirements for the degree. It should benoted that not all 300 level Biological Science subjects will be offered in the one year. Students wishing to do specific subjects should check when they are scheduled before enrolling in their second year.
Year 4
BIOlAOI and BIOL402
107
SECTION SIX
Area of Biology
Animal Physiology
Animal Science
Biochemistry
Cell & Molecular Biology
Developmental Biology
Environmental Biology
Genetics
Immunology
Molecular Biology
Plant Physiology
Plant Molecular Biology
Biological Sciences SUbjects
BIOL201, 202, 204, 205, 301, 302,305,312.
BIOL20I, 202, 204, 205, 207, 301,302,305,312.
BIOL20I, 202, 204, 205, 301, 302,305,307,309,310.
BIOL20I, 204, 205, 301, 305, 307,309,310.
BIOL202, 204, 205, 206, 301, 302,304,307,312.
BIOL202, 206, 207, 302, 303, 304,310,311.
BIOL20l, 204, 205, 207, 301, 305,307,309,310,311.
BIOL20I, 202, 204, 205, 301, 305,309,310,312.
BIOL20I, 204, 205, 301, 305, 307,309,310.
BIOL204. 205, 206, 303, 304, 307.
BIOL204, 205, 206, 303, 304, 307,309.
Environmental Biology and Geography - Program B
Year I
BIOLl 01, BIOLl 02, GEOGI 01, GEOGI02 pJus4 othersemester subjects.
Year 2
BIOL202, BIOL206, BIOL207, GEOG20l, GEOG203, GEOO204 plus 2 other semester subjects from Biology, Chemistry, Geography, Mathematics or Geology.
Year 3
BI0L303, BIOL311 plus 2 other Biology and 4 Physical Geography semester subjects.
Biology and Chemistry - Program C
Year 1
BIOLI 01 ,BIOLl02, CHEMI O1,CHEMI 02 plus 40therscmester subjects.
Year 2
BIOL20I, BIOL204, BIOL205, CHEM221 plus 20thersemester subjects
Year 3
BIOL301, BIOL305, BI0L307, BI0L309 plus 2 other semester subjects from Biology, Chemistry or one other discipline.
CHEMISTRY Chemistry is a science concerned primarily with matter and the changes that it undergoes. The study of Chemistry is important not only in itself but also as a background to many otherscienccs.
lOS
RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS
The study of Chemistry is open to all students who havequalified for admission into the University. However, those who have not studied sufficient sciences at school are advised to do some selfpreparation before beginning Level 100 Chemistry subjects. Details on expected backgrounds and suggested remedial reading are provided under the appropriate Levell 00 subject descriptions.
The Chemistry Department offers courses over the whole range of the subject. A basic chemical education is available in the traditional areas of analytical, inorganic, organic and physical chemistry together with some more diverse applied subjects. Thus students interested in Environmental Science will find relevant Chemistry subjects (e.g. CHEM261, CHEM361) to include in their program.
The flexible system of subjects offered by the Department allows a student to major in Chemistry on a broad level or to specialise in certain areas of the subject and to combine these with relevant subjects offered by other Departments. Thus a student interested primarily in Physical Chemistry may elect to choose Physics and Mathematics subjects as complements. Conversely, students majoring in other Departments may choose companion Olemistry subjects relevant to thcirinterests. Thus some courses in Analytical and Inorganic Chemistry would be useful to Geology majors; Organic Chemistry subjects would be relevant for Biology majors; Physics majors would benefit from study of some courses in Physical Chemistry, etc. At Level 300 specialist topics in active research areas of Chemistry are offered to provide a modem picture of the subject.
Students intending to do a major in Chemistry would have to complete Program A which isregardedas aminimumrequirement for a thorough grounding in the subject. Students wishing to devote themselves fully to Chemistry will undertake a double major as in Program B where they can complete up to two thirds of their degree program in this one discipline. Many subject combinations in between these two programs are possible. Thus for example, a student may choose six Level 300 subjects in Chemistry and two from another Department, etc.
Chemistry is a recognised profession which is served by a professional body, the Royal Australian Chemical Institute (RAC!). Many employment opportunities for chemists require membership of this organisation. Graduates seeking membership must have completed at least the subjects listed in Program A.
Following either of these programs or combinations thereof may lead to postgraduate sLUdy at the Honours standard (Level 400), for which entry requirements are a credit average in at least four Level 300 semester subjects. The Department strongly recommends the Honours Degree to students both forthe additional experience it provides and for its enhancement of employment opportunities and professional standing. Honours studentsdevote most of their time to an independent research project together with some fonnal course work. The project is selected in an area of interest from lists provided by members of the academic staff. This degree is also the normal entry requirement to the research higher degrees (MSc and PhD) offered by the Department.
Chemistry - Program A
Year 1
CHEMIOI andCHEMI02;eilherMATHll1/1120rMATH1021 1m, and four other subjects from Level 100.
SECfION SIX
Year 2
CHEM211, CHEM221, CHEM23 I , CHEM241, plus four other subjects from Level 200.
Year 3
Choose at least four equivalent full subjects from the Level 300 chemistry list and up to four other subjects from Level 300. The inclusion of at least two of CHEM311, CHEM321, CHEM331, CHEM341 is recommended.
Year 4
CHEM401 and CHEM402.
Chemistry - Program B
Year 1
CHEMIOl andCHEMI02; eitherMA TIl111/1120r MATHI02! 103; and four other subjects from Level 100.
Year 2
CHEM211, CHEM221, CHEM231, CHEM241, CHEM261 and three other subjects from Level 200.
Year 3
Choose eight equivalent full subjects from the L.eveI300chemislry list. The inclusion of CHEM311, CHEM321, CHEM331, CHEM341 is recommended.
Year 4
CHEM401 and CHEM402.
GEOGRAPHY
Geography is the study of the Earth and its people, giving emphasis to theinteractions among the physical, economic and social elements oftheenvironment.ModernGeographymaybedividedintostudies in Human Geography (Program A) and Physical Geography (Progmm B). but students may advantageously combine units from Human and Physical Geography (Program C).
HumanGeography(ProgramA)analysesthefactorsandprocesses that govern the distribution of people and their economic, social and cultural activities. Changes in distribution patterns and activities through time require study of past processes and prediction for the future from analysis of present trends and patterns. A wide range of opportunity is available for graduates in private business and public service departments especially in areas that involve planning, social and economic analysis.
Physical Geography (Program B) analyses the factors and processes that influence the distributions of phenomena in the physical environment. Emphasisis placedon study ofthe processes that develop landfonnsand soils, on the meteorological processes that cause variations in climate, and on the factors that influence Variations in vegetation communities and animal distributions. Employment opportunities are good both in the private and public sector which is currently demanding graduates with agood understanding of environmental issues and their management. BIOLIOI, BIOLl02, GEOLlOI, GEOLl02, PHYSIOI and PHYSI02 are useful complementary 100 level subjects.
Geography (Program C) combines units from Human Geography and Physical Geography at the 200 and 300 levels with other SUbjects from the Faculties of Arts, Economics, Education and
RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS
Science and Mathematics. TIlis program can be taken to Major level without selecting the Methods courses GEOG201 GEOG202,GEOO301andGEOG302,butforHonoursaMeth~ stream (GEOG201 plusGEOG301 orGEOG202 plusOEOG302 is necessary). Employment opportunities are good but diverse.
Major in Human Geography
Year 1
GEOG\OJ and GEOG102
Choose six other subjects recommended from Level 100 to comply with Bachelor of Science degree requirements.
Year 2
GEOG202, GEOG207 and GEOG20S.
Choose five other subjects from Level 200.
Year 3
GEOG302, GE0G306, GEOG309, and GEOG315
Choose four other subjects from Level 300.
Year 4
GEOG401 and GOOG402.
Major in Physical Geography
Year 1
GEOG101 and GEOGI02.
Choose six other subjects from Level 100. BIOLlOl, BIOLl02. GEOLl 01, GEOLl 02, PHYSI 01 and PHYS 1 02 recommended.
Year 2
GEOG20l,GEOG203 andGEOG204.
Choose five other subjects from Level 200.
Year 3
OEOG30l, GE0G304, OEOG305 and GE0G311
Choose four other subjects from Level 300.
Year 4
GEOG401 and GEOG402.
Major in Geography
Year 1
GEOG101 and OEOGI02.
Choose six other subjects from Level 100.
Year 2
Choose THREEsubjectsfrom GECXJ20I, GECXJ202, GEOG203, GEOG204, GEOG207, GEOG20S.
Choose five other subjects from Level 200.
Year 3·
Choose FOUR subjects from GEOG301, GEOG302, GEOG304, GEOG305, GE00306, GEOG309, GEOG31O, GEOG311 and GEOG315.
Choose four other subjects from Level 300.
Year 4
GEOG401 and GEOG402.
109
SECfIONSIX
"'NOTE Prerequisites will restrict some choice according to Year 2 subjects chosen.
GEOLOGY Geology provides the ultimate understanding of our planet, its environment and its evolution. As a natural science, much of the course is outdoors on field excursions and mapping occurs in a diversity of environments. The course is presented as an integrated study of the major processes, hence field,laboratory and lecture work are intertwined.
Students are strongly advised to choose companion courses, especially if interests are in palaeontology and evolution (biological sciences), surficial processes (geo graph y), geophysics (physics and mathematics), geochemistry, tectonics, mineralogy and petrology (chemistry).
Employment for geologists is available in the minerals, petroleum, coal, environmental and engineering industries. A Bachelor's degree (80 credit points at 300 Level in Geology) is required for membership to the professional body. Employers and the Department very strongly recommend the Honours degree (GEOL401/GEOIA02) which allows professional research through some independent investigation.
MATHEMATICS The Department of Mathematics offers semester subjects at all levels for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree, the Bachelor of Science degree, the Bachelor of Arts degree and the Bachelor of Engineering degree. However, students wishing to obtain professional qualifications in mathematics should enrol in the Bachelor of Mathematics degree program, where it is possible (although not compulsory) to fill completely their second and third years with mathematics.
Some Faculties use the word "major" to describe a complete strand of study which is considered to be appropriate and sufficiently educative that they may quote the name of the discipline as acomponent oftheirdegree. The program suggested for the Bachelor of Science degree would fulfil the requirements for a major in mathematics.
Bachelor of Science Degree - with Mathematics as a major
This is a course of study which includes at least the following semester subjects.
Year 1
MATHI02, 103 orMATHI I I, 102, 103 orMATHIII, 112, 103, together with other level 100 subjects to meet the B.Sc. degree requirements.
Year 2
MATH201, MATH203, MATI1204, MATH206,MATH218and one chosen from {MATH213, MATH214, MATH215} plus 5 other subjects from Level 200.
Year 3
Four semester subjects from Mathematics Level 3OD, chosen with advice from the Department, and four further subjects to meet the BSc degree requirements.
110
RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS
Mathematics - Bachelor of Mathematics Degree
The Bachelorof Mathematics degree enables a student to complete a full course in Mathematics, ortocombinea Mathematics major with Computer Science, Statistics, Physics or another appropriate discipline as set out in the Rules. Note that for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree, certain specific subjects are required at the 200 level, thus providing a base for a double majorin Mathematics, or a majorin Statistics, with options also for majors in Physics or Computer Science.
Subjects should be chosen according to the requirements of the Bachelor Degree Rules in this handbook. In total, at least 160 credit points must include the subjects in the following list. The remaining credit points for the ordinary degree may include subjects offered elsewhere in the University.
The prescribed components of the degree include
Year 1
MATHI02and MATHl03 (20 credit points)orMATHIII, 102, 103 (30 credit points) or MA THill, 112, 103 (30 credit points)
Year 2
MATH20I,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206,MATH218andooe of (MATH213, MATH214,MATH215) (30 credit points); and a further 30 credit points from MA TH200,STA T2OO,COMP200 and/or PHYS200.
Year 3
MA TH300 and/or STA T300 (40 credit points); plus a further 40 credit points from MATH3OD, STAT300, COMP300 and/or PHYS300.
(TheBMath (Hons) program consists of: MA TH4000r ST A T400 subjects)
It has been found that certain combinations of subjects have been popular, and some, in the judgement of the Department, are particularly worthwhile combinations in terms of education or career training. Five such programs are shown below. They are neither exhaustive nor prescriptive, but are for your guidance. A furthernote is added regarding the choice of subjects in Year 1 for the BMath degree.
I BMath with "Pure" Mathematics as the major interest
To follow the progress of Mathematics is to be well ahead of applications, a1though Mathematics itself is eruiched by those applications. To be able to follow such progress, the student needs to have as wide an experience in Mathematics as possible, and a thorough grounding in the basic truths.
Since the Year 3 program can accommodate no more than 8 different topics, some selection must be made. Although the program does not appcarvery "applied", nonetheless graduates with such backgrounds have adapted quickly to careers in industry and commerce as well as in research.
In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable program is:
Year 1
MA THI 02and MATH I 03 together with other subjects worth 60 credit points: (Computer Science and/or Physics and/or Statistics and/or Philosophy are popular but the choice is wide. Sec No.6 below).
b
SECfION SIX
Year 2 All available MATH200 level subjects (except perhaps one ortwoofMATH213, 214, 215, 216) together with some 200 level subjects to continue a subsidiary interest from Year 1.
Year 3 MA TH30!, MATH302, MATII304, MA TH395, MATH308, MATH310, MATH311, MATH313 orMATH314, is a "Pure Mathematics" selection of subjects - but there are variations.
Year 4
The BMath (Hans) program consists of:Year 4 MATII401
and MATH402.
2 BMath with Mathematical Physics as a major interest
Nowadays a student who wishes to understand current theories of Nature, ranging from the quantum world of elementary particles to the large scale structure of the Universe it~f, must be familiar with a formidable amount of mathematics. Areas of mathematics previously the preserve of the pure mathematician have found fruitful application in modem physics. Now the standard tools include functional ana1ysis, group theory, a1gebra, differentia1 geometry and topology, and the list is continually changing. A student wishing to study the exciting developments in modem mathematical physics needs a strong grounding in these subjects, and the ability to quickly assimilate new mathematics as required, which can only come from a firm grounding in basic 'pure' mathematics.
In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable program could be:
Year 1
MATH102 and MATH103 together with other subjects (Physics and Computer Science should be included).
Year 2
MA TH20I, MATH202, MA TH203, MA TH204, MA TH205, MATH206,MATH207,MATH218,MATH209,MATH2IO, MATH211, MATH214 together with other MATH200 subjects, and/or other subjects to continue an interest from Year 1.
Year 3
MA TH302, MATH303, MAT1!304, MA TH305, MA TH306, MA TH307, MA TH31 0, MA TH312.
Year 4
The BMath (Hons) program consists of:Year 4 MATH401 and MA TH402.
3 BMath with "Applied" Mathematics as a major interest
"Applied" Mathematics uses mathematics as a tool for investigating problems which come from other disciplines. This interdisciplinary approach to problem-solving has been remarkably successful,but practitioners need both a strong grounding in the technica1 aspects of Mathematics as well as knowledge of subjects which concentrate on Applied Mathematics. It a1so includes subjects from the Departments of Statistics and Computer Science which provide additional skills for the professiona1 Applied Mathematician.
RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS
It is recommended that a student include at least a first yearsecond year combination from another discipline. TItis provides afurther opportunity to see how mathematics can be applied. In the past students have chosen Physics orChemistry . However there are now career opportunities applying mathematics in economics, psychology, medicine, banking, biology, geology and the design of industria1 processes.
In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable program is:
Year 1
MATHI02 and MATHI03 and COMPIOI together with "other" subjects worth 40 credit points, taking note of the remarks above.
Year 2
MATH20l,MATH202,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206, MATH218,MATH213,MATH214,MATH215,MATH216, COMP201, STAT201 are a1l recommended, together with continuation of one of the "other" subjects from Year 1 and, if room, one of MATH209, MATH21 I , or MATH212.
Year 3
MATH303,MATH304,MATH305,MATH313togetherwith most of MATH306, MATH307, MATH315, MATH316 (or subjects in Physics or Statistics or Computer Science).
Year 4
The BMath (lIons) program consists of:Year 4 MATI:l401 and MATH402.
4 BMath with Statistics as a major interest
(Although STATI01 is shown as desirable, it is not a prercquisile for STA T201 for students in BMath).
In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable program is:
Year 1
Either STATI0l, MATHlll and MATH112 or STATI03. MATH102 and MATHI03. INFO} 01 is recommended. Choose other subjects worth 50 credit points from Levell 00.
Year 2
MATH201,MATH203,MATH204,MATH206,MATH218. at least one of {MATH213, MATH214,MATH215] ,together with STAT2O!, STAT202, STAT203, STAT204 together with other Mathematics or Computer Science 200 level subjects for the remaining 20 credit points.
Year 3
STATIO I , STATI02, STATI03, STATI04 with four mathematics and/or computer science 300 level subjects for the remaining 40 credit points.
Year 4
The BMath (I-Ions) program consists of:Year 4 STAT400 Subjects
5 llMath with Computer Science as a major interest
In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable program would be:
III
SECfIONSIX
Year 1
MATH102 and MATHI03, COMP101, and other subjects worth 40 credit points.
Year 2
MATH20I.MATH203.MATH204.MATH206.MATH218. MATH212.MATH2IS. MATH216.COMP20I. C0MP202. COMP203. COMP204. C0MP20S. COMP206.
STA T203, PmL242(lhatisadesirable program, but timetable constraints may modify it}.
YearJ
Four MATH300subjects and fourCOMP300 subjects. ([here is wide choice for specialisation).
Year 4
The BMath (Hons) program consists of:Year 4 MATH401 andMA TH402,or seeOte Rulesfor BCompSci(Hons) Faculty of Engineering.
6 First year subjects in the BMath Degree
The rules demand MATH102 and MATH103 (20 credit points) or MATH111, 102. 103 (30 credit points) or MATHll1. 112, 103 (30 credit points) but the remaining credit points can be taken in almost any other discipline. Popular choices include Computer Science (COMP101). Physics (PHYSI01/l02 or 1021103), Information Science and Statistics (INF0101/STAT101). However, BMath students choose widely, and the following areas have been approved for them in the past:
Accounting, Biology, Chemistry, Classical Civilisation, Drama,Engineering, Economics, English, French, Geogmphy, Geology, Gennan, Greek, History, Japanese, Latin, Legal Studies, Linguistics, Philosophy, Psychology, Sanskrit, Sociology.
There is room in the BMath course to include Level 200 subjects to continue with one of the choices made during the first year course.
PHYSICS Foremployment as a physicist, students must have a minimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major in Physics. AnHonoursdegreeinPhysicsorcombinedPhysics/Mathematics would be preferred.
Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian Institute of Physics. Membership is limited to graduates with a minimum of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of Physics has a number of grades of membership which are related to experience as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors courses in Physics at tertiary institutions and judges them in tenns of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of physicists to matters relating to physicists and their role. There are no formal conditions for registration as a physicist, but a degree is usually necessary for government and industry recognition and status as a professional physicist.
112
I RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS
It is advisable for intending physicists to include ample mathematics in their course and pursue a related science such as Chemistry or Geology to Level 200 subjects if at all possible.
For a Physics majorin the Bachelorof Science degree a1least the following semester subject structure is necessary
Year 1
PHYSI02. PHYSJ03. MATHJ02 and MATHl03.
Choose four other subjects from Levell 00, preferably leading to Level 200 in at least one other science discipline.
Year 2
PHYS201 and at least two subjects chosen from PHYS202·, PHYS203 or PHYS20S; and MATH201 (advisory).
("'Students achieving a credit level or better in PHYSI0l and PHYS I 02 may be admitted to Level 200 in Physics with the approval of the Head of Department).
Year 3
PHYS301, PHYS302 and at least two subjects chosen from PHYS303. PHYS304 or PHYS30S. Note that the Level 300 subjects should be passed with a credit or better for admission to the Bachelor of Science (Honours) degree (in Year 4).
PSYCHOLOGY As a discipline, Psychology is open to all students who gain ,'.:
admission to the University. Psychology is a broad discipline and .'. it is difficult to state preparatory subjects that should be studied together with Psychology. ~
Recently legislation was passed through the State Parliament which will require anyone wishing to practise as a Psychologist to have a minimum of four years training. In the Science and Mathematics Faculty, Psychology can be taken either as a BSc or aBSc (Psychology) degree. The BScdegree is a three year course which can be followed by a fourth or Honours year. The BSc (Psychology) degree is a four year degree. The programs within these two degrees are set out below.
The Department's aim is to produce "psychologists who should by virtue of their training be able to playa unique role such as critically examining research and scholarly literature in the field of psychology. contributing to empirical research in psychology, administering and interpreting psychological tests and measurement procedures and prescribing, implementing and evaluating f onns of psychological intervention and remediation".
Entry to Psychology 40 1 and 402 requires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit Grade in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Entry to PSYC403 and PSYC404 requires Pass grades in at least six 300 level subjects.
The Department offers two Applied Masters Degrees. The Master of Psychology (Clinical) degree has an Honours entry requirement while the Master of Psychology (Educational) has an undergraduate degree with a major in Psychology as an entry requirement, a teaching qualification and in addition, two years teaching (or other relevant) experience. The Honours degree is the normal entry into the research degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy.
SECfION SIX
BSc with a Psychology Major
Year]
PSYCI01, PSYCI02 plus 6 other semester subjects at level 100.
Year 2
PSYC20I, PSYC202, PSYC203 plus other subjects at the 200 level, some of which may also be taken in Ps)!chology.
Year 3
PSYC301, PSYC303, PSYC304 plus at least one other chosen from PSYC302. PSYC305. PSYC306. PSYC307 or PSYC308. and four other subjects chosen at the 300 level.
BSc Honours Degree in Psychology
Year]
PSYCI01, PSYCI02, plus 6 other subjects from level 100.
Year 2
Eight 200 level subjects including PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203 and PSYC204 plus other 200 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list.
Year 3
PSYC301, PSYC302 and at least four other Psychology subjects a1 the 300 level, plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Department.
Year 4
PSYC401 and PSYC402. Entry to the Honours degree requires passes in four Psychology subjects at the 200 level including PSYC201 as well as completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade average in each offour 300 Level 4 Psychology subjects at the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302.
BSc (psychology) awarded at Honours Level
Years] and 2 As for Psychology Honours above.
Year 3 PSYC301, PSYC302 and at least four other Psychology subjects at the 300 level, plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Department.
Year 4 PSYC401 and PSYC402. Entry to the Honours degree requires passes in four Psychology subjects at the 200 level inclUding PSYC201, as well as completion of 60 credit points at PSYC3000btaining at least a Credit grade average in each offour 300 Level Psychology subjects at the 300 level including PS Y C301 and PSYC302.
BSc (Psychology) Degree
Years 1 and 2 As for Psychology Honours above.
Year 3
PSYC301, and at least five other Psychology subjects at the 300 level, plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Department.
Year 4
PSYC403 and PSYC404.
STATISTICS
RECOMMENDED PROGRAMS
Statistics has been described as the science of turning data into infonnation.TItis involves collecting. presenting and analysing data, interpreting the results and using them to draw conclusions or make decisions. The principles of Statistics are based on ideas from the philosophy of science and mathematics and, more recently, from developments in computing. Computers play an essential role in Statistics for data management and analysis. Statistics is a practical subject.ltinvolves designing experimental plans and sampling procedures, calculating how many subjects or objects should be studied and determining how the measurements should be made in order to obtain data which is reliable, accurate and relevant. Methods of statistical analysis, based on mathematics including probability theory, are used to decide what conclusions can validly be drawn from the data.
The Stalistics Department offers subjects from the 100 level through to the Honours level. Research degrees may be pursued in the area of Statistics.
For a major in Statistics a student should talee the following subjects:
Year J
STATJOI andMATHI120r MATHI02and MATHJ03. Choose other subjects worth 60 credit points from Level 100.
Year 2
STATIOI. STATI02. STAT203. STATI04 and MATH20l. Choose other subjects worth 45 credit points from Level 200.
Year 3
STATIDI. STATI02. STA1103. STATI04. Choose other subjects worth 40 credit points from Level 300.
Year 4
80 credit points selected from STAT401 to STAT41I.
113
SECTION SEVEN
POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES
SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR SCIENCE
Admission to Candidature
1. A candidate may undertake the honours degree in either one or two disciplines.
2. In orderto be admiued to candidature forthe degree in a single discipline an applicant shall:
(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary DegreeofBachelorofScienceofthe University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and
(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department responsible for the discipline.
3. In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree in two disciplines, an applicant shall:
(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary DegreeofBachelorofScienceofthe University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and
(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments responsible for the disciplines.
Qualification for Admission to the Degree
4. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.
114
Classes of Honours
5. There shall be three classes of honours: Class I, aass II and Class III. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.
Time Requirements
6. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, acandidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.
SECfrON SEVEN POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are:
Code Name Credit Points Prerequisite Corequisite
BIOL401 Biology Honours 401 40 40 cp 300 BIOL or other 300 level subjects approved by the Department, obtaining at least a Credit grade average
BIOL402 Biology Honours 402 40 BIOL401
CHEM401 Chemistry Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 CHEM obtaining at least a Credit grade average
CHEM402 Chemistry Honours 402 40 CHEM401
GEOO401 Geography Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 GEOG obtaining at least a Credit grade average
GEOO4D2 Geography Honours 402 40 GEOG401
GEOL401 Geology Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 GEOL obtaining at least a Credit grade average
GEOL4D2 Geology Honours 402 40 GEOL401
MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 MATH obtaining at least a Credit grade average
MATH402 Mathematics Honours 402 40 MATH401
PHYS401 Physics Honours 401 40 Any three PHYS300 subjects and PHYS301 obtaining at least a Credit grade averaae
PHYS402 Physics Honours 402 40 PHYS40r
PSYC40l Psychology Honours 401 (Seminars) 40 Four PSYC200 subjects incl. PSYC201 and 60 cp
at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade in each of four PSYC300 including
PSYC301 and PSYC302
PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402(Thesis) 40 PSYC401
Acandidatemay pursueacombined honours degree in one honours subject from each of two Departments with the approval of the Heads of both Departments.
liS
SECfION SEVEN
SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (A VIA nON)
Admission to Candidature
1. In order to be admiued to candidature for the degree an applicant shall:
(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Science (Aviation) of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that degree; and
(b) have completed any additional work prescribed in accordance with the policy detennined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of A vialion.
Qualification for Admission to the Degree
2. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalling 80credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.
Classes of Honours
3, There shall be three classes of honours: Class It Class II and Class III. OassII shall have twodivisions,namely Division 1 and Division 2.
Time Requirements
4. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, acandidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.
116
POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES
I
t I,· l
SECTION SEVEN
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are:
Code Name Credit Points
A candidate may emol in 80 credit points including AVIA405 to be chosen from:
A VIA401 Aviation Honours 401 20
AVlA402 Aviation Research 10
& Methodology
AVlA403 Technology in Aviation 10
AVlM04 The Human Variable 10
AVlM05 Aviation Honours -Thesis 40
POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES
Prerequisite
B.Sc.(Avialion) with a Credit grade average
in A VIA308, A V1A3IO,
A V1A311 and A VlA314
AVlA314
AVlA310, AVIA312
and AVlA313
AVlA221 and AVIA311
B.Sc.(Aviation) with
an average obtaining Credit grades in A V1A308, A VIA3lO,
AVlA311 and AVIA314
Corequisite
AVlA40l
AVlA401 and
either AVlA403 or AVlA404
111
SECfION SEVEN
SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT
Admission to Candidature
1. In orderto be admitted to candidature forthe degree in a single discipline an applicant shall:
(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Applied Science (Fnvironmental Assessment and Management) of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board, or have already been admitted to that degree; and
(b) have completed any additional work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty BoardontherecommendationoftheHeadofDepartment of Applied Science and Technology.
Qualification for Admission to the Degree
2. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalling 80credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.
Classes or Honours
3. There shall be three elasses of Honours: Class I, Class II and Class m. Class II shall have two divisions namely Division 1 and Division 2.
Time Requirements
4. Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.
118
r If
POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES SECfION SEVEN
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are:
Code Name Credit Points
EAMS401
EAMS402 EAMS404
Environmental Management
Seminar Series Research Project
20
20 40
POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES
Prerequisite
EAMS301. EAMS311 Forty credit points level 300 EAMS obtaining alleast a
Credit grade average
Corequisite
EAMS401 EAMS401
119
SECfION SEVEN
SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS
Admission to Candidature
1. A candidate may undertake the honours degree in either one or two disciplines.
2. In orderto be admitted to candidature forthe degree in a single discipline an applicant shall:
(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and
(b) havecompletedsuchotherworkprescribedinaccordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department responsible for the discipline.
3. In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree in two disciplines, an applicant shall:
(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and
(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments responsible for the disciplines.
Qualification for Admission to the Degree
4. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.
Classes of Honours
5. There shall be three classes of honours: Class I, Class II and Class lll. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.
Time Requirements
6. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.
120
POSTGRADUAlE DEGREE RULES SECfrON SEVEN
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are:
Code Name Credit Points
Mathematics MATH401
MATH402
Statistics
Mathematics Honours 401
Mathematics Honours 402
A candidate may enrol in 80 credit points, to be chosen from:
STAT401 Probability Theory
STAT402 STAT403 STAT404 STAT405 STAT406 STAT407 STAT408 STAT409 STAT410 STAT411
Analysis of Categorical Data
Demography and Survival Analysis Robust Regression and Smoothing Statistical Consulting Methods for Quality Improvement Advanced Topics in Statistics Project Project Project Project
40
40
\0
\0 10 10 10 \0 10 \0 20 30 40
POSTGRADUA TIl DEGREE RULES
Prerequisite
40 cp level 300 MATH subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average
MATH401
40 cp from level 300 STAT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average As for STAT401 As forSTAT401 As for STAT401 As forSTAT401 AsforSTAT401 As forSTAT401 As for STAT401 AsforSTAT401 As for STAT401 AsforSTAT401
A candidate may pursue a combined honours degree in one honours subject from each of two Departments in one of the following combinations:
MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 MATH subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average
PHYS401 Physics Honours 401 40 Any three PHYS 300 subjects and PHYS301 obtaining at least a Credit average
or MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 As previously stated ECON401 Economics IV 40 Consult Department or
MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 As previously stated GEOL401 Geology Honours 401 40 40 cp level 300 GEOL subjects
obtaining at least a Credit grade average or MATH401 Mathematics Honours 401 40 As previously stated PSCY401 Psychology Honours 401 40 Four PSYC 200 subjects incl.
PSYC201 and 60 cp at PSYC 300 obtaining at least a Credit grade in each of four PSYC300 including PSYC301 and PSYC302.
121
SECTION SEVEN
SCHEDULE- GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Admission to Candidature
1. In order to be admitted to candidature for the diploma an applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University orto any other degree approved by the Faculty Board or have achieved atanothertertiary institution a standard of performance deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent; and
(b) havecompletedsuchotherwOI'kprescribedinaccordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board; or
(c) in exceptional cases, produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.
Qualification for Admission to the Diploma
2. To qualify for admission to the diploma a candidate shall complete subjects totalling 80 credit points from the list of Approved Subjects. including 40 credit points in subjects at the 400 level or higher.
Grading of the Diploma
3. The diploma shall be conferred as an Ordinary Diploma except that, where the perfonnance of a candidate has reached a standard detennined by the Faculty Board to be sufficient, the diploma may be conferred with Merit.
Time Requirements
4. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.
122
, POSTGRADUAlE DEGREE RULES SECfION SEVEN
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The Subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are:
Code Name Credit Points
BIOLJ03 Environmental Plant Physiology 10 BlOLJlt Environmental Biology 10
CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10
CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10
CHEE342 Safety and Environment 10
CNL242 Environmental Engineering 2 5 EDUC612 The Scope of Environmental Education 10 EDUC613 Issues and Research in Environmental Education to
GEOG305 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG306 Geography of Australia: 10
an Historic Perspective GEOG311 Hydrology 10 GE0G491 Environmental Studies
Seminar 1 20 GE0G492 Environmental Studies Minor Project 10 GEOG595 Directed Environmental Study 1 10 GEOG596 Directed Environmental Study 2 10 MECH407 Environmental Engineering 5
PHlL391 Technology and Human Values I 10 PHllA91 Technology. Human Values and
The Environment 10 SOC304 Medicine in Industrial Society 20
SURV473 Town Planning 10
Footnote
PQSTGRADUA TE DEGREE RULES
Prerequisite Corequlslte
TwoBIOL200 BIOL207 or BIOL203. Students who have completed BI0L306 are not eligible to do this subject CHEMIOI, CHEMI02 CHEM261 Consult Head of Department CNL141 Consult Education Department Consult Education Department GEOG203 GEOG202 plus either GEOG205 or GEOG206 GEOG20l, GEOG203
Consult Department of Mechanical Engineering
20 c.p. at 200 level including S0C201 Consult Department
Leave of Absence-For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards. a candidate shalJ be deemed to be in good standing if. at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol withoUi restrictions.
*Or such subjects considered necessary upon approval of the Dean.
123
SECTION SEVEN
SCHEDULE - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN MATHEMATICAL STUDIES
Admission to Candidature
1. An applicant for admission to candidature for the Diploma shall:
(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University or to a degree of any other tertiary institution approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; or
(b) in exceptional circumstances have other qualifications approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board.
Qualincation for Admission to the Diploma
2. (1) To qualify for the diploma a candidate shall pass a program of study approved by the Facull y Board, totalling not less than 80 credit points.
(2) The program shall consist of subjects from levels above 100 level offered by the Department of Mathematics and the Department of Statistics or other subjects with considerable mathematical content, as determined by the Dean,offered by olherdepartments of the University.
(3) Not more than 20 credit points from 200 level SUbjects may be counted by a candidate towards the diploma
Grading
3. In cases where a candidate's performance in the program has reached alevel determined by the Faculty Board, the diploma may be awarded with Merit.
Time Requirements
4. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.
Footnote
Leave of Absence - For the purposes of Rule 10 of lh£ Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if, at the conclusion of the year of last enrolmenl in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol witlwuJ restrictions.
SCHEDULE- GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN SCIENCE
Admission to Candidature
1. In order to be admitted to candidature for the diploma an. applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board or have achieved at anothertertiary institution a standard of performance deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent; and
(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board; or
(c) in exceptional cases, produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.
124
POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES
Qualification for Admission to the Diploma
2. To qualify for admission to the diploma a candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.
Grading of the Diploma
3. The diploma shall be conferred as an Ordinary Diploma except that, where the perfonnanceof acandida1e has reached a standard determined by the Faculty Board to be sufficient, the diploma may be confened with Merit.
Time Requirements
4. Except with the pennission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.
SECTION SEVEN
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are:
Code Name Credit Points
BI0L405 Biology Diploma 405 40
BIOIA06 CHEM405 CHEM4Q6 GEOG405 GEOG406 GEOIA05 GEOIA06 PHYS405 PHYS406 PSYC405 PSYC406
Footnote
Biology Diploma 406 Chemistry Diploma 405 Chemistry Diploma 406 Geography Diploma 405 Geography Diploma 406 Geology Diploma 405 Geology Diploma 406 Physics Diploma 405
Physics Diploma 406 Psychology Diploma 405 Psychology Diploma 406
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
POSTGRADUAlE DEGREE RULES
Prerequisite
40 c.p.leveI300 BIOL or other subjects approved by the Department
40 c.p. level 300 CHEM
40 c.p.level 300 GEOO
40 c.p. level 300 GEOL
40 c.p. level 300 PHYS
40 c.p.leveI300 PSYC
Corequisite
BIOlA05
CHEM405
GEOG405
GEOIA05
PHYS405
PSYC405
Leave of Absence -For th£ purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards, a candidate shaU be deemed to be in good standing if. at the cOl1Clusion ofth£ year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.
125
RULES GOVERNING MASTERS DEGREES
SCHEDULE- MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
These Rules are currently being revised. Copies of the revised Rules are available from the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
126
SECfION SEVEN
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by Ute Faculty Board for the award are:
Code Name Credit Points
BIOLJ03
BIOLJl1
CHEM261
CHEM361 CHEE342
CIVL242 ECON311
EDUC612 EDUC613
GEOG304 GEOG305
GEOG306
GEOG309
GEOG311
GEOG491
GEOG492
GEOG591
GEOG592
GEOG594
GEOG595
GEOG596
GEOLJ20
MECH309
MECH407
OHS502
PHIL391 PHIL592
SOO04
SURV473
Environmental Plant Physiology Environmental Biology
Environmental Chemistry
Environmental Chemistry Safety and Environment
Environmental Engineering 2
Environmental Economics
The Scope of Environmental Education Issues and Research in Environmental Education The Biosphere and Conservation
Climatic Problems
A Geography of Australia, Historical Perspective
Society and Space
Hydrology
Environmental Studies Seminar 1
Environmental Studies Minor Project
Environmental Studies Major Project I Environmental Studies Major Project II Environmental Studies Seminar 2
Directed Environmental Study 1
Directed Environmental Study 2
Geology of Quaternary Environments
Noise Pollution
Environmental Engineering
Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology Technology and Human Values
Technology, Human Values and The Environment
Medicine in Industrial Society Town Planning
*Or such subjects considered necessary upon approval of the Dean.
10 10
10 10 10 5
10
10 10
10 10 10
10
10 20
10 30
20
30
20
10 10 10 5
5
10
10 10
20 10
POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES
Prerequisite Corequisite
Two BIOL200
BIOL207 or BI0L203.
Students who have completed BI0L306 are not eligible to do this subject
CHEMI01, CHEMI02
CHEM261
Consult Head of Department CIVL141
ECON201 Consult Education Department
Consult Education Department
GEOG203
GEOG203
GEOG202 plus
either GEOO205 or GE(XJ206
GEOO202 plus either GEOO205 or GEOG206
GEOG20I, GEOG203
GEOL213 or GEOG204
Consult Department of Mechanical
Engineering
20 c.p. at 200 level including SOC201 Consult Department
127
SECTION SEVEN
SCHEDULE - MASTER OF MATHEMATICS
1. The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Mathematics.
2. To beeligiblefor admission to candidalUre an applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor of the University of Newcastle with honours in the area of study in which the applicant proposes to carry out research orto an Honours degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another University; or
(b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of another tertiary institution and have completed such work and sat for such examinations as the Faculty Board may have determined and have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that required for admission to a degree of Bachelor with second class honours in an appropriate subject; or
(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such academic or professional qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.
3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program consisting of:
(a) such examinations and other such work as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board; and
(b) a thesis emlxx:lying the results of an original investigation or design.
4. The program shall be completed in not less than two years except that, in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for a degree of Bachelor with Honours or for a qualification deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent or who has had previous research experience, the Faculty Board may reduce this period by up to one year.
5. A part-time candidate shall, except with the permission of the Faculty Board, which shall be given only in special circumstances:
(a) conduct the major proportion of the research or design work in the University; and
(b) take part in research seminars within the Department in which the the program is being canied out.
6. Any third examiner shall be an external examiner.
SCHEDULE - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (CLINICAL)
These Rules are currently being revised. Copies of the revised Rules are available from the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
128
POSTGRADUATE DEGREE RULES
SCHEDULE - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (EDUCATIONAL)
These Rules are currently being revised. Copies of the revised Rules are available from the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES
APPROVED SUBJECTS
The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the Award are: Code Name Credit Points When Offered PSYC521 Counselling and Psychotherapy I 20 Full Year PSYC522 Counselling and Psychotherapy II 20 Full Year PSYC523 The Client: Diagnosis an~ Treatment I 20 Full Year PSYC524 The Client: Diagnosis and Treatment II 20 Full Year PSYC525 Professional Practice and Consultancy Skills I 20 Full Year PSYC526 Professional Practice and Consultancy Skills II 20 Full Year PSYC527 Research Methodology and Thesis I 20 Full Year PSYC528 Research Methodology and Thesis II 20 Full Year
129
SEerlON SEVEN
SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SCIENCE
1. A candidate for the degree of Master of Science may be enrolled in either the F&CUlty of Engineering orthe Faculty of Science and Mathematics. TheFacultyinwhichthecandidate is eruolled shall be responsible for the program.
2. (1) To be eligible for admission tocandidaturein the Faculty of Science and Mathemalics an applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours Class I or Class IT oCthe University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of this or any other university; or
(b) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science of the University of Newcastle or other approved uni versit y and have completed such work and passed such examinations as the Faculty Board may have detennined and have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that required for admission to adegree of Bachelor with second class Honours in an appropriate subject; or
(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as maybe approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation ofthe Head of the Department in which the applicant proposes to carry out the program.
(2) To be eligible for admission to candidature in the Faculty of Engineering an applicant shall:
(a) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree with Honours in the University of Newcastle or other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board in the area in which the applicant proposes to carry out research; or
(b) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree in the University of Newcastle or other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board and have completed to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board such work and examinations as determined by the Faculty Board; or
(c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as maybe approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department in which the candidate proposes to carry out the program.
3. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program consisting of:
(a) such work and examinations as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board; and
(b) athesisembodying theresults of an original investigation or design.
4. The program shall be completed:
(a) in not less than two academic years except that, in the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for adegree of Bachelor with Honours or a qUalification
130
PQSTGRADUA TE DEGREE RULES
deemed by the Faculty Boardto beequivalentorwhohas had previous research experience, the Faculty Board may reduce this period to not less than one academic year; and
(b) except with the permission of the Faculty Board, in not more than five years.
5. (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, which shall be given only in special circumstances, apart-time candidate enrolled in the FacuIt y of Science and Mathematics shall:
(a) conduct the major proportion of the research or design work in the University; and
(b) take part in research seminars within the Department in which the program is being carried out.
(2) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate enrolled in the Faculty of Engineering shall take part in the research seminars within the Department in which the program is being carried out.
SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SCIENTIFIC STUDIES
These Rules are currently being revised. Copies of the revised Rules are available from the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
r
I
SECfION SEVEN
Code
ASTK695
ASTK696
ASTK697
ASTK698
EAMS695
EAMS696
EAMS697
EAMS698
B[0L695
BI0L696 B[0L697
BI0L698
CHEM695
CHEM696 CHEM697
CHEM698
GE0G695
GE0G696
GE0G697
GEOG698
GE0L695
GE0L696 GEOL697
GE0L698
MATH695
MATH696
Name Credit Points
Foundations of Applied 40 Science & Technology
Topics in Applied Science 40 & Technology Advanced Topics in Applied 40 Science & Teclmology Project 40
Foundations of Environmental 40 Asessment & Management
Topics in Environmental 40 Assessment & Management Advanced Topics in 40 Environmental Assessment & Management Project 40
Foundations of Biological 40 Sciences
Topics in Biological Sciences 40 Advanced Topics in 40 Biological Sciences Project 40
Foundations of Chemistry 40
Topics in Chemistry 40 Advanced Topics in Chemistry40
Project 40
Foundations of Geography 40
Topics in Geography 40
Advanced Topics in 40 Geography Project 40
Foundations of Geology 40
Topics in Geology 40 Advanced Topics in Geology 40
Project 40
Foundations of Mathematics 40
Topics in Mathematics 40
When OITered
S1,S2,FY
SI,S2,FY
Not in 1993 Not in 1993 SI,S2,FY
SI,S2,FY
Not in 1993
Not in 1993 SI,S2,FY
S1,S2,FY Not in 1993 Nolin 1993 SI,S2,FY
SI,S2,FY Not in 1993 Not in 1993 Not in 1993
Not in 1993 Not in 1993 Not in 1993 S1,S2,FY
Sl,S2,FY Not in 1993 Not in 1993 SI,S2, FY
SI,S2, FY
POSTGRADUA 1E DEGREE RULES
Prerequisite Corequisite
Appropriate undergraduate subjects ASTK695
ASTK696
ASTK696
Appropriate undergraduate subjects EAMS695
EAMS696
EAMS696
Appropriate undergraduate subjects BI0L695 BI0L696
Bl0L696
Appropriate undergraduate subjects CHEM695 CHEM696
CHEM696
Appropriate undergraduate subjects GEOG695
GEOG696
GE0G696
Appropriate undergraduate subjects GEOL695 GE0L696
GE0L696
Appropriate undergraduate subjects MATH695
131
SECfION SEVEN POSTGRADUA IE DEGREE RULES
Code Name Credit Points When Offered Prerequisite Corequisite
MATH697 Advanced Topics in 40 Nolin MATH696 Mathematics 1993
MATH698 Project 40 Not in MATH696 1993
PHY5695 Foundations of Physics 40 51,52, FY Appropriate undergraduate subjects
PHY5696 Topics in Physics 40 51,52,FY PHYS69$
PHY5697 Advanced Topics in Physics 40 Not in PHY5696 1993
PHY5698 Projecl 40 Nolin PHY5696 1993
P5YC695 Foundations of Psychology 40 Nolin Appropriate 1993 undergraduate
subjects
P5YC696 Topics in Psychology 40 Not in PSYC695 1993
PSYC697 Advanced Topics in 40 Not in P5YC696 Psychology 1993
PSYC698 Project 40 Not in P5YC696 1993
5TAT695 Foundations of Statistics 40 51,52, FY Appropriate undergraduate subjects
5TAT696 Topics in Statistics 40 51,52,FY 5TAT695 5TAT697 Advanced Topics in Statistics 40 Not in 5TAT696
1993 5TAT698 Project 40 Not in 5TAT696
1993
A candidate may pursue subjects in two disciplines with the approval of the Heads of both Departments and the Dean of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.
132
SECTION EIGHT
POSTGRADUATE DEGREE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
Notes on Subject and Topic Descriptions The subject and topic outlines and reading liSIS which follow are set out in a standard fannat to facilitate easy reference. An explanation is given below of some of the technical tenns used in this Handbook.
Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed at a Pass grade or better before a candidate enrols in a particular subject. The onI y prerequisites noted for topics are any topics or subjects which must be taken before enrolling in the particular topic. To enrol in any subject which the topic may be part of, the prerequiSites for that subject must still be satisfied.
Where a prerequisite is marked as advisory ,lectures will be given on the assumption that the subject ortopic has been completed as indicated.
Corequisites for subjects or topics are those which the candidate must pass before enrolment or be taking concurrently.
Examination Under examination rules "examination" includes mid-year examinations, assignments, tests or any other work by which thefinalgradeof acandidate in a subject is assessed. Some attempt has been made to indicate for each subject how assessment is determined.
Texts are essential books recommended for purchase.
References are books relevant to the subject or topic which, however, need not be purchased.
LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS REFERRED TO IN HONOURS DEGREES IN THE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS
Entry to an Honours degree requires a Credit or better average in appropriate 300 level subjects: see prerequisite requirements for relevant subjects.
APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT
EAMS401 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT Wcp
Prerequisile EAMS301, EAMS311. Forty credit points level 300 EAMS obtaining at least a Credit grade average
AssesSfMnt (a) Two major essays
Content
(b) Presentation by each student of two seminar topics
(c) Satisfactory standard reached in a two hour written examination at the end of the year
Policy making in environmental assessment and management, administration in environmental management,
federal and state environmental legislation, role of relevant government agenci es and commissions, government policies and reports, national and international conventions, the roles of the UnitedNationsEnvironmentProgramandtheWoridCommission on Environment and Development, the professional practice of environmental management, procedures for consultancy. policy making in private industry, codes of ethics, the environmental audit, environmental risk analysis, trends in environmental management, the public consultation process, conflict resolution in environmental decision-ma1cing.
Text To be advised
References
Australian Government 1991, DiscussionPapersonEcologically Sustainable Development. Australian Government Printer, Canberra.
Carter, R. et at 1984, Systems Management and Change: A Graphic Guide. Milton Keynes. Open University Press.
133
SECfION EIGHT
Checkland, P.B. 1981, Systems Thinking, Systems Practice. Wiley. Chichester.
Dorney, L.C. 1987, The Professional Practice of Environmental Management. SpringerNerlag.
Folke. C. and Kaberger, T (008.) 1991. Linking ihe Natural Environment and the Economy: Essaysfrom the Eco-Eco Group. Kluwer Academic Publishers.Dordrecht.
World Commission on EnvironmentalandDevelopment (WCED) 1987, Our Common Future (The Brundtland Report). OUP.
Oxford.
Journals Journal of Environmental Management
Journal of Environmental Planning
The Environmentalist
EAMS402 SEMINAR SERIES
Corequisite EAMS401
20cp
Assessment (a) Presentation of a written paper based on each seminar topic 80%
(b) Satisfactory presentation of seminartopic 20%
Content
Attendance and participation at seminars with a written paper to be presented. Additionally. the student will prepare and present a seminar on an approved topic
References To be provided
List of Seminar Topics
Water Resources Management in Austra1ia
Principles and Practices of Wastewater Treatment and Disposal
Procedures
Radiation in the Environment
Exotic Plants and Associated Environmental Problems
Endangered Animals in Australia
Ethics in Environmental Decision-Making
Current Agricultural Practices in Australia and Land Degradation.
EAMS404 RESEARCH PROJECT 40 cp
Corequisite EAMS401.
AssessmentAn internal supervisor and an external examiner will assess the research project
Content
The project will describe research and findings on an original investigation approved by the supeIVisor
General
The project is worth 50% of the year's mark for Honours. It must be prepared in standard thesis fonnat, and include raw data, questionnaires, diagrams of experimental apparatus, computer programs, in appendices. Three unbound copies are to be submitted to the Department of Applied Science and Technology by 30 October. These copies will later be bound; one is retained by the student's supervisor, one is placed in the departmental library for future reference, and the third is returned to the student after fmal assessment has been made.
134
POSTGRADUArn SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
AVIATION
AVIA401 A VIA TION HONOURS 401 20cp
Prerequisites B.Sc.(Aviation) with a Credit grade average or better in A VIA308. A VIA31 O. A VIA311 and A VIA314.
Hours 8 hours per week for the full year.
Examination Progres si ve assessment based upon written reports, seminar presentations and examination,
Content
Students will present seminars which relate to their project work in tenns of a review of literature and methodology. Attendance and participation is compulsory.
AVIA402 AVIATION RESEARCH & METHODOLOGY IOcp
Prerequisite A VIA314.
Corequisite AVIA401.
Hours 6 hours per week for Semester 1.
Examination Progressive assessment based on seminar presentations, assignments and examination.
Content
Simple statistical procedures such as frequency distributions, cross-tabulations, correlations.t-tests. chi-sqUared tests andsimple ANOV As and regression will be introduced.
Reviews and reports of research will be discussed.
Also covered will be qualitative approaches such as self-reports, observational and action research and historical research. Casestudies, questionnaire construction and interview skills will be
covered.
AVIA403 TECHNOLOGY IN AVIATION IOcp
Prerequisites AVIA310, A VIA312 and AVIA313.
Hours 6 hours per week for Semester 1.
Examination Progressive examination based on seminars,
assignments and tests.
Conlenl
The subject is designed to permit wide interpretation and application to the range of related topics covered in the BSc (Aviation). These topics include aeronautical engineering, design, systems and flight operations such as flight planning, navigation
and meteorology.
Texts and References To be advised.
A VIA404 THE HUMAN VARIABLE IN AVIATION IOcp
Prerequisites AVIA221 and AVIA311.
Hours 6 hours per week for Semester I.
Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, assignments and examinations.
Content
This subJect is intended to pennit a range of interpretations to
SECfION EIGHT
enable students to make a study of an approved area in which the human variable in aviation is the focus. Such a focus includes ergonomics, aviation psychology. aviation medicine, instruction and learning.
Texts and References To be advised.
AVIA40S AVIATION HONOURS - THESIS 40cp
Prerequisites B.Sc.(Aviation) with a Credit grade average or better in A VIA308. A VIA3! O. A VIA31! and A VIA3!4.
Corequisites A VIA401 and either AVIA403 or A VIA404.
Hours 12 hours per week for the full year.
Examination The thesis will be assessed by two Examiners one of whom may be external.
Content
A VIA405 is half the Honours in Aviation. It consists of the development, conduct, analysis and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis (of about 75 pages) formally presents this research in conventional fonnat.
Students are supervised by members of the Department of Aviation and are advised to discuss possible projects well in advance with potential supeIVisors. Nominated topics are submitted to a meeting of the staff of the Department of Aviation, chaired by the Head of Department. for approval.
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
BI0L401) BIOL402)
HONOURS IN BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES 40+40cp
Prerequisites 40 cpo Level 300 BIOL(orother300level subjects approved by Department), obtaining at least a Credit grade average.
Content
Carry out aresearch project and complete a thesis, essay, vivaand two seminars.
CHEMISTRY
CHEM40I) HONOURS IN CHEMISTRY CHEM402)
40+40cp
Prerequisites Completion of ordinary degree requirements and permission of the Head of Department. An average credit grade in at least four Level 300 chemistry subjects is the normal minimum entry requirement. It will be expected that a student undertaking project workin a particular area will have completed the corresponding Level 300 core subject at a minimum of credit grade. Students intending to undertake the Honours program should notify the Head of Department of their intention by I November in their final undergraduate year and confinn this as soon as final examination results are known.
Content
The Honours program extends overtwo semesters orits part-time equivalent and consists of
i) a course of advanced lectures (approximately 50 hours) (30%)
POSTGRADUA rn SUBJECf DESCRlPTIONS
ii) a reading list in the main area of interest (30%)
iii) a supervised research project, the results of which are embodied in a thesis and presented as a seminar (40%)
Examination Half each of the lecture course and the reading list will be examined at the end of semester one and the remainder at the end of the second semester. The thesis will be assessed by a committee of three (one of whom shall be the project supervisor) appointed by the Department. Part-time students will have their assessment spread accordingly over two academic years.
GEOGRAPHY Entry to an Honours degree requires a Credit or better grade average in appropriate 300 level subjects.
GEOG401) HONOURS IN GEOGRAPHY GEOG402)
40+4Ocp
Prerequisites GEOGI01 and GEOGI02 plus eitherGEOG201 and GEOG301 orGEOO202andGEQG302 including 30cp from 200 level and 40 cp from 300 GEOG level obtaining at least a Credit grade average.
To qualify for admission to Geography Honours, a student must normally have completed sufficient training in geographical methods (i.e.GEOG20! and GEOG30! for Physical Geography; GEOG202 and GEOG302 for Human Geography), have completed a Major in Geography that includes GEOGI01, GEOO I 02,30 credit points from level 200 courses and 40 credit points from level 300 courses. To proceed to Geography Honours a candidate must have obtained at least a Credit grade average in the 300 level Geography subjects taken for the major plus at least 20 other points at credit level in their university courses. The student must also satisfy the Head of the Department of her/his ability in the area of study within which the proposed research topic lies.
Hours 48 hours per week for two semesters.
Examination External and internal examination of a research thesis, and internal assessment of the coursework.
COnlenl
A thesis embodying the results of an original investigation on a topic approved by the Head of Department and coursework as preSCribed.
Note A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours should notify the Head of the Department by I October in the final year of the undergraduate degree and must confirm this as soon as final results for the year are known. Candidates are expected to commence work on their thesis after completion of their undergraduate degree.
GEOLOGY
GEOL40!) HONOURS IN GEOLOGY GEOL402)
4O+4Ocp
Prerequisites 40cp Level 300 GEOL obtaining at least a Credit grade average. For GE0L402, prerequisite of GE0L401, completion of ordinary degree requirements.
Hours To be advised.
\35
SECTION EIGHT
Examination
(i) a viva voce examination
(ii) research work carried out and its presentalion in a thesis
(iii) seminars, assignments
Content
Part A
Lecture·tutorial work. with directed reading in the following fields of geology: mineralogy and crystallography; geochemistry; igneous petrology; metamorphic petrology; coal petrology; sedimentology; stratigraphy, palaeontology; structural geology; economic geology~ engineering geology. Presentation of a seminar.
Not all fields will be available every year.
Part B
A research project, the results of which are to be embodied in a thesis, presentation of a seminar on the results of the research project.
PHYSICS
PHYS401) HONOURS IN PHYSICS PHYS402)
40+40cp
Prerequisites PHYS3D1 plus any otherthree PHYS300 subjects obtaining alleast a Credit grade average.
Hours PHYS401 and PHYS402 together comprise 115 hours of lectures plus a project.
Examination As required.
Con/ent
PHYS401 andPHYS402areintendedtogivestudentsanadvanced understanding of the fundamentals of modem physics appropriale for an Honours graduate in the discipline as well as exposure to the current interests of the Department viz. solid state physics, radar meteor physics, electromagnetic signal propagation and aspects of applied physics.
These aims will be achieved by offering 3 compulsory core topics, Quantum Mechanics. Theoretical Solid State Physics and Plasma Physics. and a number of optional topics. These lalter shall include Relativity. Applied Nuclear Physics. Surface Physics. Space Physics, Atomic collisions in Solids. Laser Physics, Fourier Transfonns, Ionospheric Physics and Particle Detection. While all of these topics may not be offered in any year, further topics may be available depending on visitors to the department.
T ex.ts As required.
PSYCHOLOGY
PSYC401) PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS) 40+40cp
PSYC402) PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 (fHESIS)
136
POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS) 40cp
Prerequisite A completed BA or BSc or three complete years of aBA(Psych) or BSc(Psych)including the subjects PSYC1 01 and PSYCI 02, alleast 40 credit points of Psychology al the 200 level including PSYC201. and alleast 60 credit points of Psychology al the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidates must have obtained alleast a Credit gradein each off our 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYC302.
Hours 12 hours per week for the full year
ExaminaJion To be advised
Can/en!
PSYC401 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full-time students enrol in PSYC402 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402in the second. PSYC401 consists of five seminar series, including one compulsory unit on theoretical issues in Psychology, a choice of two units in mathemalical or physiological Psychology, and a choiceoftwounitsinappliedorsocial Psychology. Each unit will include seminars al which altendance and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examinalion, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. One seminar may be replaced with a practical placement and associated essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403.
Texts and References To be advised.
PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 (IHESIS) 40cp
Prerequisite A completed BA or BSc, or three complete years of a BA(Psych) or BSc(Psych) including the subjects PSYCIOI and PSYC102, at least 40 credit points of Psychology al the 200 level including PSYC201, and at least 60 credit points of Psychology al the 300 level including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidales must have obtained alleast a Credit grade in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects including PSYC301 and PSYeJ02.
Corequisite PSYC401
Hours 12 hours per week for the full year
Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by the supervisor and by another member, or members of the Department.
Content
PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours in Psychology. Full·time students enrol in PSYC401 as welL Part·time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402in the second. PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analysis, and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis is afonnal presentalion of this research and must bein APA fonnal. There is a limit of fifty pages. Each student will be supervised by a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriale staff members well in advance. Involvement with external agencies must be through official departmental channels.
Texts and References To be advised.
SECTION EIGHT
MATHEMATICS
MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS 40+4Ocp MATH402)
Prerequisites Excellent results in amajor sequenceofMa1hematics subjects, including alleast 40 credit points al the 300 level, and favourable assessment by the Head of Department.
Hours At least 8 lecture hours per week over one full-time year or 4 lecture hours per week over two part-time years.
Examination At least eight 2 hour final papers, and a study under direction of a special topic using relevant published malerial and presented in written fonn. Work on this thesis normally starts early in February.
ContenJ
A selection of al least eight Malhematics topics. The topics offered may be from any branch of Malhematics including Pure Mathemalics, Applied Mathematics ,Statistics, Com puter Science and Operations Research as exemplified in the pUblication Mathematical Reviews. Summaries of some topics are given later in this section of the Handbook, listed as "500 level subjects ". but the Department should be consulted for further details, including the current list of other topics which are not available as"500 level subjects".
Students desiring admission to this subject should apply in writing to the Head of the Department before 20 December of the preceding year. A meeting will be held on the first Tuesday ofthe first semester in room V107 al 1.00p.m. to detennine both the timetable for topics, and which topics will be covered.
HONOURS COURSE IN STATISTICS 80cp
This is a level 400 course consisting of several course work subjects and a project.
Prerequisite 40 credit points from Level 300 subjects offered by the Department of Statistics obtaining al least a Credit grade average.
Content
Students are required to take subjects worth 40·60 credit points of which al least 3 subjects must be chosen from Level 400 subjects offered by the Department of Statistics.
Students are also required to complete project work which can be worth 20, 30 or 40 credit points. to be detennined by consultation with the Head of the Department. The results of the project are to be presented in a thesis. The project may be a practical one involving the analysis of dala, or a theoretical one. Work on the project normall y starts early in February. Leve! 400 units which may be offered are:
Credit Points
STAT401 PROBABILITY THEORY 10
STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA 10
STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVIVAL ANALYSIS 10
STAT404 ROBUST REGRF.sSION AND SMOOTHING 10
POSTGRADUATE SUBJEIT DESCRIPTIONS
Credit PoinJs
STAT405
STAT406
STAT407
STATISTICAL CONSULTING
METHODS FOR QUAUTY IMPROVEMENT
ADVANCED TOPICS IN STATISTICS
10
10
10
STAT40S·11 PROJECf 10,20. 30 or 40
LEVEL 400 STATISTICS SUBJECTS
STAT401 PROBABILITY THEORY IOcp
Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST AT subjects obtaining alleast a Credit grade average.
This is a rigorous course on the mathemalical theory of probability, presenting techniques and theory needed to establish limit theorems. The applications of such techniques are spread throughout the discipline of Stalistics.
Topics covered include: elementary measure theory, random variables. expectalion. the characteristic function, modes of convergence, laws of large numbers. central limit theorems,law of the iterated logarithm.
References
Billingsley. P. 1979, Probability and Measure, Wiley.
Breiman, L. 1968. Probability Addison-Wesley.
Chung, K.L. 1974, A course in Probability Theory. 2nd edn, Academic Press.
Dudley, R.M. 1989,Real Analysis & Probability, Wadsworth & Brook.
Moran,P.A.P.I968,1984,Anln/roductiontoProbabilityTheory, Oxford University Press.
STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA IOcp
Prerequisite Forty credit points level 300 STAT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.
The course will discuss the analysis of categorical data. It will begin with a thorough coverage of 2 x 2 tables before moving on to larger (r x c) contingency tables. Topics to be covered include probability models for categorical data, measures of association, measures of agreement, the Mantel·Haenszel method for combining tables, applications oflogistic regression and loglinear models.
References
Agresti, A. 1990, Categorical data analysis Wiley.
Bishop. Y .M.M., Feinberg, S.E. etal.1975 ,Discrete MuitivariaJe Analysis: Theory and Practice, MIT Press.
Reiss. J.L. 1982. Statistical Methods for Rates and Proportions. 2nd edn. Wiley.
STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVIVAL AJliALYSIS IOcp
Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST A Tsubjectsobtaining alleast a Credit grade average.
137
SECI'ION EIGHT
This course presents a malhemalical treatment of the techniques used in population projections, manpower studies, and the survival models used in demography and biostatistics.
Text
Lawless, J. 1982,statistical Models and Methods for Lifetime Data. Wiley.
References
Cox, D.R and Oakes, D. 1984,AnalysisofSurvival DataChapman & Hall.
Elandt-Johnson, R.C. and Johnson, N.L. 1980, Survival Models and Data Analysis Wiley.
Kalbfleisch,J.D. and Prentice, R.L. 1980, TIw Statistical Analysis of Failure Time Data ,Wiley.
Keyfitz, N.1977,Applied Matlwmatical Demography, Wiley.
Keyfitz, N. 1 %8,lntroduction to tlw Matlwmatics of Population Addison-Wesley.
Pollard, J.H. 1975. Matlwmatical Models for tlw Growth of Human Populations Cambridge U.P.
STAT404 ROBUST REGRESSION AND SMOOTHING lOcp
Prerequisite Fan y credit points level300 ST AT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.
The main theme is the use of the computer to fit models to data when the assumptions of traditional models may not be satisfied or when it is not known in advance what form of model is appropriate. Topics to be covered include: concepts of robustness, L,-, M- and high breakdown estimation in linear regression, scatterplot smoothers (e.g. ACE, LOESS and splines), kernel regression and methods for choosing the amount of smoothing, and radically different approaches (e.g. CART and projection pursuit).
Text
Staudte, R.G.and Sheather, S.J. 1990, Robust Estinultion and T eSling , Wiley.
References
Eubank, R.L. 1988, Spline Smoothing and Nonparametric Regression M. Dekker.
Hampel, F.R. Ronchetti, E.M. et al. 1986, Robust Statistics: tlw Approach Based on Influence Functions, Wiley,
Hlirdle, W. 1990,AppiiedNonparametricRegression Cambridge University Press. 1991, Smoothing Techniques: with impiemenJation in S Springer.
Rousseeuw, P.I. and Leroy, A.M. 1987 ,Robust Regression and OUliier Detection .
STAT405 STATISTICAL CONSULTING lOcp
Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST A T subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.
The aim of this course is to develop both the statistical and nonstatistical skills required for a successful consultant. The course includes a study of the consulting literature, a review of
138
POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
commonly-used statistical procedures, problem formulation and solving, analysis of data sets, report writing and oral presentation, role-playing and consulting with actual clients.
STAT406 METHODS FOR QUALITY IMPROVEMENT lOcp
PrerequisiJe Fortycreditpointslevel300STATsubjectsobtaining at least a Credit grade average.
The course will cover the concepts of total quality management, the Deming philosophy and relevant statistical techniques. Simple methods such as flow charts and Pareto diagrams will becovered, in addition to the various types of control charts and process capability analysis. Modem experimental design techniques for optimizing process performance will be included. The course is a practical one, and the issues involved in actually implementing aquality and productivity improvement program in an organization will be addressed.
Course readings provided.
STAT407 ADVANCED TOPICS IN STATISTICS lOcp
Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300STATsubjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.
This course consists of four modules that are selected from the following topics:
Multivariate methods; randomization, bootstrapping and other com puterintensive methods; analysis of repeated measurements; sample size estimation, analysing large data sets; meta-analyses.
STAT408 Project (10 credit points)
Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST AT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.
STAT409 Project (20 credit points)
Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST A Tsubjectsobtaining at least a Credit grade average.
STAT410 Project (30 credit points)
Prerequisite Forty credit pointsleve1300STAT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.
STAT411 Project (40 credit points)
Prerequisite Fortycredit pointslevel300ST AT subjectsobtaining at least a Credit grade average.
COMBINED HONOURS SUBJECTS
MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS GEOL401) AND GEOLOGY 4O+4Ocp
Prerequisites Completion of ordinary degree requirements obtaining at least a Credit grade average in 40 credit points level 300 MATH/GEOL subjects and permiSSion of the Heads of the Departments of Geology and Mathematics
Conlenl
At least 40 credit points chosen from those available to Honours students in Mathematics together with work equal to 40 credit
SECTION EIGHT
points at 400 Level offered by the Department of Geology. Geology 401 will also include a major thesis which embodies the results of a field research project involving the application of mathematical studies to a particular geological problem. Other work eg seminars and assignments may be required by either Department.
MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS ECON401) AND ECONOMICS 40+40cp
Prerequisites See entry for each subject and consult the Head of both Departments.
MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS PHYS401) AND PHYSICS 40+40cp
Prerequisites See entry for each subject and consult the Head of both Departments.
MATH401) HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS PSYC401) AND PSYCHOLOGY 40+40cp
Prerequisites See entry for each subject and consult the Head of both Departments.
POSTGRADUATE AND HIGHER DEGREE SUBJECTS IN GEOGRAPHY
MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
GEOG491 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES SEMINAR 1 (F.Y.) 20cp
Introduction to environmental assessment, management and decision making using specific examples from the Hunter Region, such as waste management, total catchment management and recreational management. The second semester is devoted to the rationale and methodology of environmental impact assessment and a study of the environmental planning system.
GEOG492 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES MINOR PROJECT (FY) lOcp
Project under individual supervision required forthe Diplomain Environmental Studies. The topic is determined by the student's interest and background.
GEOG591 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDlF..5 MAJOR PROJECT I (F.Y.) 30cp
One-half of the project under individual supervision required for the Master of Environmental Studies. Simultaneous enrolment with GEOG592 required to full time students. Part-time students may take GEOG591 and GEOO592 in separate years. The topic is determined by the student's interest and background.
GEOG592 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES MAJOR PROJECT" (F.Y.) 30cp
One-half of the project under individual supervision required for the Master of Environmental Studies. Simultaneous enrolment withGEOO591 required for full time students. Part-time students may take GEOG591 and GEOO592 in separate years. The topic is determined by the student's interest and background.
POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
GEOG594 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES SEMINAR 2 (F.Y.) 20cp
Continuation of the evaluation of environmental assessment. management and decision making from GEOG491 , using specific examples from the Hunter Region. This course is required for Master of Environmental Studies students. The second semester is devoted to group development and application of a conflict resolution model. with a formal presentation of the results to the Board of Environmental Studies.
GEOG595 DIRECTED ENVIRONMENTAL STUDY 1 (F.Y.) lOcp
GEOG596 DIRECTED ENVIRONMENTAL STUDY 2 (F.Y.) lOcp
Directed research and readings courses under individual supervision for students with specific interests or needs in the area of Environmental Studies.
MATHEMATICS POSTGRADUATE AND HIGHER DEGREE SUBJECTS IN MATHEMATICS
Nole: A meeting will be held on the first Tuesday of the first semester in Room VIO? at 1.00 pm to detennine both the ti metable for these subjects and which of them are to be offered for the year.
Other subjects than those listed here will be offered from time to time, and even at short notice by visitors to the Department. Intending students should consult the Department early in the year regarding these su bjects.
MATH501 ASTROPHYSICAL APPLICATIONS OF MAGNETOHYDRODYNAMICS lOcp
Prerequisites Background in Calculus and Partial Differential Equations.
/lours About 27 Lecture hours - Full year.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
COnlenl
The normal state of matter in the universe is that of a plasma, or ioni7..ed gas, penneated by magnetiC fields. Moreover, these fields (unlike that of the earth) may be dominant. or at least significant, in controlling the structure of the region. The aim of this course is to investigate the effects of astrophysical magnetic fields.
References
Chandrasekhar, S. 1961, Hydrodynamic and /lydromagnetic Stability, Oxford.
Cowling, T.G. 1957, Magnetohydrodynamics, Interscience.
Dejong, T. & Maeder, A.(eds.) 1977 ,Star Formation, D. Reidel.
Mestel, L. 1975. Effects of Magnetic Fields Mem.Sc.Roy.Sci. Liege (6) 8 79.
Moffatt, H.K. 1978, Magnetic Field Generation in Electrically Conducting Fluids CUP.
139
SECfION EIGHT
Spiegel, B.A. & Zahn, J.P.(eds)1976, Problems of Stellar Convection, Springer.
MATH502 BANACH ALGEBRA
Corequisite MATH310.
Hours About Z7 lecture hours - Semester 2.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
10cp
A Banach Algebra is a mathematical structure where the two main strands of pure mathematical study -the topological and the algebraic - are united in fruitful contact. The course will cover the following subject matter. Nonned algebras; regular and singular elements; the spectrum of an element and its properties; the Gelfand-Mazur theorem; topological divisors of zero; the spectral radius and spectral mapping theorem for polynomials; ideals and maximal ideals. Commutative Banach algebras; the Gelfand theory and the Gelfand representation theorem. Weak: topologies, the Banach-Alaoglu theorem, the Gelfand topology. Involutions in Banach algebras; hermitian involutions; the Gelfand-Naimark representation theorem for commutive B* algebras. Numerical range of an element in a nonned algebra; relation of the numerical range to the spectrum; B* algebras are symmetric, discussion of the Gelfand-Naimark representation theorem for B* algebras. Applications of Banach algebra theory.
Text
Zelazko, W. 1973, Banach Algebras, Elsevier.
References
Bachman,G. & Narici, L. 1966,FunctionaiAnalysis Academic.
Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan, J. 1973, Complete Normed Algebras, Springer.
Bonsall, F.F. & Duncan,J. 1970,NumericaiRangesofOperators onNormedSpacesandElementsojNormedAlgebras, Cambridge.
Naimark, M.A. 1959, Normed Rings, Noordhoff.
Rickart, C.E. 1960, General Theory of Banach Algebras, Van Nostrand.
Rudin, W. 1973, Functional Analysis, McGraw-Hill.
Simmons, G.F. 1963, Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw-Hill.
Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis, Blaisdell.
MATH503 CONVEX ANALYSIS
Corequisite MATH310.
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 2.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Conlenl
lOcp
Convexity has become an increasingly important concept in analysis: much of current research in functional analysis concerns generaiising to convex functions, properties previously studies for the norm; much of interest in convexity has arisen from areas of applied mathematics related to fixed point theory and optimisation problems. We begin with a study of convex sets and functions defined on linear spaces: gauges of convex sets,
140
POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
separation properties. We then study topology on linear spaces generated by convex sets: metrisability, nonnability and finite dimensional cases. We examine continuity and separation for locally convex spaces, continuity for convexity properties and Banach-Alaoglu Theorem. We study extreme points of convex sets, the Krein- Milman theorem. We give particular attention to the study of differentiation of convex functions on nonned linear spaces: Gateaux and Frechet derivative, Mazur's and Asplund's theorems.
Text
Giles, }.R. 1982, Convex Analysis with Application in the Differenliation of Convex Functions, Pitman.
References
Barbu, V. & Precupanu, T. 1978, Convexity and OptimiZalion in Banach Spaces, Sijthoff & Noordhoff.
Clarke, F.H.1983,Optimizationandnon-smcothanalysis, Wiley.
Day, M.M. 1973, Normed Linear Spaces ,Springer.
Diestel, J. 1975, Geometry ojBanachSpaces-SelectedTopics • Springer.
Ekeland, I. & Ternan, R. 1976, Convex Analysis and Variational Problems North Holland.
Giles, J.R. 1978, AfILllysis ofNormed Linear Spaces, Univ. of Newcastle.
Holmes, R.B. 1975, Geometric Functional Analysis and its Applications, Springer.
Roberts, A.W. & Varberg, D.E. 1970, Convex Functions • Academic.
Rockafeller, R.T. 1970, Convex Analysis ,Princeton.
Rudin, W. 1973, Functional AfILllysis , McGraw-Hill.
Valentine, F.A. 1964, Convex Sets, McGraw-Hill.
Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis, Blaisdell.
MATHS04 FLUID STATISTICAL MECHANICS IOcp
Hours Aboul 27 lecture hours - Semester 2.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Cluster-diagrammatic expansions - low density solutions; integrodifferential equations (BGY, HNC, PY) - high density solutions; quantum liquids - Wu-Feenburg fermion extension; numerical solution of integral equations; phase transitions -diagrammatic approach; critical phenomena; the liquid surface; liquid metals; liquid crystals; molecular dynamics and Monte Carlo computer sim ulati on; irreversibility; trans port phenomena Polymeric systems.
Text
Croxton, C.A. 1975, introductiontoLiquidState Physics, Wiley.
Reference
Croxton, C.A. 1974, Liquid State Physics - A Statistical Mechanical Introduction , Cambridge.
SECfION EIGHT
MATH505 FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY 10cp
Prerequisite MATH201, MATH202 and MATH203.
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 2.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
This topic will introduce basic concepts of the local theory of differentiable manifolds. Vector fields, differential fonns, and their mapping. Frobenius' theorem. Fundamental properties of Lie groups and Lie algebras. General linear group. Principle and associated fibre bundles. Connections. Bundle of linear frames, affine connections. Curvature and torsion. Metric, geodesics. Riemannian manifolds.
References
Auslander, L. 1967, Differenlial Geometry, Harper & Row.
Chevalley, C. 1946, Theory of Lie Groups, VoU, Princeton.
Kobayashi, S. & Nomizu, K. 1963, Foundations of Differential Geometry, Vol.l, Interscience .
MATH506 HISTORY OF ANALYSIS TO AROUND 1900 10cp
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year.
ExamiflLltion One 2 hour paper.
Content
A course of lectures on the history of mathematics with emphasis on analysis. Other branches of mathematics will be referred to for putting the analysis into context. Where feasible, use will be made of original material, in translation. The course will be assessed by essays and a final 2-hour examination.
Topics to be covered include: pre-Greek concepts of exactness and approximation; Greek concepts of continuity, irrationality, infinity, infinitesimal, magnitude, ratio, proportion and their treatment in Elements V, XII and the works of Archimedes; developments of number systems and thei requivalents; scholastic mathematics; virtual motion; Renaissance quadrature/cubature by infinitesimals and by "geometry"; Cartesian geometry; 17th and 18th century calculus; rigorization of analysis in the 19th century with stress on the developments of number systems, continuity, function concept, differentiability, integrability.
Rejerences Lists will be presented during the course.
Students interested in this or other topics on aspects of the History of Mathematics should approach the lecturer concerned as soon as possible.
MATH507 LINEAR OPERATORS
Prerequisites MATH310 and MATH311.
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
10cp
The theory of linear operators on Hilbert and Banach spaces is an important theory particularly because of its applications to many areas of pure and applied science. We consider further aspects of
POSTGRADUA 1E SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
normed linear space theory, the algebra of continuous linear operators on a nonned linear space, the spectrum and numerical range of a continuous linear operator, and conjugate operators. We discuss the theory of compact linear operators and the RieszSchauderTheory for such operators. The course concentrates on spectral theory for different types of operator on Hilbert space: compact normal, self -adjoint and normal operators.
References
Bachman, G.& Narici, L. 1966, FunctioflLll Analysis paperback, Academic.
Brown, A. & Page, A. 1970, Elements of Functional Analysis, VanNostrand.
Dunford,N. &SchWarlS,J. 1958/....inearOperators ,Interscience.
Halmos, H. A 1967, Ililbert space Problem Book, VanNostrand.
Kreysig, E. 1978, Introduction to Functional Analysis with Applications, Wiley.
Rudin, W. 1973, Functional Analysis, McGraw-Hill.
Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, inlroduction to Functional Analysis, Wiley.
MATH50S MATHEMATICAL PHYSIOLOGY IOcp
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Content
Physiology - Lbe study of how the body works based on the knowledge of how it i:) constructed - essentially dates from early in the seventeenlh century when the English physician Harvey showed that blood circulates constantly through the body. The intrusion of engineering into this field is well known through the wide publicity given to (for example) heart by-pass and kidney dialysis machines, cardiac assist pace-makers, and prosthetic devices such as hip and knee joints; the obviously beneficial union has led to the establishment of Bioengineering Departments within Universities and Hospitals. Perhaps the earliest demonstration of mathematics' useful application in (some areas of) physiology is the mid-nineteenth century derivation by Hagen, from the basic equations of continuum motion, of Poiseuille's empirical f onnula for flow through narrow straight tubes; detailed models of the cardiovascular circulatory system have recently been developed. Mathematical models have also beenformulated for actions such as coughing, micturition and walking, as well as forthe more vital processes involved in gas exchange in the lungs, mass transport between lungs and blood and blood and tissue, metabolic exchanges within tissues, enzyme kinetics, signal conduction along nerve fibres, spenn transport in the cervix. Indeed, mathematical engineering might now be said to be part of lhe conspiracy to produce super humans (e.g. see "Fast Running Tracks" in Dec. 1978 issue of Scientific American).
This course will examine in some detail a few of the previously mentioned mathematical models; relevant physiological material will be introduced as required.
References
Bergel, D.H. (cd.) 1972, Cardiovascular Fluid Dynamics (Vols I & II) Academic.
141
SECfION EIGHT
Caro,e.G., Pedley, T.J. 1978, TM MechanicsoftM Circulation, Oxford.
Christensen, H.N. 1975, Biological Transport, W.A. Benjamin.
Fung, Y.e. 1984, Biodynamics: Circulation, Springer.
Fung, Y.C. 1981,Biomechanics: MechanicalPropertiesofLiving Tissues Springer.
Fung, Y.c., Perrone,N. & Anliker,M. (eds.) 1972,Biomechanics Its Foundations and Objectives, Prentice-Hall.
Lightfoot, E.N. 1974, Transport PMnomenaandLiving Systems , Wiley.
Margaria, R. 1976, Biomechanics and Energetics of Muscular Exercise Clarendon.
Pedley, T.J. 1980, The Fluid Mechanics of Large Blood Vessels, Cambridge.
West, J.B. (ed.) 1977, Bioengineering Aspects of the Lung Marcel Dekker.
MATH509 NONLINEAR OSCILLATIONS IOcp
Prerequisite MATH304, MATH205
HOUTS About 27 lecture hours - Full year
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ConJenJ
Physica1 problem soften give ri se to ordinary differential equations which have oscillatory solutions. This course will be concerned with the existence and stability of periodic solutions of such differential equations, and will coverthefollowing subjects; twodimensional autonomous systems, limit sets, and the PoincareBendixson theorem. Brouwer's fixed point theorem and its use in finding periodic solutions. Non-critical linear systems and their perturbations. The method of averaging. Frequency locking, jump phenomenon, and subharmonics. Bifurcation of periodic solutions. Attention will be paid to applications throughout the course.
References
Hale, J.K. 1969, Ordinary DijJerenJial Equations, Wiley.
Hirsch, M.W. & Smale, S. 1974, Differential Equations, Dynamical Systems and Linear Algebra, Academic.
Marsden,J.E. & McCracken, M. 1976,TheHopfBifurcationand its Applications, Springer.
Nayfeh, A.H. & Mook, D.T. 1979, Nonlinear Oscillations , Wiley.
Stoker, J.1. 1950, Nonlinear Vibrations, Wiley.
MATH510 PERTURBATION THEORY
Prerequisites MATH201, 2m, 304.
HOUTS About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ConJenJ
lOcp
Regular perturbation methods, including parameter and coordinate perturbations. A discussion of the sources of nonunifonnity in perturbation expansions. The method of strained coordinates and
142
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
the methods of matched and composite asymptotic expansions. The method of multiple scales.
References
Bender, C.M. & Orszag, S.A. 1978, Advanced Math2matical Methodsfor ScienJists and Engineers, McGraw-Hill.
Cole, J.D. 1968, Perturbation Methods inAppJied Mathematics, Blaisdell.
Nayfeh, A.H. 1981, Introduction to Perturbation Techniques, Wiley.
Nayfeh, A.H. 1970, Perturbation Methods Wiley.
VanDyke, M. 1975, Perturbation Methods in Fluid Mechanics , Parabolic.
MATH511 QUANTUM MECHANICS
Hours About 27 lecture hours -Semester 2.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
COnJenJ
IOcp
Operators; Schrodinger equation; one dimensional motion; parity; harmonic oscillator; angular momentum; central potential; eigenfunction; spinand statistics; Rutherford scattering; scattering theory phase shift analysis; nucleon-nucleon interaction; spindependent interaction; operators and stale vectors; Schrodinger equations of motion; Heisenberg equation of motion. Quantum molecular orbitals; hybridization; LCAO theory; MO theory.
Texts
Croxton, C.A. 1974,lntroductoryEigenphysics, Wiley.
Matthews, P.T. 1968, inJroduction to QuanJwn Mechanics, McGraw-Hill.
MATH512 RADICALS & ANNIHILATORS IOcp
Prerequisite MA TH312
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year
Examination One 2 hour paper.
COnJenJ
This topic will briefly outline the classical theory of finite dimensional algebras and the emergence of the concepts of radica1, idempotence, ring, chain conditions, etc. Hopefully thus set in perspective, the next part will deal with the Artin-HopkinsJacobson ring theory and the significance of oth.er radicals when finiteness conditions are dropped. The relations between various radicals, noetherian rings, left and right annihilators and the Goldie-Small theorems will end the topic.
References
Cohn, P. 1977,Algebra Vol. 2, Wiley.
Divinsky, N. 1964, Rings and Radicals, Allen-Unwin.
l-ierstein, IN. 1968, Non-commutative Rings, Wiley.
Kaplansky, I. 1969, Fields and Rings, Chicago.
McCoy, N. 1965, The Theory of Rings ,McMillan.
MATH513 SYMMETRY
Prerequisite Some knowledge of Linear Algebra.
IOcp
SECfION EIGHT
Hours About 27 lecture hours -Semester 1.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ConJenJ
lbis course studies various aspects of symmetry. Matters discussed may include: invariance of lattices, crystals and associated functions and equations; pennutalion groups; finite geometries; regular and strongly-regular graphs; de~igns; tactical configurations, "classical" simple groups, Matrix groups, representalions, characters.
References
Biggs, N.L and White, A.T. 1979, Permutation Groups and Combinatorial Structures, Cambridge.
Carmichael, R.D. 1984, Groups of Finite Order, Dover reprint.
Harris, D.C. & Bertolucci, M.D.1978, Symmetry and Spectroscopy, Oxford.
Rosen, J. 1975, Symmetry Discovered, Cambridge.
Shubnikov, A.V. & Koptsik, V.A. 1974, Symmetry in Science and Art, Plenum Press.
Weyl, H. 1973, Symmetry, Princeton.
White,A.T. 1973, Graphs, GroupsandSurfaces North-Holland.
MATH514 VISCOUS FLOW THEORY
Prerequisites MATH 306, MATH305.
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ConJenJ
IOcp
Basic equations. Some exact solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations. Approximate solutions: theory of very slow motion, boundary layer theory, etc.
References
Batchelor, G.K. 1967, An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge.
Landau, LD. & lifshitz, E.M. 1959, FluidMechanics, Pergamon.
Langlois, W.E 1964, Slow Viscous Flow, Macmillan.
Pai, S.1. 1956. Viscous Flow Theory Vol.!, Van Nostrand.
Rosenhead, L. (ed.) 1963, Laminar Boundary Layers, Oxford.
Schlichting, H. 1968, Boundary Layer Theory, McGraw-Hill.
Ternan, R. Navier-Stokes 1976, Equations - Theory and Nwnerical Analysis, North Holland.
MATH515 GEOMETRICAL MECHANICS IOcp
Recommended Companion Foundations of Modem Differential Geometry.
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 2.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ConJenJ
For all but the simplest systems Lagrangian or Hamiltonian formulations of mechanics are vastly superior (albeit equivalent) to Newton's equations. Initially the course will introduce
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS
Lagrangian and Hamiltonian fonnulations, and apply them to systems of particles with constraints and to rigid-body systems.
Thesecond part of the course will present Ute modem geometrical formulations of Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics. An ab initio introduction will be given to smooth vector fields and their flows, differential fonns, the tangent and cotangent bundles. Lagrangian mechanics will then be presented in tenus of flowson the tangent bundle of configuration space, with Hamiltonian mechanics taking place on the cotangent bundle.
If time (and student interest) permits topics that might be touched upon include: Hamilton-Jacobi theory, action-angle variables, approximation methods, classical field theory, geometrical quanti sat ion.
References
Arnold, V.I. 1978, GeometricalmethodsofClassicalMechanics, Springer.
Abraham, R., Marsden, J.E. 1978, Foundations of Mechanics, Benjamin/Cummings.
Crampin, M. , Pirani, F.A.E. 1986, Applicable Differential Geometry, CUP.
(and others to be advised).
MATH516 CONCRETE GROUP THEORY IOcp
Prerequisites MATl1211.
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
ContenJ
A course on some aspects of group construction, which will include discussion of: presentation of a group by generators and relations; presentation of a group as a group of penuutations, and as a symmetry group or structure-preserving group; relations bet ween groups and some geometrical objects; representation of a group as a group of matrices; construction of groups in various ways from known groups; constructions preserving varietal and categorical properties; construction of "generating" groups of certain classes.
References
Burrow, M. 1965, Representation Theory of Finite Groups, Academic Press.
Coxeter, H.S.M. & Moser, W.O.J. 1957, GeneratorsandReiLJtions for Discrete Groups, Springe.
Feit, W.1. 1969,Clulracters of Finite Groups, Benjamin.
Hall, Jr, M. 1962, The Theory of Groups ,Macmillan.
KUTOsh, A.G. 1960, The TMory of Groups Vols.1 & II Chelsea, Tr.& ed. K.A. Hirsch.
and other articles and books mentioned during the course.
MATH517 ANALYSIS OF TOPOLOGICAL STRUCTURES
Prerequisites MATH205.
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
lOcp
143
SECTION EIGHT
Content
A topolo&ical space is the most basic structure for analysis study. We develop separation axioms, including Urysohn's Lemma, countable base properties, product and quotient topologies, compactness and Tychonotrs Theorem. Toliok to metric spaces we outline Ute basic metrisation theorem.
We then study linear topologies and their special properties,local bases and locally convex topologies, the metrisation and normability theorems. Gauges and Polars. The Hahn Banach Separation Properties are developed. The theory is applied to the study of weak topologies on Banach spaces, the Banach-Alaoglu Theorem and Goldstine Theorems.
References
Giles, J.R.1982. Con ... ex Analysis with Application in tM DijferentiaJion ofCon ... ex Functions I Pitman.
Jameson, GJ.O.1974, Topology and NormedSpaces, Chapman & Hall.
Kelly, J.L. 1955. General topology, Van Nostrand.
Kelly J.L. & Namioka, 1..1965, Linear topological spaces, Van Nostrand.
Robertson, A.P. & W.J. 1964, Topological veclor spaces, Cambridge.
Simons, G.F. 1963,lnJroductiontotopologyandmodernanalysis, McGraw-Hill.
Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction to Functional Analysis, 2nd edn, Wiley.
Wilansky, A. 1978,Modernmethods in topological vector spaces, McGraw-Hill.
Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis. Blaisdell.
Willard, S. 1970, General topology, Addison-Wesley.
MATH518 LIE GROUPS AND ALGEBRAS WITH APPLICATIONS TO DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS IOcp
Prerequisite MA TH304.
Hours Approximately 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Contem
Introduction to lie groups, manifolds, vector fields and Lie algebras. Symmetry groups of differential equations, prolongations, group calculations and integration. Group invariant solutions, classification, quotient manifolds. Conservation laws and groups. Generalized symmetries and recursion operators.
MATH519 GENERAL RELATIVITY lOcp Recommended Companion Foundations of Modem Differential Geometry.
Hours Approximately 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Contem
This topic presents an introduction to general relativity - the
144
POSTGRADUAlE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
current theory of gravitation. The subject will be presented usin, methods of modem differential geometry. Relativity may be (and will be) regarded as a special application of pseudo·Riemannilll geometry, where the manifold, here space-time, has a metric thal is not positive definite.
Particles, fluids and electromagnetic fields will be introduced into arbitrary space-times. It will then be shown how these sources of "malter" can generate the geometry of space-time via Einstein's field equations. Applications of the theory will include introductions to black holes and to relativistic cosmology.
References
O'Neill, Barrett. 1983, Semi-Riemannian Geometry with applications to Relativity, Academic.
Hawking, S.W. & Ellis, G.F.R. 1973. TM lArge scale structure of space-lime Cambridge.
OtMrs to be advised.
MATH520 C' - ALGEBRAS Hkp
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Semester 1.
Examination One 3 hour paper.
Conlent
The object of the course is to explain the basic properties of C"'algebras, and to see some of the ways they arise in different areas of mathematics. We aim to minimise the technical background required, and to assume onI y a very basic background in functional analysis.
We start with a brief look at the mOre general Banach algebras, where we discuss the basic properties of the spectrum, and the Gelfandtransform, whichembedsacommutativeBanachalgebra in an algebra of continuous functions. The Gelfand-Naimark theorem says that, when the algebra is a C"'-a1gebra, the Gelfand trWlsform is an isomorphism, and we shall look at this theorem and its applications in operator theory. We shall then discuss representations of C*-a1gebras -roughly speaking, the ways of realising an abstract C*-a1gebra as an algebra of operators on Hilbert space. There is a general construction which shows this can always be done-due to GelfWld, Naimark and Segal-but we shall focus on the way in which C*-algebras are used in the representation theory of groups and dynamical systems.
References
Conway, J.n. 1985, A Course in Functional Analysis, SpringerVerlag.
Murphy, G.J. 1990, C* -algebrasand Operator Theory, Academic Press.
Tomiyama, J. 1987, Invitation to C*-algebras and topological dynamics, World Scien.
MATH521 CLIFFORD ALGEBRAS AND Sl'lNORS IOcp
Hours Approx. 27 hours- Full Year.
Examination One 2 hour paper.
Contenl
Clifford called the algebras that now bear his name "geometrical
SECTION EIGHT
algebras". This is because these algebras are tailored to the geometry of an orthogonal space. These algebras area vehicle for the study of the (pseudo) orthogonal groups and their simply connected covers the Spin groups.
The Clifford algebras are useful examples of associative linear algebras. They will be used as a paradigm in the study of such algebras. Thecourse will include Wedderbum'sstructure theorem for semi-simple associative algebras and Froberuus' theorem for real division algebras.
The orthogonal and Spin groups will provide concrete examples of Lie groups. Their representations will be studied. In particular the irreducible representations of the various Spin groups, the spinor representations, will be classified.
Reference
Benn,I.M. and Tucker, R.W. 1988, An Introduclion to Spinors and Geometry, Adam Hilge.
Others to be advised.
MATH522 INTRODUCTION TO CATEGORY THEORY IOcp
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year
Examination One 2 hour paper
Content
This course is geared to an examination of the concept of "naturality" in mathematics. Categories and functors will be be introduced as unifying concepts underl ying much of mathematics. Some connections with, and applications to Computer Science will be explored. Adjoint functors will be discussed in some depth and illustrated by applications to various branches of mathematics, particularly group theory. The existence of adjoint functors under certain conditions and a monadic approach to universal algebra will end the course.
Text
MacLane, S. 1971, Categoriesforlhe Working Mathematician, Pringer.
References
Arbib, M. & Manes, E.G.Arrows, 1975,StructuresandFunctor s: The Categorical Imperative , Academi.
Arbib, M. &Manes, E.G. 1986.Algebraic Approachesto Program SemanJics Springer.
Barr, M. & Wells, C. 1990, Calegory Theory for Computing Science, Prentice HajJ.
Walters, R. F.e. 1991, CalegoriesandComputer Science,.Carslaw
MATH523 GREEK MATHEMATICS AND ITS HISTORY 10cp
Hours Full year
Assessment The course will be assessed by essays and seminars
References Presented during the course.
Contenl
An in-depth study of Greek mathematics from about 500RC to
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS
500AD. There will be 27 lectures. In addition students will be expected to read. in translation, substantial parts of original works and to interpret and comment upon those works verbally and in writing. Links with the mathematics of other cultures will
also be explored.
MATH524 DEVELOPMENT OF CONTEMPORARY ALGEBRA IOcp
This course of27 lectures will examine what mathematics can be considered "algebra" and how it has developed from Babylonian times to about 1930. It will concentrate on those streams which appear to have had a bearing on the present state of the subject rather than on interesting sideshoots. Considerable use will be made of source material (mostly in English translation).
Hours Full year
Assessment The course will be assessed by essays and seminars.
MATH525 ADVANCED TOPIC IN ANALYSIS IOcp
Prerequisite MA T1I31O
Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year.
Contenl
This will usually be a choice of one of the following.
Operatorlllcory: Linearoperators on Hilbert and general Banach spaces will be studied. The course will largely concentrate on spectral theory, in particular for compact and compact normal operators.
References
Dunford.N. & Schwarts,J. 1950,LinearOperators, Interscience.
Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction to FWICtional Analysis, Wiley.
Fixed Point Theory and Applications: The basic theorems of Brouwer. Schauder-Tychonoff, Kakutani and Leray-Schauder degree theory will be developed, extended and applied.
References
Smart, D.R. 1974, Fixed Poinl Theorems, Cambridge University
Press.
Shashkin Yu, 1991, A. Fixed Poi.nts Amer. Math. Soc./Math. Assoc. of Amer.
The Geometric Theory of Banach Spaces: The contents will include: reflexivity, dualities between convexity and smoothness, the external structure of convex sets, basic sequences, superflexivity. rcnonnings and the theory of Type.
References
Beauzamy, n. 1985, Introduction to Banach Spaces and their Geometry. North Holland.
Jameson, GJ.O. 1974, Topology and Normed Spaces Chapman and Hall.
The choice of Topic may vary from year to year, in part based on sludent interesls.
145
SECfION EIGHT
MATHS26 MODELS OF BIOLOGICAL PATTERN FORMATION 10cp
Prerequisites MATH201. MATH202, MATH203, MATH213, MATH315.
HOUTS About 27 lecture hours - Full Year.
Examination One 2 hour paper
Conlent
In 1952, Turing suggestedthal, under certain conditions, chemicals can react and diffuse in such a manner as to produce steady state heterogeneous spatial patterns of chemical Of "morphogen" concentration. This topic will discuss a number of models of pattern generation which lead to a system of reaction-<liffusion equations. These will be analyzed in detail and the conditions under which patterns are likely to occur will be characterized.
References
Murray. J.D. 1989. Mathematical Biology. Springer.
Segel, L.A. 1984, Modelling Dynamic Phenomena in Molecular and Cellular Biology, Cambridge.
146
POSTGRADUA lE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION NINE
SUBJECT COMPUTER NUMBERS
Number Subjecl Points
LEVEL 100 SUBJECTS
EAMSI01 Concepts of Ecology 10
EAMSIII Systems Approach in Ecology 10
EAMSI02 Monitoring and Statistics I 10
EAMSII2 Monitoring and Statistics II 10
EAMCI03 Contemporary Environmental Philosophy 10
EAMCII3 Environment and Human Values I 10
EAMSI04 Environmental Planning and Pollution Control Legislation 10
EAMSII4 Local and Regional Environmental Issues 10
AVlAI09 Introductory Meteorology 5
AVlAIIO Introductory Navigation 5
AVlAI II Introductory Aerodynamics 5
AVlA112 Introductory Human Factors 10
AVlA113 Aircraft Performance & Systems 5
AVlAII4 Flight Rules & Procedures 5
AVlAII5 Reciprocating Engines 5
AVlA116 Commercial Meteorology 5
A VlAI 17 Navigation 5
AVlAII8 Aerodynamics 5
AVlAII9 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5
AVlAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Flight Rules and Procedures 10
AVlAI21 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion 5
AVlAI23 Aircraft Performance & Loading 5
Number Subjecl Points
BIOLIOI Plant & Animal Biology 10
BIOLl02 Cell Biology. Genetics & Evolution 10
CHEMIOI Chemistry 101 10
CHEMI02 Chemistry 102 10
COMPIOI Computer Science ] 20
GEOGIO! Introduction to Physical Geography 10
GEOGI02 Introduction to Human Geography 10
GEOLIOI The Environment 10
GEOLl02 Earth Materials 10
INFOIOI Introduction to Information Systems 10
MAQMI35 Mathematics IA 20
MAQMI36 Mathematics IB 20
MAQMI46 Foundation Studies in Elementary Mathematics 15
MAQMI47 Mathematics IEC 10
MATH II I Mathematics III 10
MATHII2 Mathematics 112 10
MATHI02 Mathematics 102 10
MATHI03 Mathematics 103 10
PHYSIOI Physics 101 10
PHYSI02 Physics 102 10
PHYSI03 Physics 103 10
PSYCIOI Psychology Introduction 1 10
PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10
STATlO! Introductory Statistics 10
147
SECfION NINE
Number Subject Points
LEVEL 200 SUBJECTS
EAMS201
EAMS211
EAMS202
EAMS212
EAMC203
EAMC213
EAMS290
EAMS291
EAMS292
EAMS293
AVlA207
AVlA208
AVlA209
AVlA210
AVlA211
AVlA212
AVlA213
AVlA214
AVlA218
AVlA219
AVlA220
AVlA221
AVlA222
AVlA223
BIOL201
BJOL202
BIOL204
BJOL205
BIOL206
BIOL207
CHEM211
CHEM221
CHEM231
CHEM241
CHEM251
CHEM261
COMP201
COMP202
COMP203
Agricultural Systems
Industrial and Urban Systems
System Dynamics and Data Analysis I
System Dynamics and Data Analysis II
Environment and Human Values II
Development and Social Impact Assessment
Hydrology and Soils Analysis
Water Resources Management
Plant Systematics and Plant Ecology
Animal Systematics and Animal Ecology
Aviation Meteorology
Instrument Navigation
Long Range Navigation
Compressible Aerodynamics
Jet Engines
Human Factors
Aircraft Structures & Materials
Jet Aircraft Flight Planning
Advanced Aircraft Perfonnance
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
5
10
5
10
5
High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting 5
Aircraft Fatigue Management 5
Human Performance in Multi-Crew Operations 5
Management in Aviation 5
Aviation Computing and Electronics 5
Biochemistry 10
Animal Physiology 10
Cell & Molecular Biology
Molecular Genetics
Plant Physiology
Ecology
Analytical Chemistry
Inorganic Chemistry
Organic Chemistry
Physical Chemistry
Applied Chemistry
Environmental Chemistry
Advanced Data Struct ure
Computer Architecture
Assembly Language
COMP204 Programming Language Semantics
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
5 COMP205 System Programming
148
SUBJECf COMPUTER NUMBERS
Number SubjecI Points
COMP206 Theory of Computation 5
5
\0
5
\0
\0
10
\0
10
10
5
10
10
10
10
5
10
20
10
I
COMP212 Introduction to Programming
COMP241
COMP299
GEOG201
GEOG202
GEOG203
GEOG204
GEOG207
GEOG208
GEOL211
GEOL212
GEOL213
GEOL214
GEOL215
GEOL216
MAQM214
MAQM235
MAQM236
MAQM237
MATH201
MATH202
MATH203
MATH204
MATH205
MATH206
MATH207
MATH209
MATH210
MATH211
MATH212
MATH213
MATH214
MATH215
MATH216
MATH217
MATH218
PHlL207
PHYS201
PHYS202
PIIYS203
PHYS205
Cognitive Science
Project
Methods in Physical Geography
Methods in Human Geography
Biogeography & Qimatology
Geomorphology of Australia
Population, Culture & Resources
Cities and Regions
Optical Mineralogy
Introductory Petrology
Ancient Environments & Organisms
Geological Structures & Resources
Geology Field Course 215
Geology Field Course 216
Quantitative Methods
Mathematics IIA
Mathematics IIB
Mathematics TIC
Multivariable Calculus
Partial Differential Equations 1
Ordinary Differential Equations 1
Real Analysis
Analysis of Metric Spaces
Complex Analysis 1
Complex Analysis 2
Algebra
Geometry 1
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Group Theory 5
Discrete Mathematics 5
Mathematical Modelling 5
Mechanics 5
Operations Research 5
Numerical Analysis 5
Linear Algebra 1 5
Linear Algebra 2 5
Scientific Knowledge and Scientific Method 10
Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism 10
Mechanics & Thennal Physics 10
Solid State & Atomic Physics 10
Scientific Measurement Principles, Processes and Applications 10
SECfION NINE
Number
PSYC201
PSYC202
PSYC203
PSYC204
STATZOI
STATZ02
STATZ03
Subject
Foundations for Psychology
Basic Processes
Developmental & Social Processes
Individual Processes
Mathematical Statistics
Regression Analysis
Queues & Simulation
STA 1'204 Non-parametric Statistics
STA 1'205 Engineering Statistics
LEVEL 300 SUBJECTS
EAMS301
EAMS311
EAMS302
EAMS303
EAMC313
EAMS304
EAMS314
EAMS390
EAMS391
EAMS392
EAMS393
Environmental Management I
Environmental Management TI
Specialist Study
Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology
Social Aspects of Environmental Health
Regional and National Environmental Issues
Environmental Impact Assessment
Soil Conversation and Management
Water and Soils Applications and Modelling
Rora Component of Environmental Impact Assessment
Fauna Component of Environmental Impact Assessment
Aircraft Design
Advanced Aircraft Operations
Aviation Instruction
Advanced Navigation
Advanced Aviation Instruction
Applied Aerodynamics
Directed Study
Advanced Aviation Management
Flight Deck Perfonnance
Aviation Climatology
Aircraft Stability and Control
Aviation Instruction Practicum r
Aviation Instruction Practicum II
Cell Processes
Reproductive Physiology
Environmental Plant Physiology
Whole Plant Development
Immunology
Points
\0
10
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
10
\0
20
10
10
\0
10
10
10
10
10
5
10
10
10
10
5
10
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
AVlA305
AVlA306
AVlA308
AVlA310
AVlA311
AVlA312
AVlA314
AVlA315
AVlA316
AVlA3I7
AVlA318
AVlA320
AVlA321
BIOLJOI
BIOL302
BIOLJ03
BIOLJ04
BIOL305
BIOLJ07 Molecular Biology of Plant Development 10
Number
BIOLJ09
BIOLJIO
BIOLJl1
BIOLJI2
CHEM311
CHEM312
CHEM313
CHEM314
CHEM321
CHEM322
CHEM323
CHEM33 I
CHEM332
CHEM333
CHEM334
CHEM335
CHEM341
CHEM342
CHEM343
CHEM361
COMP301
COMP302
COMP303
COMP304
COMP305
COMP306
COMP307
COMP308
COMP391
GEOG301
GEOG302
GEOG304
GEOG305
GEOG306
GEOG309
GEOG31O
GEOG311
GEOG315
GEOG316
GEOL311
GEOL312
GEOL313
SUBJECf COMPUTER NUMBERS
SubjecI
Molecular Biology
Microbiology
Pow.
10
10
Environmental Biology 10
Animal Development 10
Analytical Chemistry 10
Chemometrics S
Industrial Chemical Analysis S
Trace Analysis in Environmental Systems S
Inorganic Chemistry 10
Metal-Metal Bonding in ClUster Chemistry 5
Bioinorganic Co-ordination Chemistry 5
Organic Chemistry 10
Heterocyclic Chemistry 5
Organic Reaction Mechanism 5
Identification of Natural Compounds 5
Organic Spectroscopy 5
Physical Chemistry 10
Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 5
Molecular Spectroscopy 5
Environmental Chemistry
Compiler Design
Artificial Intelligence
Computer Networks
Database Design
Design and Analysis of Algorithms
Computer Graphics
Software Engineering Principles
Operating Systems
Special Topic 1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Advanced Methods in Physical Geography 10
Advanced Methods in Human Geography 10
The Biosphere & ConselVation 10
Climatic Problems 10
Geography of Australia An Historical Perspective 10
Society & Space 10
Directed Studies in Human Geography 10
Hydrology 10
Production, Work & Territory 10
Directed Studies in Physical Geography 10
Igneous Petrology &Crustal Evolution 10
Metamorphic Petrology 10
Structural Geology & Geophysics 10
149
SECTION NINE
Number
GE0L314
GE0L315
GE0L316
GE0L317
GEOL318
GEOL319
GEOL320
GE0L321
MAQM335
MAQM336
MAQM337
MATH301
MATH302
MATH303
MATH304
MATH305
MATH306
MATH307
MATH308
MATH309
MATH310
MATH311
MATH312
MATH313
MATH314
MATH315
MATH316
MATH317
MATH318
PHYS301
PHYS302
PHYS303
PHYS304
PHYS305
PSYOOI
PSY002
PSY003
PSY004
PSY005
PSY006
PSY007
150
Subject Points
Stratigraphic Methods 10
Sedimentology 10
Geology of Fuels 10
Resource & Exploration Geology 10
Geology Logging Course 318 5
Geology Field Course 319 5
Geology of Quaternary Environments 10
Groundwater and Soils Not in 1993 10
Mathematics lIlA 20
Mathematics IIIB 15
Mathematics IIlC 15
Logic & Set Theory 10
General Tensors & Relativity 10
Variational Methods and Integral Equations
Ordinary Differential Equations 2
Partial Differential Equations 2
Auid Mechanics
Quantum & Statistical Mechanics
Geometry 2
Combinatorics
Functional Analysis
Measure Theory & Integration
Algebra
Numerical Analysis (rheory)
Optimization
Mathematical Biology
Industrial Modelling
Number Theory
Topology
Mathematical Methods & Quantum
JO
10
10
JO
JO
\0
\0
\0
\0
\0
10
10
\0
\0
\0
\0
Mechanics 10
Electromagnetism & Electronics 10
Atomic, Molecular & Solid State Physics 10
Statistical Physics & Relativity 10
Nuclear Physics & Advanced
Electromagnetism 10
Advanced Foundations for Psychology 10
Independent Project 10
Basic Processes 1 10
Basic Processes 2 10
Individual Processes 10
Advanced Social Processes 10
Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 1 10
Number
PSY008
PSY009
STAT301
STAT302
STAT303
SUBJECT COMPUTER NUMBERS
Subject Points
Advanced Applied Topics in Psychology 2 10
Topics in Neural Science
Statistical Inference
Study Design
Generalized Linear Models
ST A T304 Time Series Analysis
10
JO
JO
\0
\0
LEVEL 400 SUBJECTS
EAMS401
EAMS402
EAMS404
AVIA401
AVIA402
AVIA403
AVIA404
AVIA405
BIOL401
BI0L402
BI0L405
BI0L406
CHEM40J
CHEM402
CHEM405
CHEM406
GEOG4OJ
GEOG402
GEOG405
GEOG406
GEOG491
GEOG492
GEOL401
GEOL402
GEOL405
GE0L406
MAQM435
MAQM436
MAQM437
MATH401
MATH402
MATH405
MATH406
PHYS401
PHYS402
PSYC401
Environmental Management
Seminar Series
Research Project
Aviation Honours 401
Aviation Research Methodology
Technology in Aviation
The Human Variable in Aviation
Aviation Honours - Thesis
Biology Honours 401
Biology Honours 402
Biology Diploma 405
Biology Diploma 406
Chemistry Honours 401
Chemistry Honours 402
Chemistry Diploma 405
Chemistry Diploma 406
Geography Honours 401
Geography Honours 402
Geography Diploma 405
Geography Diploma 406
Environmental Studies Seminar 1
Environmental Studies Minor Project
Geology Honours 401
Geology Honours 402
Geology Diploma 405
Geology Diploma 406
Mathematics IVA
MaLhematics IVB
Mathematics IVC
Mathematics Honours 401
Mathematics Honours 402
Mathematics Diploma 405
Mathematics Diploma 406
Physics Honours 401
Physics Honours 402
Psychology Honours 401
20
20
40
20
\0
\0
\0
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
20
JO
40
40
40
40
\0
JO
10
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
I I
I l, I I
I ~
SECfION NINE
Number
PSYC402
PSYC403
PSYC404
PSYC405
PSYC406
STAT401
STAT402
STAT403
STAT404
STAT405
STAT406
STAT407
STAT408
STAT409
STAT4JO
Subject
Psychology Honours 402
Psychology 403
Psychology 404
Psychology Diploma 405
Psychology Diploma 406
Probability Theory
Analysis of Categorical Data
Demography and Survival Analysis
Robust Regression and Smoothing
Statistical Consulting
Methods for Quality Improvement
Advanced Topics in Statistics
Project
Project
Project
STAT4J1 Project
LEVEL SOO SUBJECTS
GEOG591
GEOG592
GEOG594
GEOG595
GEOG596
MATH501
MATH502
MATH503
MATH504
MATH505
MATH506
MATH507
MATH508
MATH509
MATH5JO
MATH5J1
MATH512
MATH513
MATH514
MATH515
MATH516
MATH517
MATH518
MATH519
Environmental Studies Major Project I
Environmental Studies Major Project II
Environmental Studies Seminar 2
Directed Environmental Study 1
Directed Environmental Study 2
Astrophysical Applications of Magnetohydrodynamics
Banach Algebra
Convex Analysis
Auid Statistical Mechanics
Foundations of Modem Differential Geometry
History of Anal ysis to Around 1900
Linear Operators
Mathematical Physiology
Nonlinear Oscillations
Perturbation Theory
Quantum Mechanics
Radicals and Annihilators
Symmetry
Viscous Flow Theory
Geometrical Mechanics
Concrete Group Theory
Analysis of Topological Structures
Lie Groups and Algebras with Applications 10 Differential F..quations
General Relali vii y
Points
40
30
50
40
40
JO
\0
\0
\0
\0
JO
\0
\0
20
30
40
30
30
20
\0
\0
\0
10
\0
\0
\0
\0
\0
\0
\0
\0
\0
\0
10
\0
\0
10
10
\0
10
Number
MATH520
MATH521
MATH522
MATH523
MATH524
MATH525
SUBJECf COMPUTER NUMBERS
Subject
C*·Algebras
Clifford Algebras and Spioors
Introduction to Category Theory
Greek MaLhematics and its History
Development of Contemporary Algebra
Advanced Topic in Analysis
Points
\0
\0
JO
10
JO
JO MATH526 Models of Biological Pattern Fonnation 10
LEVEL 600 SUBJECTS
ASTK695
ASTK696
ASTK697
ASTK698
EAMS695
EAMS696
EAMS697
EAMS698
BI0L695
BI0L696
BI0L697
BJ0L698
CHEM695
CHEM696
CHEM697
CHEM698
GE0L695
GE0L696
GE0L697
GEOL698
MATH695
MATH696
MATH697
MATII698
PHYS695
PHYS696
PHYS697
PHYS698
STAT695
Foundations of Applied Science & Technology 40
Topics in Applied Science & Technology 40
Advanced Topics in Applied Science & Technology Not in 1993 40
Project Not in 1993 40
Foundations of Environmental Assessment & Management 40 Topics in Environmental Assessment & Management 40
Advanced Topics in Environmental Assessment & Management Not in 1993 40
Project Not in 1993 40
Foundations of Biological Sciences 40
Topics in Biological Sciences 40
Advanced Topics in Biological Sciences Not in 1993 40
Project Not in 1993 40
Foundations of Chemistry 40
Topics in Chemistry 40
Advanced Topics in Chemistry Not in 1993 40
Project Not in 1993 40
40 Foundations of Geology
Topics in Geology 40
Advanced Topics in Geology Not in 1993 40
Project Not in 1993 40
Foundations of Mathematics 40
Topics in Mathematics 40
Advanced Topics in Mathematics Not in 1993 40
Project Not in 1993 40
Foundations of Physics 40
Topics in Physics 40
Advanced Topics in Physics Not in 1993 40
Project Not in 1993 40
Foundations of Statistics 40
151
SECfION NINE
Number
STAT696
STAT697
STAT698
152
Subject
Topics in Statistics
Advanced Topics in Statistics Not in 1993
Project Not in 1993
Points
40
40
40
SUBJECf COMPUTER NUMBERS
I i
I I ,
I ,
I I
AE N AT L NUR AN AS SC M W J B EG UC CG CE EB G CCK CCW ED CB CT Q p E EE EA EF ES C GH GDT GY H HH HT La MW v A EC K D Y RW SB SH SW
~ ~ THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE CAMPUS LAYOUT
ABORIGINAL EDUCATION CENTRE ARCHITECTURE BUILDING ART BUILDING AUCHMUTY LIBRARY 2NUR-FM RADIO STATION ANIMAL HOUSE ANIMAL STORE AUCHMUTY SPORTS CENTRE AVIATION BUILDING BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES BUILDING BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES BUILDING B01: LECTURE THEATRE BULK SOLIDS ENGINEERING CENTRAL ADMINISTRATION: The Chancellery CENTRAL GARAGE CERAMICS CHEMICAL AND MATERIALS ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY BUILDING CHILD CARE CENTRE - KINT AlBA CHILD CARE CENTRE - WONNA YBA CIVIL ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING COMMONWEALTH BANK COMPUTING TEACHING BUILDING DRAMA STUDIO DRAMA THEATRE EOl: LECTURE THEATRE ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING ENGINEERING ADMINISTRATION . ENGINEERING CLASSROOMS ENGINEERING SCIENCE GEOLOGY BUILDING GREAT HALL GRIFFITH DUNCAN THEATRE GYMNASIUM HOl: BASDEN THEATRE HUNTER BUILDING HUNTER TECHNOLOGY CENTRE LECTURERS OFFICES MAINTENANCE WORKSHOP MATHEMATICS BUILDING MCMULUN BUILDING MECHANICAL ENGINEERING MEDICAL SCIENCES BUILDING PHYSICS BUILDING PROPOSED 2NUR-FM STUDIOS RICHARDSON WING SCIENCE BUILDING STAFF HOUSE SCULPTURE WORKSHOPS
RS SOCIAL SCIENCES BUILDING SE SPECIAL EDUCATION CENTRE SP SPORTS PAVILION SH STAFF HOUSE TB TEMPORARY OFFICE BUILDINGS TC TENNIS COURTS TG TRACTOR GARAGE TA TUNRA ANNEXE U UNIVERSITY UNION US UNIVERSITY UNION - HUNTER VA VISUAL ARTS/ MEDIA STUDIES
sri !DENTS RESIDENCES EH EDWARDS HALL EV EVATT HOURS (with proposed extensions) IH INTERNATIONAL HOUSE (with proposed
extenSions UV Site for new student residential complex
currently University Village
--"---./
, /' /~/
(~'~,/ \(
"~j' , TG i '~
l I,
\ Sports field 3
2